JP7388739B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game and executes an effect based on the determination result.

In conventional gaming machines, when a game ball enters the starting hole and it is determined whether or not to execute a special game, the special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display device in a manner that shows the determination result after the special symbol is variably displayed. The pattern will be stopped and displayed. In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, in a predetermined image display device, the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner as the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the determination result is displayed as the special symbols are stopped and displayed. The production pattern will be stopped and displayed.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-96091

By the way, in the conventional gaming machines, there is room for improvement in terms of improving the interest of the performance.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the performance.

The present invention employs the following configuration to solve the above problems.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for making a special game determination as to whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition; a symbol control means that notifies the result of the special game determination by stopping and displaying the symbol after the elapse of a variable time; a first gaming state; and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state. a game state control means capable of controlling the game in any of the game states; and a performance control means that controls the performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means controls the variation of the symbols. It is possible to notify the result of the special game determination by displaying the performance symbols in a variable manner in response to the display, and by stopping and displaying the performance symbols in response to the stop display of the symbols, and the launch of the game ball. is possible to execute a predetermined notification effect regarding the number of executions of the special game judgment, and when a predetermined condition regarding the number of executions of the special game judgment is satisfied, after starting to fluctuate the effect symbols based on the result of the special game judgment, a first predetermined A first effect that makes at least a part of the effect pattern difficult to see by displaying an image can be executed, and the notification effect of the first aspect can be executed before the first effect is executed. , during the first performance, it is possible to execute the notification performance of a second aspect different from the first aspect without executing the notification performance of the first aspect , and the first performance After that, when the performance symbol can be displayed and the predetermined condition is not satisfied, a second predetermined image different from the first predetermined image is displayed during the variable display of the performance symbol based on the result of the special game determination. A second performance that makes at least a part of the performance pattern difficult to see by displaying an image can be performed, and after the second performance, the performance pattern can be displayed, and the first performance is When executed, the game can be controlled in the second gaming state.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the performance.

Front view of pachinko game machine 1 A plan view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine 1 Perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1 Overall block diagram of gaming machine 1 A diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table used in jackpot determination performed based on winning of a game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. It is a diagram showing an example of a symbol determination table for determining a jackpot symbol or a small winning symbol when a jackpot or small hit is determined in the jackpot determination based on winning in the first starting hole or the second starting hole. Diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern table set for each period A diagram showing an example of a game flow of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 in the normal mode set during the normal gaming state. A timing chart showing the flow of performance when transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state based on the specified number of changes after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed. A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main screen at each timing shown in FIG. A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main screen at each timing shown in FIG. A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main screen at each timing shown in FIG. A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main screen at each timing shown in FIG. Timing chart showing the flow of the time-saving introduction performance when the first special symbol is not held when the specified number of changes are performed after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed. A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main screen at each timing shown in FIG. Timing chart showing the flow of performance when entering pre-introduction mode A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main screen at each timing shown in FIG. A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main screen at each timing shown in FIG. Timing chart showing the flow of the performance when the time-saving introduction performance is performed via the pre-introduction mode A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main screen at each timing shown in FIG. A diagram illustrating an example of the performance when the first special symbol is not suspended at the end of the specified number of fluctuations in the pre-introduction mode. Timing chart showing an example of the performance when the SPSP reach performance is performed when the result of the jackpot determination performed in the normal gaming state other than the introduction mode is a loss A diagram showing an example of production at each timing in FIG. 23 A diagram showing an example of production at each timing in FIG. 23 A diagram showing an example of production at each timing in FIG. 23 A timing chart showing an example of a performance when a reach hit is announced in the SPSP reach performance when the result of the jackpot determination performed in the normal gaming state other than the introduction mode is a jackpot. A diagram showing an example of production at each timing in FIG. 27 A diagram showing an example of production at each timing in FIG. 27 A timing chart showing an example of a performance when the reach performance is not performed when the result of the jackpot determination performed in the normal gaming state other than the introduction mode is a loss. A diagram showing an example of production at each timing in FIG. 30 A diagram showing an example of production at each timing in FIG. 30 Diagram showing an example of the characteristics of each shielding effect A diagram showing an example of lamp control when the second time-saving game state transitions to the normal game state without a jackpot game being played. A diagram showing an example of a game flow of a gaming machine according to the first modification A diagram showing an example of a game flow of a gaming machine according to a second modification example. A diagram showing an example of a game flow of a gaming machine according to a third modification. A diagram showing the setting of a third time-saving game state according to a time-saving symbol in a gaming machine according to a third modification example. A diagram showing an example of a game flow of a gaming machine according to a fourth modification. A diagram showing an example of mode transition according to the number of changes of special symbols in the fourth modification A diagram showing an example of control of the gaming state when an activation trigger for each time-saving gaming state occurs during each gaming state. Flowchart showing main processing in main control unit 100 Flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in main control unit 100 Detailed flowchart of input control processing in step S200 in FIG. 43 Detailed flowchart of the first starting port switch process in step S210 of FIG. 44 Detailed flowchart of the second starting port switch process in step S220 in FIG. 44 Detailed flowchart of specific area switch processing in step S250 of FIG. 44 Detailed flowchart of special figure special electric control process in step S300 of FIG. 43 Flowchart showing special symbol determination processing in step S320 of FIG. 48 Flowchart showing the jackpot determination process in step S3207 of FIG. 49 Flowchart showing the fluctuation pattern determination process of step S3208 in FIG. 49 A diagram showing an example of the normal variation pattern table Tn used in the normal mode in the normal gaming state A diagram showing an example of a pre-introduction variation pattern table Tnx used in the pre-introduction mode A diagram showing an example of the second time-saving variation pattern table Tb1 used in the first variation in the second time-saving game state A diagram showing an example of the second time-saving variation pattern table Tb2 used in the second and subsequent variations in the second time-saving game state A diagram showing an example of the second time-saving variation pattern table Tb11 (with jackpot history) used in the first variation in the second time-saving gaming state A diagram showing an example of the second time-saving variation pattern table Tb12 (with jackpot history) used in the second and subsequent variations in the second time-saving gaming state A diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table Ta2 used in the first time saving game state Flowchart showing the special symbol variation process of step S330 in FIG. 48 Flowchart showing special symbol stop processing in step S340 of FIG. 48 Detailed flowchart showing the jackpot game process of step S350 in FIG. 48 Flowchart showing the small winning game process of step S360 in FIG. 48 Flowchart showing jackpot game end processing in step S370 of FIG. 48 A diagram showing an example of a post-jackpot game status setting table used to set the gaming status after a jackpot game is played. Diagram showing the game state that is referred to at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win game Diagram showing the game state referenced at the end of the jackpot game via the small win game Flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed in the production control unit 130 Flowchart showing an example of command reception processing in step E10 of FIG. 67 Flowchart showing an example of fluctuation start command processing in step E113 of FIG. 68

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be specifically explained with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, FIG. 2 is a plan view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a through which game balls (game media) flow down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front and rear directions, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ) is fixed via.

The game board mounting frame 3 is removably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism 6 at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported using the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. has been done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door with respect to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, so that various devices installed on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It becomes possible to carry out maintenance, etc.

The glass frame 4 is removably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported around the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front side of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-back direction is formed in the approximate center of the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed to close the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, making the gaming area 5a visible through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

An audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker and a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative LEDs are provided above the opening 8 of the glass frame 4. In addition, at the lower part of the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there is an upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as game balls paid out from a payout device 95 to be described later based on the establishment of a granting condition, and A lower tray 12 is provided for receiving and storing game balls that have flown into an overflow ball channel (to be described later) without being able to fit into the tray 11, and a firing operation device 13 that can be operated to fire the game balls. .

The audio output device 9 outputs BGM (background music), sound effects, and the like to produce sound (sounds such as music and voices). Further, a plurality of frame illumination devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the direction and color of light emitted from each lamp (LED). Further, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to turn on/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or a payout abnormality occurs in which the game balls cannot be paid out from the payout device 95.

The upper tray 11 is for storing game balls to be supplied to the firing device 26. The game balls stored in the upper tray 11 are guided to the firing device 26, and are fired into the game area 5a with a hitting force according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15.

In addition, on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, there are a performance button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (FIG. 1 or 2 Reference) is provided.

The production button device 16 includes a production button 17 that can perform a decision operation etc. (operation input), a production button detection switch 17a for detecting the operation of the production button 17, and a production button 17 that can be set in a normal state and a normal state. a button drive device 17b equipped with a button drive motor for changing the presentation button 17 to a protruding state located above and a button vibration motor for changing the production button 17 between a normal state and a vibration state in which it vibrates in a predetermined manner; A production button light emitting LED 17c is provided for changing the production button 17 between an off state and a lighting state in which light is emitted in a predetermined manner. A player can input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1 using the performance button device 16.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (upper button 191A, left button 192A, lower button 193A, right button 194A) that can perform operations such as selection operations, and a cross key for detecting the operation of the cross key 19. A key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 4) is provided, and a player can input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

An overflow ball channel (not shown) is formed between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12 for receiving game balls that cannot fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. In addition, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 4) is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path to detect the occurrence of a tray full error in which the lower tray 12 is full of game balls. While the full state is detected, the payout of game balls by a payout device 95, which will be described later, is stopped.

The firing operation device 13 includes a base body 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base body 14, and a touch sensor that detects when the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15. (not shown) and a firing volume made of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. When the touch sensor detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the firing device 26 (see FIG. 4) is configured to be able to fire the game ball.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting part (not shown) for mounting the game board 5, a firing device 26 (see FIG. 4) for firing the game ball toward the gaming area 5a, and a game board mounting part (not shown) for mounting the game board 5. A locking mechanism 27 for locking the mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in a closed state, and an open detection switch for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion is formed in the shape of a concave chamber with a front opening at approximately the center near the top of the game board mounting frame 3, so that the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the concave chamber of the game board mounting part, and various devices installed on the back side of the game board 5 are exposed to the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. .

The firing device 26 includes a firing member for firing a game ball and a firing solenoid for driving the firing member. The firing device 26 launches a game ball toward the game area 5a by operating a firing solenoid with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 of the firing operation device 13.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting part 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

A curved inner rail 35 and an outer rail 36 are provided at a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, and a game area 5a where a game ball can flow down is surrounded by the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36. is formed. Further, between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36, a shooting ball guide path 38 is formed that guides the game ball shot by the shooting device 26 to the upstream part of the gaming area 5a. Furthermore, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the gaming area 5a to guide the game balls that have flown down to the outside of the gaming area (to the collecting section of the gaming board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 called a center case that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior is provided, and this decorative frame 40 allows the game area 5a to fire with a first firing force. The game area is divided into a left side gaming area where the game ball fired flows down, and a right side gaming area where the game ball fired with a second firing force stronger than the first firing force flows down, and the left side gaming area and the right side gaming area. communicate with each other below the decorative frame 40.

A warp device 41 is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce a game ball flowing down the left side game area into the inside of the decorative frame 40, and a warp device 41 is provided at the lower part of the decorative frame 40 to warp the game ball flowing down the left side game area into the inside of the decorative frame 40. A stage section 42 is provided for rolling the game balls introduced into the frame 40 and causing them to flow down below the decorative frame 40.

Below the left side of the decorative frame 40, there are three general prize winning holes 43 spaced apart from each other, in which game balls can always be entered. One general winning hole 43 is provided in which a ball can always be won. When the game balls that have won (balls entered) in this general winning hole 43 are detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 4) (the granting conditions are met), a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls are The balls are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) onto the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarded with prize value).

A first starting opening 45 (first special symbol starting winning area) is provided below the stage portion 42, in which a game ball can always be won. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, a right is granted to determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game or small hit game). be remembered). Further, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are delivered to the upper tray 11 from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) as prize balls (giving a prize value). will be paid out. A first starting port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 4) is provided inside the first starting port 45 to detect a game ball that has won (entered) the first starting port 45.

A variable starting section 46 is provided in the gaming area 5a diagonally below and to the right of the first starting port 45. The variable starting unit 46 is configured to change the state from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into a prize based on a winning result in a hit determination (normal symbol determination) to be described later, to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter a prize or to open the game ball easily. It is configured to be changeable in state.

Specifically, the variable starting part 46 has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 1) to become a flow path for the game ball, and also serves as a second starting port opening/closing member that is movable in the front-back direction. 48, a second starting port 47 (starting winning area of the second special symbol) that opens upward directly below the second starting port opening/closing member 48, and a game ball that has won (entered a ball) into the second starting port 47. By moving the second starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 4) that detects , a second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 4) for converting the second starting port 47 into the open state by moving the second starting port opening/closing member 48 toward the rear (winning permissible position). .

When a game ball enters the second starting port 47 which is in the open state during the auxiliary game to be described later and is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 4) (the granting conditions are met), a special game is started. The right to make a jackpot determination as to whether to execute (jackpot game or small hit game) is granted (special figure determination information to be described later is stored). Further, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47 and is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, two) are delivered from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to a prize ball ( The prize money is paid out to the upper tray 11 as a reward value.

In the right side game area of the gaming area 5a, there is provided a regular game gate 44 (general game starting area) through which game balls can pass at all times, and the game ball that has passed through the regular game gate 44 is detected by a gate detection switch 44a. Then, the prize ball is not awarded, but the right to perform a normal symbol determination (hit determination) as to whether or not to execute a winning game is granted (general symbol determination information to be described later is stored).

Below the general figure gate 44, there is a gate that changes from a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (ball) to an open state where it is possible or easy to win a game ball based on a small hit determined in the jackpot determination. A possible first variable winning unit 49 (first variable winning device) is provided.

The first variable winning part 49 (first variable winning device) becomes a flow path for game balls by having an upper surface inclined downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) (part of the bottom surface of the central flow path 91b). a first grand prize opening opening/closing member 51 that is movable in the front-rear direction; and a first grand prize opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the first great winning opening opening/closing member 51; By moving the first big winning hole detection switch 50a that detects the game ball that has won (entered the ball) into the first big winning hole 50 and the first big winning hole opening/closing member 51 toward the front (winning regulation position). For changing the first big winning opening 50 to the open state by converting the first big winning opening 50 to the closed state and moving the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 toward the rear (winning permissible position). It is equipped with a first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b (see FIG. 4).

Then, when the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 moves backward and the first big winning opening 50 is converted from the closed state to the open state during a small winning game to be described later, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 moves backward. The game ball that was flowing down the upper surface or the game ball that reached the first grand prize opening 50 can win a prize in the first grand prize opening 50. When a game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 50 is detected by the first big winning hole detection switch 50a, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are released from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) as prize balls. It is dispensed onto plate 11.

Moreover, a specific area 52 is provided inside the first big prize opening 50. When a game ball enters the first big prize opening 50 during a small winning game, the game ball passes through a specific area 52. When the specific area detection switch 52a provided in the specific area 52 detects passage of the game ball, a jackpot game is performed. Here, a jackpot depending on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 52 is sometimes referred to as a "V jackpot."

Below the first variable winning part 49, the winning of the game ball (ball) is determined based on the fact that the jackpot was determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination or the game ball passed through the specific area 52 during the small winning game. A second variable winning unit 55 (second variable winning device) is provided that can change from a closed state in which winning is possible or difficult to an open state in which winning is possible or easy.

The second variable winning part 55 (second variable winning device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in the figure) to become a flow path for game balls (one part of the bottom surface of the first downstream flow path 91e). a second grand prize opening opening/closing member 57 that is movable in the front-rear direction; and a second grand prize opening 56 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the second major winning opening opening/closing member 57. Then, the second big winning hole detection switch 56a that detects the game ball that has won (entered) the second big winning hole 56 and the second big winning hole opening/closing member 57 are moved toward the front (winning regulation position). By doing this, the second big winning opening 56 is changed to the closed state, and by moving the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 toward the rear (winning permissible position), the second big winning opening 56 is changed to the open state. A second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b (see FIG. 4) is provided.

Then, when the second big prize opening/closing member 57 moves backward during the jackpot game and the second big winning opening 56 is converted from the closed state to the open state, the flow flows down the upper surface of the second big winning opening/closing member 57. The game balls that have been playing or the game balls that have reached the second grand prize opening 56 can win in the second grand prize opening 56. When a game ball that has won a prize in the second big winning hole 56 is detected by the second big winning hole detection switch 56a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are delivered to the prize from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). The ball is delivered to the upper tray 11 as a ball.

In addition, the game ball launched into the left side game area will enter any of the three general winning ports 43 and the first starting port 45 provided below the decorative frame 40, or will flow into the out port 39. . Therefore, the game ball launched into the left side game area is transferred to the general gate 44, the general winning opening 43, the first variable winning part 49 (first big winning opening 50), and the second variable winning part 55 provided in the right playing area. (The second grand prize opening 56) will not be won (passed).

In addition, the game ball launched into the right side game area passes through the regular game gate 44 etc. via the upstream flow path 91a, and passes through one general prize opening 43 provided in the right side game area, the variable starting part 46 (the second If you win in any of the starting opening 47), the first variable winning part 49 (first big winning opening 50), and the second variable winning part 55 (second big winning opening 56), or entering the out opening 39. Become. Therefore, the game balls fired into the right side game area will not enter the general winning hole 43 and the first starting hole 45 provided in the left side game area.

On the back side of the game board 5, there are game balls that have entered the general winning hole 43, the first starting hole 45, the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56, and the game balls that have been won in the out hole 39. An out ball flow path is provided that receives and collects out balls that have flown in and causes them to flow down, and an out ball detection switch 39a (see FIG. 4) is provided at the most downstream part of the out ball flow path. The game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a are discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island equipment) from the discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1.

A main information display 59 is provided outside the gaming area 5a. The main information display 59 includes a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, and a normal symbol display 62. Further, the main information display 59 includes a first special symbol reservation display 63, a second special symbol reservation display 64, and a normal symbol reservation display 65. The main information display 59 also includes a round number display 66, a right-handed display 67, and a status confirmation display 68.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, which is performed based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the first starting port 45. Yes, the second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, which is performed based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the second starting port 47. The normal symbol display device 62 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the hit determination of the normal symbol, which is performed based on the passing (entering ball) of the game ball to the common symbol gate 44. .

Jackpot determination means that when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, special figure determination information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for jackpot pattern determination, small hit pattern determination random numbers for determining reach, random numbers for determining special pattern fluctuation patterns, etc.), and determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game based on the acquired special pattern determination information, and the jackpot symbol when it is determined to be a jackpot. , to determine the fluctuation pattern of small winning symbols, special symbols, etc. when a small winning is determined. In addition, the jackpot determination is sometimes referred to as special symbol determination. The jackpot determination based on winning to the first starting opening 45 (jackpot determination related to the first special symbol) is the first special symbol determination, and the jackpot determination based on winning to the second starting opening 47 (jackpot determination related to the second special symbol) ) is also called the second special symbol judgment.

The first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 each include a plurality of (specifically eight) LEDs. When a jackpot determination is made based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 45, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and is stopped and displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed. The result of the jackpot determination is notified by the stopping manner of the first special symbol. Specifically, in the first special symbol display device 60, the lighting mode of the LED changes (moving lighting) at a predetermined period (32 msec), so that the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The stop display of the first special symbol is performed by lighting each LED of the symbol display 60 in a manner that notifies the result of the jackpot determination (jackpot mode or loss mode). Furthermore, when a jackpot determination is made based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 47, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and after a predetermined time elapses, it is stopped and displayed. The result of the jackpot determination is notified by the manner in which the second special symbol stops. Specifically, in the second special symbol display 61, the lighting mode of the LED changes (moving lighting) at a predetermined period (32 msec), so that a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The stop display of the second special symbol is performed by lighting each LED of the symbol display 61 in a manner that notifies the result of the jackpot determination (jackpot mode, small hit mode, or loss mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, "jackpot" refers to a state in which it is determined to execute a jackpot game (special game) in jackpot determination. "Jackpot game" means a round game in which the big winning hole (first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) is changed from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner, a predetermined number of times with an interval in between ( For example, this is a situation in which the player can easily win prize balls, which is advantageous for the player. In addition, the period of "jackpot game" means the time from the time when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode and the opening starts until the time when the round game ends and the ending ends. You may.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the big winning openings (first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 56) in each round game are predetermined, Even so, one round game ends when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the grand prize opening. In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special games) that have different degrees of advantage to the player.

Moreover, "small hit" refers to a state in which it is determined to execute a small win game in the jackpot determination. "Small winning game" means that the first big prize opening 50 is converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner, and a game ball can pass through the specific area 52.

Normal symbol determination is based on the passing (entering ball) of the game ball to the common symbol gate 44, and the ordinary symbol determination information (random value for hit determination, random value for ordinary symbol determination, random value for determining normal symbol variation pattern, etc.) ), and based on the acquired common figure determination information, it corresponds to determining whether or not to execute a winning game (auxiliary game) that opens the second starting port 47. When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner on the normal symbol display 62, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed to notify the determination result.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of three LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined order in the variable display of the normal symbols. When the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a manner to notify the result of the ordinary symbol determination (win mode or loss mode). The lighting mode of the LED of the normal symbol display 62 also changes (moving lighting) at the same period (32 msec) as the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61.

In addition, in this embodiment, "winning" refers to a state in which it is determined to execute an auxiliary game (winning game) in normal symbol determination. "Auxiliary game" refers to a state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the auxiliary game (winning game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 may be opened even before the maximum number of openings or the maximum opening time is reached. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) win a prize (balls entered), the auxiliary game (winning game) ends. In other words, in the "auxiliary game", the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be satisfied. In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games (winning games) may be provided that have different degrees of advantage to the player.

The first special symbol reservation display 63 is composed of two LEDs, and indicates the number of special symbol determination information (first reservation) that is stored when a game ball enters the first starting port 45. It is for displaying a certain number of first reservations (U1), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reservations. Although up to four first reservations are stored, the number may be fewer or more than four.

The second special symbol reservation display 64 is composed of two LEDs, and indicates the number of special symbol determination information (second reservation) that is stored when a game ball enters the second starting port 47. It is for displaying a certain number of second reservations (U2), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second reservations. Although up to four second reservations are stored, there may be fewer or more than four, or the second reservation may not be stored.

The normal symbol holding display 65 is composed of two LEDs, and indicates the number of normal drawing determination information (normal drawing holding) that is stored when a game ball wins (passes through) the normal drawing gate 44. It is for displaying the number, and it lights up or flashes in a manner that indicates the number of ordinary drawings on hold. In addition, although up to 4 pieces of common picture reservations are stored, it may be fewer or more than 4, or it is also possible not to store common picture reserves.

In addition, the 1st special symbol display 60 and/or the 2nd special symbol display 61 can be comprised with 7 segment LED. For example, if it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination, numbers such as "3" or "7" will be stopped and displayed, and if it is determined to be a loss, "-" will be stopped and displayed, and the fluctuating display will be displayed. It is a good idea to repeat turning off and "-" inside.

The round number display 66 is composed of six LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game) occurs, and is displayed in a predetermined manner to indicate the number of rounds at the start of the jackpot game. The lighting of the LED is started, the lighting of the LED is continued during the jackpot game, and the LED is turned off at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if it is a jackpot game with three rounds, only the leftmost LED will light up, and if it is a jackpot game with ten rounds, all the LEDs will light up.

The right-hand hit indicator 67 is composed of one LED, and is used to display a right-hand hit display that urges the player to fire the game ball toward the right side gaming area (so-called right-hand hit). The LED lights up continuously during the jackpot state (jackpot game), the small win state (small win game), and the time-saving game state to be described later.

The status confirmation indicator 68 is composed of one LED, and is used to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. The LED starts lighting up, and when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends, the LED is turned off. In this way, since the status confirmation display 68 is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine, it is possible to easily confirm whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. . Note that the status confirmation display 68 may be installed at the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1, and may be installed at other locations.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display is displayed in the same manner (lit display) regardless of whether it is set to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, but it is difficult to recognize which mode it is set to. It may be displayed as possible. For example, the status confirmation display 68 may be lit in the setting change mode, and blinking in the setting confirmation mode, or vice versa.

Further, in this embodiment, the status confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the second special symbol reservation display 64, and the number of rounds display 66, the right-handed indicator 67, etc. are off, so one or more LEDs of these indicators may be turned on.

Furthermore, a sub-information display 80 is provided inside the gaming area 5a. The sub information display 80 includes a first sub fluctuation display 81 , a second sub fluctuation display 82 , a first sub reservation display 83 , a second sub reservation display 84 , and a sub general fluctuation display 85 , a sub-normal figure reservation display 86, and a sub-right hit display 87. Note that although the sub-information display 80 is not provided with a display indicating that it is set to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, like the status confirmation display 68 described above, there is a display corresponding to these. An indicator may be provided.

The sub-first fluctuation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, and the sub-second fluctuation display 82 is for displaying the second special symbol in a fluctuating manner. This is for displaying (notifying) whether the vehicle is inside or not, and is each composed of one LED. When the variable display of the corresponding special symbol starts, the LED flashes at a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.25 seconds on → 0.25 seconds off), and when the corresponding special symbol stops displaying, the LED blinks at a predetermined period (for example, 0.25 seconds on → 0.25 seconds off), and when the corresponding special symbol stops displaying, the LED blinks (lights off). or lit).

In addition, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol may be notified by the sub-first fluctuation display 81 or the sub-second fluctuation display 82. In this case, it is preferable that the LED lights up in the case of a jackpot, and turns off in the case of a loss.

The sub-first reservation display 83 is for displaying the number of reservations (first reservation number) for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, and the sub-second reservation display 84 is for displaying the number of reservations for jackpot determination of the second special symbol. This is for displaying the number of reservations (second number of reservations), and each is composed of two LEDs. Then, when the number of reservations is "0", the left and right LEDs turn off, when the number of reservations is "1", the left LED lights up and the right LED goes out, and when the number of reservations is "2", the LED on the right turns off. The left and right LEDs light up, and when the number of reservations is "3", the left LED blinks at a predetermined cycle (0.25 seconds on → 0.25 seconds off), and the right LED lights up, and the number of reservations is "3". 4", the left and right LEDs blink at a predetermined period (light on for 0.25 seconds → light off for 0.25 seconds).

The sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the normal symbols is started, the LED blinks at predetermined intervals (variable display). Then, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, an aspect indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights on in the case of a win, turns off in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in order to be able to grasp only whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the sub-normal symbol fluctuation display 85 is configured to blink while the normal symbol is in the fluctuating display, and to turn on or off when the normal symbol is displayed in a stopped state. You can.

The sub-universal figure reservation display 86 is for displaying the number of ordinary figures pending memory (the number of ordinary figures pending), and is constituted by two LEDs. Then, when the number of reserved general drawings is "0", the left and right LEDs turn off, and when the number of reserved general drawings is "1", the left LED lights up and the right LED goes out, and the number of reserved general drawings is ``1''. When the number is "2", the LED on the left lights up and the LED on the right lights up, and when the number of reserved maps is "3", the LED on the left flashes at a predetermined period and the LED on the right lights up. When the number of reservations is "4", the left and right LEDs blink at a predetermined period.

The sub-right hitting display 87 is for prompting the user to fire the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a (so-called right hitting), and is composed of one LED. Then, the LED lights up continuously during the jackpot state (jackpot game), the small win state (small win game), or the time saving game state, and the LED goes out in other game states.

A first image display device 70 is provided at the back of the performance space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40. Further, a second image display device 71 having a smaller display area than the first image display device 70 is provided in the lower part of the production space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70. The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 may be liquid crystal displays or organic EL displays. Furthermore, a movable performance device 73 for performing motion performance is provided at the top of the performance space 40a.

In the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, various effects are displayed according to the progress of the game. The performance display includes a customer waiting demonstration performance that is performed while the special symbol fluctuation display is not being executed, and a fluctuation performance using the performance symbol 701 that is performed while the special symbol fluctuation display is being performed (starting operation performance, fluctuation display, etc., which will be described later). performance, pre-stop motion performance, etc.), variable display of the small symbol 702 (updated variation) performed during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and jackpot performance performed during the execution of the jackpot game.

Further, the second image display device 71 can perform a moving effect by being moved by a movable device (not shown) constituted by a solenoid, a motor, etc. while the first image display device 70 is performing a variable effect. It has become.

Specifically, the second image display device 71 has a standby position (lower position) located near the end of the first image display device 70 and a production position (upper position) located near the center of the first image display device 70. It is designed to perform a movement effect by moving up and down (up and down) between the two positions. It should be noted that the moving direction of the second image display device 71 may be the left-right direction or the front-back direction, or the movement effect may be performed by operating the effect button 17.

On the display section (display area) of the first image display device 70, three performance symbols 701 (in order from the left, sometimes referred to as a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol) and a small symbol 702 are displayed. The performance symbol 701 and the small symbol 702 are symbols for performance that change according to the variation of the special symbol and stop when the special symbol stops. Depending on how the performance symbols 701 and small symbols 702 stop, it is reported whether or not it is a jackpot.

Further, the first image display device 70 displays a hold icon HA and the icon TI. The reservation icons HA are icons indicating the reservation of the right to determine the jackpot regarding the first special symbol, and a maximum of four are displayed. Further, the icon TI is an icon indicating a change in the current special symbol. The image displayed on the first image display device 70 will be described in detail later.

The movable performance device 73 has a first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b which are movable, and the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are movable during the variable display of the performance symbol 701 executed by the first image display device 70. By causing the second movable member 73b to perform a predetermined motion, it is possible to perform motion production. Furthermore, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a board illumination device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, which can emit light in a predetermined manner during execution of the motion performance. .

Specifically, the first movable member 73a is located at a standby position (first position) located near the end (above) of the first image display device 70 and near the center (downward) of the first image display device 70. It is designed to move (raise, descend) between the production position (second position) and the current performance position (second position). The second movable member 73b is configured to move between a standby position (first position) that covers a part of the front of the first movable member 73a and a performance position where it retreats from the front of the first movable member 73a. .

As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there is a payout device 95 for paying out game balls based on establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize ball, ball loan). A game ball storage section 96 that stores game balls supplied from island equipment etc. and supplies them to the payout device 95, a main control device 110A with a built-in main control section 100, and a payout control device 120A with a built-in payout control section 120. , a production control device 130A containing a production control unit 130, a power supply device 160A containing a power supply board 160, and a gaming information output terminal board for outputting gaming information to the outside of the gaming machine (information collection device such as a hall computer). 90 etc. are provided.

In addition, an opening/closing door type cover member 23 is provided which opens and closes the left and right sides in the left-right direction around a rotation axis set on one left and right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire production control device from the rear. In addition, the production control device 130A controls the volume of production sound output from the audio output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member 23, display devices (first image display device, second image display device), and various lighting devices ( A changeover switch 22 is provided for switching adjustment modes related to adjustment of the amount of light of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74).

On the front side of the main control device 110A, there is a main control section 100 for controlling the game, a state in which the stored contents of the main RAM 100c of the main control section 100 are cleared or the level of advantage of the game (probability of being judged as a jackpot) is displayed. ) RWM clear switch 111a that inputs a signal to update the setting value, a setting key switch 112a that inputs a signal to shift to a setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, by operation using a setting key, An information display 113 (see FIG. 4) for displaying performance information and setting values that enable understanding of actual performance, and other electronic components are mounted.

The information display 113 is composed of four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) arranged in the left-right direction. The two 7-segment displays 113a and 113b from the left constitute an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type), and the two 7-segment displays 113c and 113d from the right constitute a setting. Numerical segments are configured to display numerical information indicating numerical values and performance information.

(Overall block diagram of gaming machine)
Next, the control means for controlling the progress of the game will be explained using the overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG.

The control configuration of this embodiment includes a main control unit 100 that centrally controls the progress of the game (basic operations), and a payout control unit that controls the payout of game balls based on reception of payout control commands from the main control unit 100. unit 120, a performance control device 130A (performance control unit 130) that controls the performance related to the game based on reception of the performance control command from the main control unit 100, and a power source that supplies power to the payout control unit 120 and the performance control device 130A. A substrate 160 is provided.

The communication between the main control unit 100 and the payout control unit 120 is configured to be able to send and receive commands in both directions, and the communication between the main control unit 100 and the production control device 130A (production control unit 130) is It is configured such that commands can be transmitted only in one direction from the control unit 100 to the production control device 130A (production control unit 130).

The main control unit 100 includes a main CPU 100a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 100b that stores game control programs, etc., a main RAM 100c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and input/output ports.

The input/output ports of the main control unit 100 include a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, and a first opening/closing solenoid 48b. Winning hole detection switch 50a, first big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 51b, second big winning hole detection switch 56a, second big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 57b, magnetic detection sensor 57a, radio wave detection sensor 58a, out ball detection switch 39a, main An information display 59, an RWM clear switch 111a, a setting key switch 112a, and an information display 113 are connected. Further, a game information output terminal board 90, a payout control section 120, and a production control section 130 are connected to the input/output port of the main control section 100.

The main CPU 100a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a game control program stored in the main ROM 100b, and performs arithmetic processing related to games while utilizing the main RAM 100c as a work area. This enables control processing according to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoids, indicators, etc.), and control processing for sending and receiving various control commands. Control processing and control processing for transmitting gaming information to the outside of the gaming machine (such as a hall computer) via the gaming information output terminal board 90 are performed.

"Game information" includes the starting hole winning signal that is output every time a game ball wins in the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is ended. A symbol confirmation signal is output every time a jackpot is played, a jackpot signal is output during a jackpot game, a small win signal is output during a small win game, and a small win signal is output during a round game (opening of the jackpot). An open signal, a signal output during the time-saving gaming state described later, a security signal output when a situation that poses a problem (threaten) to the security of the gaming machine 1 (RWM clear, error, etc.) occurs, etc. can be mentioned.

In the memory area of the main ROM 100b, a gaming ROM area where programs and data related to the progress of the game are stored, and an information ROM area where programs and data related to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored are arranged in order. There is.

The gaming ROM area includes a gaming program area in which a program relating to the progress of the game is stored, and a gaming data area in which data relating to the progress of the game is stored.

The information ROM area includes an information program area in which a program related to displaying the performance of the gaming machine is stored, and an information data area in which data related to displaying the performance of the gaming machine is stored.

The memory area of the main RAM 100c includes a gaming RWM area that is used as a work area when executing a gaming program, and an information RWM area that is used as a work area when an information program is executed. ing.

In the gaming RWM area, a gaming work area used as work by the gaming program and a gaming stack area for temporarily saving data being processed by the gaming program are arranged.

The gaming work area includes a setting value area for storing setting values, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (checksum to be described later) for judging abnormalities in the RWM area, and a judgment information area that changes as the game progresses. Game data areas for storing game data are arranged in order.

In the information RWM area, an information work area used as work by the information program and an information stack area for temporarily saving data being processed by the information program are arranged.

A performance information area for storing information related to the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information related to various error determinations are arranged in the information work area.

Hereinafter, a gaming area (gaming ROM area, gaming RWM area) that performs processing based on a gaming program and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) that performs processing based on an information program will be explained below. Explain the relationship.

When the main CPU 100a performs processing based on a gaming program, it basically refers to the gaming data area, and also refers to and updates the contents of the gaming RWM area while using the gaming RWM area as work. ing. Additionally, when performing processing based on an information program, the information data area is basically referenced, and the contents of the information RWM area are referenced and updated while using the information RWM area as work. ing.

However, in the processing based on the gaming program, although the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, they can be referenced. Furthermore, in the processing based on the information program, the contents of the gaming RWM area cannot be updated, but they can be referenced.

When performing processing based on the information program, the flag register is saved in the gaming RWM area in the processing based on the gaming program, and then the information program is called to execute the processing based on the information program. The flag register is returned from the gaming RWM area immediately after the processing based on the program is completed and the gaming program is returned.

In addition, immediately after starting the information program, the stack pointer of the gaming stack area is saved to the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, and all registers used in the gaming program are transferred to the information RWM area. All the registers used in the game program immediately before the end of the information program are restored from the information RWM area, and the stack pointer of the game stack area is restored.

By doing this, it is possible to protect the data used by the gaming program when performing processing based on the information program, and prevent inconveniences from occurring when returning from the information program to the gaming program. Things will go away.

The payout control unit 120 drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of game balls. Further, the payout control unit 120 drives the shooting device 26 to control the shooting of game balls.

The payout control unit 120 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program, etc., a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The input/output port of the payout control unit 120 includes an open detection switch, a full detection switch, a payout ball detection switch for detecting game balls put out from the payout device 95, and a payout motor for paying out game balls from the payout device 95. A ball presence detection switch for detecting that game balls are stored in the game ball storage section 96 is connected.

The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding payout of game balls while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area. As a result, control processing for paying out game balls from the payout device 95 in response to a payout control command from the main control unit 100, control processing for transmitting a command based on the result of arithmetic processing to the main control unit 100, etc. conduct.

A ball feeding solenoid, a touch sensor, a firing volume, a firing solenoid, and the like are connected to the dispensing control unit 120.

When the payout control unit 120 detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15 based on a touch signal input from the touch sensor, it allows the ball feed solenoid and the shooting solenoid to be energized, and removes the ball from the shooting volume. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 has changed based on the detection signal, the ball feeding solenoid is driven, and the firing solenoid is also driven so that the firing intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, thereby playing the game. It is designed to fire balls (99.9 balls/min).

The production control device 130A includes a production control unit 130 that centrally controls the progress of production based on reception of production control commands from the main control unit 100, and a production control unit 130 that controls image display and the like based on reception of production control commands from the production control unit 130. An image and sound control unit 140 that performs control processing of audio output, and a lamp control unit that performs control processing of various light emitting members (LEDs, etc.) and various drive sources (motors, etc.) based on reception of production control commands from production control unit 130. 150.

The production control unit 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores a production control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an RTC 130d that measures date and time, and an input/output port.

A production button detection switch 17a and a cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input/output port of the production control unit 130.

The sub CPU 130a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the performance control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding the performance while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area. As a result, control processing for determining the production mode of the variable production, control processing for transmitting production control commands based on the determination results to the image and sound control unit 140, and detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, etc.) Performs corresponding control processing and control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting devices, motors, etc.).

The image sound control unit 140 receives a command from the production control unit 130 and controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 to display a predetermined image, or causes the audio output device 9 to display a predetermined image. Controls the output of voices and sounds.

The image and sound control unit 140 includes an overall CPU 141a that controls image display and audio output in an integrated manner based on reception of production control commands from the production control unit 130, an overall ROM 141b that stores an overall control program, and A supervisory RAM 141c serving as a work area, a VDP 145 that generates images to be output to the first image display device 70 and second image display device 71 based on reception of display control commands (display list) from the supervisory CPU 141a, and image data etc. It includes a stored CGROM 146, an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) that controls the audio output device 9 based on reception of audio control commands from the central CPU 141a, and an audio ROM that stores audio data and the like.

The overall CPU 141a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out an overall control program stored in the overall ROM 141b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the performance while utilizing the overall RAM 141c as a work area. As a result, a control process for generating a display control command (display list) that instructs the effect images to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting it to the VDP 145, and output from the audio output device 9. It performs control processing and the like for generating and transmitting an audio control command to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

Further, a first image display device 70 , a second image display device 71 , and an audio output device 9 are connected to the image and sound control section 140 . The image and sound control unit 140 (VDP 145 thereof) generates images at predetermined frame time intervals (for example, 1/30 seconds) and outputs the generated images to the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. . As a result, an image including, for example, the production pattern 701 is displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. In addition, sound is output by outputting the audio signal generated by (the audio control unit 148 of) the image/acoustic control unit 140 to the sound output device 9 (speaker).

Further, a changeover switch 22 is connected to the production control device 130A. The changeover switch 22 is a switch for setting the volume value of the sound (production sound such as BGM and sound effects) output from the sound output device 9. For example, depending on the operation of the changeover switch 22, the volume value is set in five levels from "1" to "5". Further, the changeover switch 22 is also used as a switch for setting the light amount values of the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, and the board lighting device 74. Depending on the operation of the selector switch 22, the light amount value is set in five levels from "1" to "5".

Further, a production button detection switch 17a and a cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the production control device 130A.

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs calculation processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and an input/output port.

The input/output ports of the lamp control unit 150 include a frame lighting device 10, a movable presentation device 73, a board lighting device 74, a sub-information display 80, and a presentation button drive device 17b (a presentation button drive motor, a presentation button vibration motor). , the production button light emitting LED 17c is connected.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding effects while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. Thereby, control processing of the frame lighting device 10, the production button drive device 17b, the production button light emitting LED 17c, the movable production device 73, and the board lighting device 74 is performed.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power (operating power) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from the power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and supplies the main power to the gaming machine 1 (main control unit 100, payout control unit 120, (equivalent to power supply means). The power supply board 160 includes a power supply board that detects whether the supplied power supply voltage has decreased (a power outage has occurred) and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control unit 100 based on the decrease in power supply voltage (the occurrence of a power outage). It includes a power failure detection circuit 162 and a backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control unit 100 at the time of power failure (power failure).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is used to switch between an ON state in which main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control unit 100, payout control unit 120, production control device 130A, and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the main power is stopped. A power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk at the game parlor, and when the power switch is turned on, supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. Note that even if the power switch is in the OFF state, the supply of backup power to the main control unit 100 is maintained.

The power outage detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control unit 100 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value. When the power supply voltage becomes larger than a predetermined value during output, the output of the voltage drop detection signal is stopped.

The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when the game machine is energized, and when a power outage (power outage) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is transferred to the main RAM 100c of the main control unit 100. supply As a result, the memory contents of the main RAM 100c are retained even in the event of a power outage (power outage), and after recovery from the power outage (power outage), the gaming control state can be restored to the state before the power outage (power outage). I can do it.

Although backup power is not supplied to the payout control unit 120 and the performance control unit 130, the payout control unit 120 and the performance control unit 130 are provided so that the storage contents of the payout RAM 121c and the sub-RAM 130c are retained even in the event of a power outage (power outage). Backup power may be supplied to the production control section 130. Further, backup power may be supplied to only one of the payout control section 120 and the production control section 130.

(Explanation of gaming status)
Here, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. In this embodiment, the gaming states of the gaming machine 1 include a normal gaming state and a time-saving gaming state. The time-saving gaming state is a state in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the second starting port 47 compared to the normal gaming state. Specifically, in the "normal game state", the probability of being determined to be a hit is set to 4/5, for example, in the normal symbol determination that is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, and the normal symbol The fluctuation time (average) is set to about 30 seconds, and the opening time of the second starting port 47 in the event of winning is set to 0.05 seconds.

On the other hand, in the "time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning in normal symbol determination is set to, for example, 4/5, and the fluctuation time (average) of the normal symbols is set shorter than in the normal gaming state (for example, 1 second). ), and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when a win is determined is set longer than in the normal gaming state (for example, 5 seconds). Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state, compared to the normal gaming state, it is easier for game balls to enter the second starting port 47, the consumption (decrease) of gaming balls is suppressed, and a jackpot based on winning in the second starting port 47 is achieved. The determination is repeatedly executed in a short period of time, resulting in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

In addition, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols and the opening time of the second starting port 47 are set to be more advantageous in the "time saving gaming state" than in the "normal gaming state", but the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols , the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the probability of being determined to be a hit may be set to be advantageous.

In addition, the gaming machine according to another embodiment has a low probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a jackpot is relatively low in the jackpot determination, and a high probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a jackpot is relatively high. Good too. In such a gaming machine, in a low probability state, the probability of being determined to be a hit in normal symbol determination may be set to, for example, 1/10, and in a high probability state, the probability may be set to 9/10.

In the gaming machine 1, the time-saving gaming states include a first time-saving gaming state and a second time-saving gaming state. The probability of being determined to be a hit in the normal symbol determination, the variation time of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when a win is determined are the same in both the first and second time-saving game states. However, the timing for setting each time-saving gaming state is different.

The first time-saving game state is set when a jackpot game is performed. Specifically, the first time saving game state is set at the end of the jackpot game. The first time saving game state ends when the first time saving end condition is satisfied. Details will be described later, but the first time-saving termination condition is that the special symbol has changed a predetermined number of times (for example, 7, 55, or 95 times), and that the small winning game has been played a predetermined number of times. etc., and these conditions are set at the end of the jackpot game. The first time saving end condition is set according to the jackpot symbol and the gaming state (the gaming state when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, or the gaming state when the game ball passes through the specific area 52).

In addition, the second time saving game state is set when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (in the low probability state) reaches a specified number (for example, 500 times) after the RWM clear processing or setting change processing described later is performed. be done. The RWM clear process is a process for returning the gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of shipment. Further, the setting change process is a process of changing the setting values of the gaming machine. Further, the second time-saving game state is set when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (in the low probability state) reaches the prescribed number (500 times) after the jackpot game is played. The second time saving game state ends when the second time saving end condition is satisfied. The second time saving end condition is that the special symbol has been changed a predetermined number of times (for example, 750 times), that the small winning game has been played a predetermined number of times, etc.

In addition, although details will be explained in a modification described later, when a specific losing symbol (time saving symbol) stops when a loss is determined in the jackpot determination, a third time saving game state may be set.

(Example of jackpot determination table)
Next, an example of the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination will be explained. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table used in jackpot determination performed based on winning of a game ball into the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in jackpot determination varies depending on setting changes. The setting values of the gaming machine 1 include, for example, settings 1 to 6. Here, only settings 1 and 2 will be illustrated. Note that in gaming machines according to other embodiments, there may be only one type of setting value.

The jackpot determination table stores random numbers that are determined to be a jackpot, random numbers that are determined to be a small hit, and random numbers that are determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination. A random number value for jackpot determination is obtained in response to a game ball entering a prize in each starting slot, and if the obtained random number value for jackpot determination is each value shown in FIG. This is the judgment result.

For example, in setting 1, when a jackpot determination is made regarding the first special symbol in response to a game ball entering the first starting hole 45, a jackpot determination is made with a probability of 1/200. If it is determined to be a jackpot, any one of A11 to A13 will be stopped and displayed as a stop symbol (jackpot symbol) on the first special symbol display 60 after a predetermined variable time has elapsed. Note that when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the probability of being determined to be a small hit is "0". In the jackpot determination regarding the first special symbol, if it is not determined to be a jackpot, it is a loss. If the first special symbol is determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination, the loss symbol H1 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 after a predetermined variable time has elapsed.

Further, in setting 1, when a jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol is performed in response to a game ball entering the second starting hole 47, it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot with a probability of 1/200. If it is determined to be a jackpot, any one of A21 to A22 will be stopped and displayed as a stop symbol (jackpot symbol) on the second special symbol display 61 after a predetermined variable time has elapsed.

Furthermore, when a jackpot determination is made regarding the second special symbol, it is determined that the small hit is achieved with a probability of approximately 1/68, for example. At this time, after a predetermined variable time has elapsed, any one of K21 to K23 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 61 as a stop symbol (small winning symbol).

Note that the jackpot determination regarding the first special symbol may also be determined as a small hit, and in this case, the small hit probability may be the same as the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol, or may be different. You can.

Furthermore, in setting 2, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot is higher than in setting 1. For example, in setting 2, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination regarding the first special symbol or the second special symbol is approximately 1/194. The probability of determining a small hit is the same as in setting 1. Note that the probability of determining a small hit may be different between setting 1 and setting 2.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol determination table for determining a jackpot symbol or a small win symbol when a jackpot or small hit is determined in the jackpot determination based on winning in the first starting hole or the second starting hole. It is. FIG. 6(a) shows an example of a jackpot symbol determination table for determining a jackpot symbol, and FIG. 6(b) shows an example of a small win symbol determination table for determining a small win symbol.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the first special symbol, for example, the jackpot symbol A11 is stopped and displayed with a 15% probability, and the jackpot symbol A12 is displayed with a 35% probability. is stopped and displayed, and the jackpot symbol A13 is stopped and displayed with a probability of 50%. When the jackpot symbol A11 is stopped and displayed, a round game in which the second jackpot 56 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds is repeated 10 times (10 rounds (denoted as "R")). A one jackpot game is played. Further, when the jackpot symbol A12 is stopped and displayed, a second jackpot game is performed in which the above-mentioned round game is performed three times (3R). Further, when the jackpot symbol A13 is stopped and displayed, a third jackpot game is performed in which the above-mentioned round game is performed three times (3R).

Further, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol, the jackpot symbol A21 is stopped and displayed with a probability of 15%, and the jackpot symbol A22 is stopped and displayed with a probability of 85%. When the jackpot symbol A21 is stopped and displayed, a fourth jackpot game is performed in which the above-mentioned round game is performed 10 times (10R). Further, when the jackpot symbol A22 is stopped and displayed, a fifth jackpot game is performed in which the above-mentioned round game is performed 10 times (10R).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6(b), if a small hit is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol, the small winning symbol K21 will be stopped and displayed with a 15% probability, and a small winning symbol will be displayed with a 35% probability. The winning symbol K22 is stopped and displayed, and the small winning symbol K23 is stopped and displayed with a probability of 50%.

When the small winning symbol K21 stops, the first small winning game is performed and the first large winning hole 50 opens, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 52 provided in the first large winning hole 50, the first small winning hole 50 is opened. A 1V jackpot game is played. In the 1st V jackpot game, a round game in which the second big prize opening 56 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds is played, for example, 10 times (10R).

When the small winning symbol K22 stops, a second small winning game is performed and the first big winning hole 50 opens, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 52 provided in the first big winning hole 50, the first big winning hole 50 is opened. A 2V jackpot game is played. In the 2nd V jackpot game, the round game is played, for example, three times (3R).

When the small winning symbol K23 stops, the third small winning game is played and the first big winning hole 50 opens, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 52 provided in the first big winning hole 50, the first big winning hole 50 is opened. A 3V jackpot game is played. In the 3rd V jackpot game, the round game is played, for example, three times (3R).

(Fluctuation pattern table switching scenario)
Next, switching of the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol will be explained. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a plurality of variation pattern tables are prepared in advance. Each fluctuation pattern table stores one or more fluctuation patterns, and in jackpot determination, any one fluctuation pattern is determined from among the one or more fluctuation patterns included in the set fluctuation pattern table. , the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the determined variation pattern. For example, when a jackpot game is played, a fluctuation pattern table is set to be used in each period. Thereby, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined using the set variation pattern table according to the number of variations of the special symbol after the jackpot game.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table set in each period. FIG. 7A is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern table for each period after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed. FIG. 7(b) is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern table in each period after the jackpot game is played.

FIG. 7A shows an example of the gaming state and the setting of the fluctuation pattern table when a jackpot is not determined in each period after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed. "N" in FIG. 7(a) indicates the number of changes in the special symbol after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed. Further, "n" is the remaining number of variations of the special symbol until the second time-saving game state, and may be expressed as "number of operations n" here. "n" is set to an initial value (for example, "500") when the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed, and is decremented (subtracted by 1) every time the special symbol changes. The "number of operations n" is stored in the main RAM 100c of the main control unit 100, and is maintained even if the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off as long as the data in the main RAM 100c is not lost due to the backup power supply. Note that the number of operations n may be initially set to 0, and may be incremented (added by 1) each time the special symbol changes.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed, the normal gaming state is set until the number of changes in the special symbol reaches 500 times. During this time, a normal "variation pattern table Tn" is set as a special symbol variation pattern table. When the variation pattern table Tn is set, the production mode is set to "normal mode".

Here, the production mode refers to a production displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, a production controlled by the lamp control section 150, and a production using sound output from the audio output device 9. This is the presentation mode. For example, depending on the performance mode, the performance design displayed on the first image display device 70, the background image, the hold icon, the hold pedestal image forming the display area of the hold icon, the image indicating the performance mode, and the output while the special design is changing. The BGM (Background Music) to be played, the light emission mode of the frame lighting device 10 and/or the board lighting device 74, etc. are different.

After the RWM clearing operation or setting change operation is performed, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 500 times (when the 500th variation is completed), the second time-saving game state is set. The second time saving game state continues until the special symbol changes 750 times or until a jackpot game is played. While the gaming machine 1 is set to the second time-saving gaming state, a "variable pattern table Tb" is set as a special symbol variable pattern table. When the variable pattern table Tb is set, the production mode is set to "time saving mode B". The time-saving mode B is a performance mode that indicates a second time-saving game state, and is a performance mode that actually suggests that the next jackpot will be won.

Note that a plurality of variation pattern tables Tb, such as Tb1 and Tb2, are prepared. For example, in the first variation of the special symbols after the second time-saving gaming state is set, the variation pattern table Tb1 is set, and in the second and subsequent variations of the special symbols, the variation pattern table Tb2 is set. Furthermore, in addition to these, a variable pattern table Tb for the second time saving game state may be prepared.

In the first special symbol variation after the second time-saving gaming state is set, a time-saving introduction effect (described later) indicating the start of the second time-saving gaming state is performed based on the variation pattern included in the variation pattern table Tb1. executed. After the time-saving introduction effect is executed, the time-saving mode B is set.

If the special symbol changes 750 times in the second time-saving game state without a jackpot game being played (that is, if the special symbol changes 1250 times after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed), gaming machine 1 returns to normal gaming state. In the normal gaming state, the "variable pattern table Tn" is set, and the production mode is also set to the "normal mode". If the special symbol is changed 750 times in the second time-saving game state without a jackpot game being played and the normal gaming state is returned to, an RWM clearing operation or setting change operation is performed, or a jackpot game is performed. Until then, the second time saving gaming state will not be set further thereafter. Incidentally, when the special symbol is changed 750 times in the second time-saving game state without a jackpot game being played and the game returns to the normal game state, it is called "second time-saving through". In addition, even if the small winning game is played in the second time saving game state, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 52, the small winning game ends without playing the jackpot game. In this case, the remaining number of small wins, which will be described later, is subtracted, and if the remaining number of small wins becomes "0", the normal game state is returned to before the special symbol changes 750 times in the second time-saving game state. Transition. This case can also be considered as a second time saving throughput.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7(b), for example, if a jackpot is determined in the normal game state and a jackpot game is performed, the first time-saving game state is set at the end of the jackpot game. In the first time-saving game state, a "variable pattern table Ta" is set as a special symbol variable pattern table. In the first time-saving game state, the performance mode is set to "time-saving mode A". The time-saving mode A is an effect mode indicating a first time-saving game state, and a plurality of time-saving modes such as A1 and A2 are prepared.

Note that a plurality of variation pattern tables Ta, such as Ta1, Ta2, and Ta3, are prepared. Different time-saving modes A are set according to the variation pattern table Ta.

For example, if a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, a time saving number of 7 times may be set after the jackpot game. In this case, the performance mode is set to the time saving mode A1, and the variable pattern table Ta1 is set. In the fluctuation pattern table Ta1, the average of the 1st to 7th fluctuations after the jackpot game and the 8th to 11th fluctuations (the fluctuations related to the 4 reservations of the 2nd special symbol at the end of the 7th fluctuation) The fluctuation time of is different.

In addition, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot in the jackpot determination regarding the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, a time saving number of 55 times may be set after the jackpot game. In this case, the time saving mode A2 is set and the fluctuation pattern table Ta2 is set. In the variation pattern table Ta2, the variation time is controlled to vary depending on the number of subsequent variations. For example, the average fluctuation time is different for the 1st to 44th fluctuations after the jackpot game, the 45th to 54th fluctuations, and the 55th fluctuation (the last fluctuation in the first time-saving game state).

For example, the fluctuation time when the 45th to 54th fluctuation is determined to be a loss is longer than the 1st to 44th fluctuation after a jackpot game. As a result, relatively short fluctuations are repeated during the 1st to 44th fluctuations, while relatively long fluctuations are performed during the 45th to 54th fluctuations. In the 45th to 54th fluctuations, a countdown effect indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the first time-saving game state is performed. This makes it possible to give the player anxiety that the first time-saving game state may end, and by increasing the variable time, it is possible to increase expectations that a jackpot game will be played. Furthermore, in the 55th variation, the variation time when it is determined to be a loss is the longest. In the 55th variation (last variation), a result performance is performed. In the result presentation, the cumulative number of prize balls, the number of jackpot games, etc. from the time when the player hit the jackpot (first win) to the present in the normal gaming state are displayed.

In the first time-saving game state, when the special symbol is changed by the set time-saving number of times, a transition is made to the normal game state. In the normal game state, the "variable pattern table Tn" is set, and the performance mode is set to "normal mode". Specifically, the "variation pattern table Tn" is set until the number of variations from the end of the jackpot game reaches 450 (number of operations n=50). For the 451st variation after the end of the jackpot game, a "variation pattern table Tnx0" is set. Further, a "variation pattern table Tnx1" is set for the 452nd to 500th variations after the end of the jackpot game. The variation pattern table Tnx0 has a longer average variation time than the variation pattern tables Tn and Tnx1. Further, the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern table Tnx1 is longer than that of the fluctuation pattern table Tn. Note that in other embodiments, the relationship between the lengths of fluctuation times in each period may be reversed to the above.

In the 451st variation, an effect indicating a shift to the pre-introduction mode is performed, and the mode is shifted to the pre-introduction mode. For the 452nd to 500th fluctuations, the effect is performed in the pre-introduction mode. In the pre-introduction mode, for example, a pre-introduction countdown effect (described later) that displays the number of changes remaining until the second time-saving game state is performed, and a suggestion effect that suggests that the second time-saving game state is set is performed. be exposed.

Then, when the 500th special symbol variation ends without a jackpot game being played after the end of the jackpot game, the second time-saving game state is set. In the 501st variation (the first variation in the second time-saving gaming state), a variation pattern table Tb11 different from the above-mentioned variation pattern table Tb1 is set, and in the 501st variation, it is assumed that the second time-saving gaming state starts. A suggested time-saving introduction will be performed. In the variation pattern table Tb11, variation patterns dedicated to the time-saving introduction effect are prepared, and the dedicated variation patterns are selected. Even when it is determined that the 501st fluctuation is a loss, a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time is selected than when it is determined that the 502nd and subsequent fluctuations are a loss. In other words, in the first variation of the second time-saving game state, a dedicated time-saving introduction effect that suggests the start of the second time-saving game state is executed, so the variation is greater than the second and subsequent fluctuations of the second time-saving game state. A long time is set.

In this way, the variation pattern table Tb1 is set in the 501st variation after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed, and the variation pattern table Tb11 is set in the 501st variation after the jackpot game is performed. . In the variation pattern table Tb11, a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected than in the variation pattern table Tb1. As a result, when entering the second time-saving game state when there is no history of jackpot games, a relatively short time-saving introduction effect is executed, and when entering the second time-saving game state when there is a history of jackpot games. It is possible to perform a relatively long time-saving introduction effect. Here, "there is a history of jackpot games" means that a jackpot game has been played in the past, and means that no RWM clear operation or setting change operation has been performed after the jackpot game.

Incidentally, regardless of whether or not there is a history of jackpot games, the same fluctuation pattern table may be set in the first fluctuation after reaching the specified number of times (the first fluctuation in which the second time-saving game state is set). Further, contrary to the above, a variation pattern having a shorter variation time may be more likely to be selected in the variation pattern table Tb11 than in the variation pattern table Tb1.

For the 502nd and subsequent fluctuations from the end of the jackpot game (the second and subsequent fluctuations in the second time-saving game state), a fluctuation pattern table Tb12 is set. The variation pattern table Tb12 includes variation patterns with shorter variation times than the variation pattern table Tb11. Therefore, in the 502nd and subsequent fluctuations, when the second special symbol fluctuates, the fluctuation time becomes relatively short. For example, the fluctuation time when the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is a loss is 2 seconds. Note that the same variation pattern table may be used for the 501st variation and the 502nd and subsequent variations after the end of the jackpot game. In this case, the time-saving introduction effect may be executed at the 501st variation.

At the 501st change after the jackpot game is played, the performance mode is switched to "time saving mode B". The effect mode B set here is the same as the effect mode set in the 501st variation after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed.

When the special symbol is changed 750 times without a jackpot game being played after the second time-saving game state is set, the game returns to the normal game state (throughput of the second time-saving game). In this case, the variable pattern table Tn is set and the production mode returns to the normal mode. After skipping the second time saving, the second time saving gaming state is not set and the normal gaming state is maintained until an RWM clearing operation or a setting changing operation is performed or a jackpot game is played.

(Game flow)
Next, the game flow of the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of a game flow of the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment.

In the initial state, the gaming machine 1 is set to a normal gaming state, and the player shoots a game ball into the left gaming area in the normal gaming state to play a normal game. Here, hitting the game ball into the left side game area is called "left-handed hitting." In a normal game, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 47 but enters the first starting port 45. Based on the winning in the first starting hole 45, a jackpot determination regarding the first special symbol is performed. When a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the first special symbol, a jackpot game is performed, and after the jackpot game, the mode shifts to time saving mode A1 or time saving mode A2. If a jackpot is announced with a combination of specific performance symbols (for example, a combination of three "7" symbols), the system shifts to time-saving mode A2, and a jackpot is announced with a combination other than the specific production symbol. If so, the mode shifts to time saving mode A1.

In the time saving mode A1, the game is played in a first time saving game state in which the number of time saving times is set to 7 times. The time saving mode A1 is a mode that aims to shift to a more advantageous state, and the probability of shifting to a more advantageous state is, for example, about 20%. When a specific combination of performance symbols (specific symbols) is displayed during the time saving mode A1, a jackpot game is performed, and then the time saving mode A3 or B is entered. On the other hand, if a combination other than the specific performance symbols (non-specific symbols) is displayed during the time saving mode A1 and a jackpot game is performed, the mode shifts to the time saving mode A2.

Time-saving mode A2 is more advantageous than time-saving mode A1, but less advantageous than time-saving mode A3/B. When shifting to the time saving mode A2, this state continues with a probability of about 74%. When a specific combination of performance symbols (specific symbols) is displayed during the time saving mode A2, a jackpot game is performed, and then the time saving mode A3 or B is entered. On the other hand, if a combination other than the specific performance symbols (non-specific symbols) is displayed during the time saving mode A2 and a jackpot game is performed, the mode shifts to the time saving mode A2.

Time-saving mode A3 or B is the most advantageous state for the player, and once shifted, this state will continue with approximately 90% probability. Specifically, the time saving mode A3 is a mode indicating a time saving gaming state in which the number of time saving times is set to 95 times, and the continuation rate is approximately 86%. The time saving mode B is a mode indicating that there is an extremely high possibility (for example, 99% or more) that the time saving gaming state will continue until the next jackpot, and the number of time saving times is set to 496 or 750 times.

The probability that a particular combination of performance symbols (specific symbols) will be displayed and a jackpot game will be played during the time saving mode A1 or the time saving mode A2 is, for example, about 25%. If this 25% jackpot is won, the mode shifts to the most advantageous time-saving mode B, and thereafter time-saving mode A3 or B continues with a probability of 90%.

Further, when the special symbol is changed 500 times without a jackpot game being played in the normal gaming state, the game shifts to time-saving mode B (second time-saving gaming state).

In this way, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has three states with different continuation rates, and can improve interest. Further, when the special symbols have been changed 500 times without a jackpot game being played, a transition is made to a second time-saving game state (time-saving mode B). This makes it possible to create an advantageous situation for the player and improve interest. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time saving mode B may be entered even through the jackpot game. Therefore, the player can see the effect of the time-saving mode B even if the special symbols are not changed 500 times in the normal game state, and the player can be satisfied.

(Example of production)
Next, an example of a performance performed in the gaming machine 1 will be explained. While the special symbols are changing on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61, a variation effect is performed on the first image display device 70. The fluctuating performance is a performance that is performed while the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, and is, for example, a performance in which the performance symbols fluctuate. Below, images displayed on the first image display device 70 where the main effects are performed will be explained.

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 in the normal mode set during the normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 9, in the normal gaming state, a normal background image is displayed as a background image on the screen of the first image display device 70 (hereinafter referred to as "main screen"). The background image includes each image displayed on the screen (the production pattern 701, the small pattern 702, the first pending icon HA, the relevant icon TI, the first number pending SHA, the second number pending SHB, and other images displayed during variable production. This is an image that serves as the background of a preview image, etc.), and has a lower display priority than other images. The image displayed on the screen is managed by multiple layers, and the background image is drawn on the innermost layer (the layer with the lowest display priority). Note that a plurality of normal background images may be prepared. For example, there are multiple stages in the normal mode, and the normal background image may be different for each stage.

An effect pattern 701 corresponding to the special pattern is displayed in an approximately central area of the main screen. The effect pattern 701 is displayed in front of the background image (with priority over the background image). The performance pattern 701 is composed of three performance patterns 701. The three performance symbols 701 are referred to as a left symbol 701L, a middle symbol 701C, and a right symbol 701R from left to right. The effect pattern 701 includes, for example, number images indicating numbers from "1" to "9" and character images corresponding to the number images. A performance pattern including a number image and a character image is referred to as a "normal mode" performance pattern. In addition, as the effect pattern 701, a pattern indicating an alphabet such as "A" to "F" may be used.

In response to the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the plurality of performance symbols 701 start variable display, and in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbols, the plurality of performance symbols 701 are stopped and displayed.

The production pattern 701 is stopped and displayed in a manner (loss mode, jackpot mode) that notifies the result of jackpot determination in response to the stop display of the special symbol. The jackpot mode is a combination of the same performance symbols 701, such as "777" and "555", for example. The loss mode includes a normal loss mode in which three different performance symbols 701 stop without a reach effect, and a mode that is displayed after a reach effect is performed and is different from two similar effect patterns 701. There is a reach loss mode including the effect pattern 701.

The effect pattern 701 performs a start action effect in response to the start of variation of the special pattern. In the start action performance, the three performance symbols 701 start their actions simultaneously or sequentially, for example, start moving downward. There may be a plurality of aspects of the start motion performance. After the start action performance, the performance pattern 701 performs a variable display performance (scroll fluctuation) at high speed in a predetermined direction (for example, from top to bottom; it may also be in the left-right direction). The performance pattern 701 performs a pre-stop motion performance after performing a variable display performance. In the pre-stop motion performance, three performance symbols 701 operate and temporarily stop at their respective positions. The pre-stop motion performance may have a plurality of modes. The performance symbol 701 is stopped and displayed in response to the stop of the special symbol after the pre-stop motion performance.

In addition, in the variable performance, in addition to the performance pattern 701, various performance images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 according to the result of the jackpot determination. By being displayed, the player's expectations for the execution of the jackpot game (special game) are increased.

Further, a small pattern 702 is displayed in the lower left area of the screen. The small pattern 702 is a type of performance pattern corresponding to the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern), and is composed of three small patterns 701 (left pattern, middle pattern, right pattern). The small design 702 is a design smaller than the performance design 701, and is composed of numeric images indicating numbers from "1" to "9" similar to the performance design 701, but like the performance design 701, it is composed of character images. Not included. The small symbol 702 is displayed in a variable manner according to the variable display of the special symbol, and is stopped and displayed in response to the stopped display of the special symbol. The display mode of the small pattern 702 is the same in any production mode. Note that the display mode of the small symbols 702 may differ depending on the gaming state (performance mode).

Furthermore, a first pending icon display area 703A is provided in the lower area on the left side of the screen. In the first pending icon display area 703A, the number of first pending icons HA corresponding to the first pending number (U1) of the first special symbol is displayed. The first pending icon display area 703A is divided into four areas. The first pending icon display area 703A includes a first area for displaying the rightmost first pending icon HA1, a second area for displaying the second first pending icon HA2 from the right, and a third area from the right. It is composed of a third area for displaying the first hold icon HA3, which is the fourth one from the right, and a fourth area for displaying the first hold icon HA4, which is the fourth one from the right. Note that images (reserved pedestal images; broken lines shown in the figure) for forming these first to fourth areas are displayed. The hold pedestal image is a base image for displaying each first hold icon HA, and is displayed even when the first hold icon HA is not displayed. A first reservation icon HA is displayed in each area formed by the reservation pedestal image according to the number of reservations of the first special symbol.

The icon display area 704 is provided on the right side of the first pending icon display area 703A. In the icon display area 704, the icon TI corresponding to the special symbol that is changing is displayed. The icon TI has the same display mode (same shape) as the first pending icon HA, but the icon TI is a larger image than the first pending icon HA. Further, the icon TI is displayed on the reservation pedestal image. That is, the pending pedestal image also forms the icon display area 704.

Each of the first reservation icons HA is an image indicating the reservation of the right to display the first special symbol in a variable manner (judgment of jackpot based on winning in the first start opening 45). The icon TI is an image corresponding to the current special symbol variation (also referred to as "the variation"). The first pending icons HA are consumed in order from the side closest to the icon display area 704. Specifically, when the current special symbol variation ends, the first pending icon HA1 displayed in the first area of the first pending icon display area 703A moves to the icon display area 704 and is displayed as the icon TI. be done. Simultaneously with the movement of the first hold icon HA1 to the icon display area 704, the first hold icons HA2 to HA4 are respectively shifted to the right area by one area and are displayed as the first hold icons HA1 to HA3.

The first pending icon HA and the icon TI may be displayed in different display modes depending on the performance mode or stage. Further, the reserved pedestal image may also be displayed in different display modes depending on the performance mode or stage.

The first pending icon HA and the icon TI can change from a normal mode (white) that does not indicate the expectation of a jackpot to a special mode (blue, red, gold, rainbow color) that indicates the expectation of a jackpot. The special mode indicates that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than the normal mode, and the expectations are higher in the order of blue, red, gold, and rainbow colors. Specifically, the first hold icon HA is changed based on the result of the preliminary determination. Further, the icon TI is changed based on the results of the preliminary determination and the jackpot determination.

In addition, in the lower right area of the main screen, there is a first number reservation SHA that numerically represents the first reservation number (U1) indicating the number of reservations of the first special symbol, and a second number reservation SHA indicating the number of reservations of the second special symbol. A second number, SHB, representing the number of reservations (U2) is displayed.

In the normal gaming state, the second hold icon HB corresponding to the winning in the second start opening 47 is not displayed. Note that even in the normal gaming state, if a game ball enters the second starting port 47, a second icon is displayed in an area different from the first pending icon display area 703A (for example, an area on the right side of the icon display area 704). A second hold icon HB indicating the hold of the special symbol may be displayed.

Further, in the upper right area of the main screen, a fourth symbol 705a corresponding to the first special symbol and a fourth symbol 705b corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed. The fourth symbol 705a is displayed in a variable manner (blinking display) in accordance with the variable display of the first special symbol, and is displayed in a stopped manner in response to the stopped display of the first special symbol. Further, the fourth symbol 705b is displayed in a variable manner (blinking display) in accordance with the variable display of the second special symbol, and is displayed in a stopped manner in response to the stopped display of the second special symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the effect pattern 701 is displayed in a variable manner on the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 701 is displayed on either or both of the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. A variable display may be performed. Furthermore, the first image display device 70 may display the performance symbols 701 in a variable manner, and the second image display device 71 may display the small symbols 702 in a variable manner. In addition, the first image display device 70 displays the performance symbols 701 and the small symbols 702 in a variable manner, and the second image display device 71 displays the first pending icon HA, the second pending icon HB, and the pending icon TI. You can.

Further, a game number display image GC is displayed in the lower right area of the main screen. The game number display image GC includes a number indicating the number of times the special symbol has changed since the gaming machine 1 was powered on. For example, at the timing when the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the number indicated by the game number display image GC is incremented (increased by 1). The number of changes in the special symbol since the power is turned on is stored in the RAM (for example, sub-RAM 130c or control RAM 141c) of the production control device 130A. The game number display image GC changes according to the stored number of times. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the information stored in the RAM of the performance control device 130A is cleared. Therefore, the number indicated by the game number display image GC is reset to the initial value (“0”) when the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

On the other hand, the number of operations n, which counts the number of changes in the special symbol from when the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed until the transition to the second time-saving gaming state, is stored in the main RAM 100c of the main control unit 100. The data in the RAM of the main control unit 100 is maintained even when the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power of the gaming machine is turned off and the power is restored, the number of changes in the special symbol indicated by the number of operations n does not match the number indicated by the number of games display image GC.

Note that the number indicated by the game number display image GC is reset to "0" when a jackpot game is played. Further, the number of operations n is reset to an initial value (for example, 500) when a jackpot game is played.

The game number display image GC is basically always displayed while the special symbols are changing and in the customer waiting state. However, during the customer waiting performance in the customer waiting state, the game number display image GC may be hidden. Further, the game number display image GC may be hidden while the special symbols are changing and during a predetermined performance in which the expectation of a jackpot is high (for example, during SP reach or SPSP reach).

Even when the gaming machine 1 shifts to the second time-saving gaming state, the game number display image GC is continuously displayed and is increased every time the special symbols change. When the gaming machine 1 shifts to the second time-saving gaming state and returns to the normal gaming state without a jackpot game being played (that is, when the second time-saving game is skipped), the number shown by the game number display image GC is It becomes larger than the number of times (500 times). Specifically, when the second time saving is skipped, the number shown by the number of games display image GC is 1250 or more, which is the predetermined number of times plus the number of changes in the second time saving gaming state. Therefore, if the number of games display image GC exceeds 1250, it indicates that the second time reduction has been skipped. After passing through the second time saving period, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off and then powered on again, the game number display image GC will display a specific display other than "0" (for example, "???") becomes. Further, even when the game continues to be played without turning off the power of the gaming machine 1 after the second time saving period is passed, the game number display image GC may be displayed in the above-mentioned specific manner. This notifies the player that the second time reduction has been skipped. In this case, the fact that the second time saving period has been skipped is also notified by the effect by the lamp control unit 150 (the light emission mode of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74), as will be described later.

Note that the game number display image GC is not always displayed, but may be displayed only during a predetermined period. For example, the game number display image GC may be displayed only when a predetermined period has elapsed before the second time-saving gaming state is set. Further, the game number display image GC may be displayed in the normal gaming state, and the game number display image GC may not be displayed in the second time-saving gaming state. Further, the game number display image GC may not be displayed in the first time saving game state. Further, the game number display image GC may be displayed also in the first time-saving game state (also in the third time-saving game state to be described later).

Further, for example, a second time saving count display image NC is displayed in the lower right area of the main screen. The second time-saving count display image NC includes a number indicating the remaining number of variations of the special symbol until shifting to the second time-saving game state. When the number shown by the second time-saving count display image NC becomes "0", the state shifts to the second time-saving game state.

The second time saving count display image NC may or may not be displayed while the special symbols are changing and in the customer waiting state. The second time saving count display image NC is not displayed until, for example, the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 100 after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed, and is displayed at the 101st variation. In addition, if the power is turned on without performing an RWM clear operation or a setting change operation (in other words, if the RWM clear is not performed and the power is left in an unused state), the predetermined number of times after the power is turned on (for example, the 51st time, 101 times), the second time saving count display image NC is displayed. In this case, the second time saving count display image NC may be displayed together with an image suggesting that the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is not performed (that is, it is left unchanged).

The second time saving count display image NC is hidden and redisplayed at a predetermined timing. For example, the second time-saving count display image NC starts displaying a predetermined period (for example, 10 times before) when the second time-saving game state is set, and is hidden when the second time-saving game state is entered. good. For example, the second time saving count display image NC is hidden at the timing when the pending pedestal image is hidden (for example, when SP reach is developed), and the second time saving count display image NC is hidden at the timing when the pending pedestal image is redisplayed (for example, when the reach is lost). It may be redisplayed at the timing of returning to the normal screen after . Further, the second time saving count display image NC is hidden when a jackpot is achieved.

(Example of time reduction introduction performance related to the second time reduction)
Next, an example of the time-saving introduction performance when transitioning from the normal gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state will be explained.

(If the first special symbol is on hold at the end of the specified number of fluctuations)
FIG. 10 is an example of a timing chart showing the flow of performance when transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state based on the fact that a specified number of changes have been performed after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation was performed. . 11 to 14 are diagrams showing examples of images displayed on the main screen at each timing shown in FIG. 10.

As shown in FIG. 10, at time t0, the first special symbol begins to fluctuate. This special symbol variation is the 499th variation after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed. As shown in FIG. 11(a), on the main screen, at time t0, three performance symbols 701 in the normal mode perform a start motion performance, and the first pending icon HA1 is an icon that moves to the icon display area 704. A moving performance will be held. Further, the small symbol 702 is displayed in a variable manner without performing a start motion effect. Further, the fourth symbol 705a is displayed in a variable manner without performing a start motion effect. Furthermore, at the start of the variation of the special symbols, the number shown by the game number display image GC is "498", and the remaining number shown by the second time saving count display image NC is "2". In this case, the number of operations n stored in the main control unit 100 is "2".

After the first special symbol starts to fluctuate at time t0, the first special symbol continues to fluctuate and display for a predetermined fluctuation time. During this time, as shown in FIG. 11(b), on the main screen, a variable display effect is performed in which the effect pattern 701 moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the small pattern 702 and the fourth pattern 705a also perform variable display. Further, the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 704.

As shown in FIG. 11(c), the three performance symbols 701 stop in order. For example, the left symbol 701L decelerates and temporarily stops in the left central region of the main screen, and then the right symbol 701R decelerates and temporarily stops in the right central region of the main screen. Then, the middle symbol 701C decelerates and temporarily stops in the central area of the main screen, and the three effect symbols 701 temporarily stop (FIG. 11(d)). In this state, the three performance symbols 701 do not completely stop, but slightly fluctuate, for example, in the vertical direction.

If the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the first special symbol (loss symbol H1) is stopped and displayed at time t1 when a predetermined variable time has elapsed. In response to the stop display of the first special symbol, the production pattern 701 is stopped (main stop) (FIG. 11(e)). Moreover, at time t1, the small pattern 702 and the fourth pattern 705a are stopped and displayed. The small pattern 702 is stopped and displayed in the same combination of numbers as the production pattern 701.

For a predetermined fixed period (for example, 0.5 seconds) from time t1, the first special symbol maintains a stopped display state. At time t2, when a fixed period has elapsed from time t1, the number of operations n is subtracted by 1. Further, at time t2, the number of games display image GC is updated to "499", and the second time saving count display image NC is updated to "1" remaining. Note that the subtraction of the number of operations n may be performed at the time t1 when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, the number of games display image GC and the second time saving count display image NC may be updated at time t1.

When the jackpot determination is not pending at time t2 when the confirmation period has elapsed (that is, when the first pending number and the second pending number are 0), the gaming machine 1 enters a customer waiting state. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after entering the customer waiting state, a customer waiting effect is performed on the main screen.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 at the next time point t3, the variation of the first special symbol (the 500th variation of the special symbol) is started. In response, a variable performance (a performance in which the performance symbol 701, the small symbol 702, and the fourth symbol 705a fluctuate) is performed on the main screen (FIGS. 12(a) to (b)). During this 500th variation, for example, if two game balls enter the first starting slot 45, the first pending number becomes "2", and the first pending icons HA1 and HA2 are additionally displayed, The first digit reservation SHA becomes "2" (FIG. 12(b)).

Thereafter, at time t4, the first special symbol (losing symbol H1) is stopped and displayed. In response to this, the production pattern 701, the small pattern 702, and the fourth pattern 705a are stopped and displayed (FIG. 12(c)).

At time t5, when a predetermined fixed period has elapsed from time t4, the number of operations n is updated to "0", the gaming state of gaming machine 1 is set to the second time-saving gaming state, and the first special that had been suspended is Based on the result of the jackpot determination regarding the symbols, the 501st variation of the special symbol is started (FIG. 12(d)). In addition, at the time t4 when the 500th special symbol variation ends, the number of operations n may be set to "0" and the normal gaming state may be changed to the second time-saving gaming state.

As described above, when the second time saving gaming state is set, the variable pattern table Tb is set. For example, in the 501st special symbol variation after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed, the variation pattern table Tb1 is set. Based on the variation patterns included in the variation pattern table Tb1, a variation performance including a time-saving introduction performance is performed.

Specifically, at time t5, the performance symbol 701, the small symbol 702, and the fourth symbol 705a start to fluctuate (FIG. 12(d)). Moreover, the first pending icons HA1 and HA2 are each moved to the right by the icon movement effect. At time t5, the number shown by the game number display image GC is "500", and the remaining number shown by the second time saving count display image NC is "0".

Next, at time t6, a start image SG indicating the start of the second time-saving gaming state and a right-hitting notification image MH1 that urges the player to hit right are displayed on the main screen (FIG. 12(e)). Also, at this timing, the second time saving count display image NC is erased.

Next, at time t7, a shielding image 710 appears on the main screen (FIG. 12(f)). Specifically, left and right shielding images 710L and 710R appear from the left and right sides of the screen and move to the right and left, respectively, so as to shield the effect pattern 701 that is being displayed in a variable manner. The shielding image 710 is, for example, an image imitating a door. The shielding image 710 appears over a first predetermined period of time from time t7 to t8, and covers the entire surface of the main screen. The effect pattern 701, the background image (normal background image), the first pending icon HA, and the icon TI are covered by the blocking image 710. In addition, the right-handed player notification image MH1 is also blocked. Between time points t7 and t8, the shielding image 710 and the effect pattern 701 may be displayed simultaneously. In other words, between time points t7 and t8, there are areas that are occluded by the occluded image 710 and areas that are not occluded. In an area not covered by the blocking image 710, at least a portion of the production pattern 701, at least a portion of the background image (normal background image), and at least a portion of the first pending icon HA and the icon TI are displayed. .

On the other hand, the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705a are not shielded by the shielding image 710. That is, the small pattern 702 and the fourth pattern 705a are preferentially displayed in front of the shielding image 710. Further, the first digit reservation SHA and the second digit reservation SHB are also not blocked by the blocking image 710. Note that the right-handed player notification image MH1 does not need to be shielded by the shielding image 710.

The shielding image 710 appears in a semi-transparent state on a layer in front of the production pattern 701 so as to cover the entire main screen, and becomes opaque over a first predetermined period of time, thereby blocking the production pattern 701 etc. You can do it like this.

At time t8, the entire main screen is blocked by the blocking image 710 (FIG. 13(a)). At this time, the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705a are not shielded by the shielding image 710, and continue to be displayed in a variable manner even while the production symbol 701 is shielded. Further, the first digit reservation SHA and the second digit reservation SHB are also not blocked by the blocking image 710. Further, while the shielding image 710 is displayed on the entire surface, the right-handed hitting notification image MH2 is displayed superimposed on the shielding image 710 (on the near side of the shielding image 710). The right-handed player notification image MH2 is an image that urges the player to play right-handed, and is different from the right-handed player notification image MH1. Note that the right-handed player notification image MH2 may be the same image as the above-mentioned right-handed player notification image MH1.

Further, while the shielding image 710 is displayed on the entire surface, the lamp control unit 150 performs lamp control in a dedicated mode, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit light in a dedicated light emission pattern.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the occlusion image 710 was displayed on the entire screen, the occlusion image 710 gradually fades out. Specifically, the left and right shielded images 710L and 710R move to the left and right, respectively, so that the door opens (FIG. 13(b)). During this time, the small symbol 702, the fourth symbol 705a, the first number pending SHA, the second number pending SHB, and the right hit notification image MH2 are continuously displayed, superimposed on the shielding image 710. On the other hand, the effect pattern 701, the background image, the first pending icon HA, and the icon TI remain hidden. In areas other than the left and right shielding images 710L and 710R, an arrival effect indicating that the number of variations of the special symbol has reached the specified number is displayed.

Then, at time t9, the shielding image 710 is completely hidden, and the reaching effect is displayed on the entire screen (FIG. 13(c)). At this time, the effect pattern 701, the background image, the first pending icon HA, and the icon TI remain hidden. In addition, the small symbol 702, the fourth symbol 705a, the first number pending SHA, the second number pending SHB, and the right hit notification image MH2 are continuously displayed.

Next, a second time saving transition effect suggesting a transition to the second time saving gaming state is performed (FIG. 13(d)). Further, a relatively large right-handed hitting notification image MH3 is displayed near the center of the main screen.

Thereafter, at time t10, the effect pattern 701 fades in (FIG. 13(e)). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13(e), for example, in the central area of the screen, an image area (an elliptical area in the figure; hereinafter referred to as a "time saving screen area") including the production pattern 701 and the time saving background image. ) will appear. At this point, the game is in the second time-saving game state, and the game ball easily enters the second start opening 47 when the player hits the ball to the right. At time t10, when two game balls enter the second starting port 47, the second number reservation SHB changes to "2" as shown in FIG. 13(e).

The time-saving screen area including the production pattern 701 and the time-saving background image expands over a predetermined period of time (FIG. 13(f)). For example, in FIG. 13(e), the middle pattern 701C and a part of the surrounding background image (the time-saving background image that will be displayed on the entire screen next) are displayed, but by expanding the time-saving screen area, In FIG. 13(f), a left symbol 701L, a right symbol 701R, a middle symbol 701C, and a part of the time-saving background image are displayed. During this time, the first number reservation SHA, the second number reservation SHB, and the right hit notification image MH3 continue to be displayed, and the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705a continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

Then, at time t11, the time-saving screen area expands to cover the entire main screen, the fade-in of the effect pattern 701 is completed, and the background image is completely switched to the time-saving background image (FIG. 14(a)). As a result, the performance mode is switched from the normal mode to the time saving mode B. In addition, a right-handed player notification image MH4 is displayed. Further, in the upper left area of the main screen, a second time saving activation image JH indicating that the second time saving game state is in progress is displayed.

The display mode of the effect pattern 701 that reappears at time t11 is different from the display mode of the effect pattern 701 at the start of the 501st variation (time t5). Specifically, at the start of this variation, the effect pattern 701 is in a normal form including numbers and characters (FIG. 12(d)), but at time t11, the effect pattern 701 is composed only of numbers. This is a time saving mode (FIGS. 14(a) and 14(b)). In addition, the effect pattern 701 may be a display mode exclusive to time-saving mode B, or may be a display mode common to time-saving mode A and time-saving mode B.

Furthermore, at time t11, the second hold icon HB reappears together with the effect pattern 701. The second hold icon HB that reappears here is a hold icon corresponding to the hold of the second special symbol won at time t10. That is, since the hold icon is not displayed between time points t8 and t11, even if two game balls enter the second starting port 47 at time point t10, the second hold icon HB is not additionally displayed at that time. . However, at time t11, two second pending icons HB appear together with the effect pattern 701.

The display mode (shape) of the second pending icon HB that appears here and the first pending icon HA in the normal gaming state and at the start of the 501st variation are different. For example, the first hold icon HA in the normal game state and at the start of the 501st variation is a diamond shape, and the second hold icon HB that appears at time t11 is a vertically elongated oval shape, and in the second time-saving game state, this icon is shaped like a diamond. A shaped second pending icon HB is displayed according to the number of pending second special symbols. The difference in the shape of the pending icon does not suggest the degree of expectation for a jackpot like the color of the pending icon (blue, red, etc.) described above. Note that the color of the second pending icon HB may also change to a specific color (blue, green, red, gold, etc.) depending on the jackpot expectation level.

Furthermore, even if there is a hold related to the first special symbol at the start of this 501st variation (variation of the first special symbol), the first pending icon HA corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed at time t11. First, a second pending icon HB corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed.

Furthermore, at time t11, the icon TI also reappears. The icon TI that reappears here is an icon corresponding to the first special symbol. That is, in the 501st variation, the icon T1 corresponding to the same first special symbol is displayed before and after the shielding image 710 appears. The display mode (shape) of the icon T1 changes before and after the shielding image 710 appears.

Further, after time t11, the pending pedestal image forming the area for displaying the second pending icon HB and the icon TI is different from the pending pedestal image in the normal gaming state and at the start of the 501st variation. For example, before being shielded by the shielding image 710, an area for displaying the first pending icon HA and the icon TI is formed by the normal pending pedestal image. After the effect pattern 701 is shielded by the shielding image 710 and reappears, an area for displaying the second pending icon HB and the icon TI is formed by the second time saving pending pedestal image.

Note that after the effect pattern 701 is shielded by the shielding image 710 and reappears, only the second pending icon HB and the icon TI are displayed, and the pending pedestal image does not need to be displayed. In addition, after the performance symbol 701 is shielded by the shielding image 710 and reappears, the second pending icon HB is displayed, and the icon TI does not need to be displayed. That is, in the second time saving game state, the icon TI may be hidden.

After time t11, the three production symbols 701 stop sequentially (or simultaneously), and immediately before time t12, the three production symbols 701 temporarily stop in a loss mode (for example, "621") (FIG. 14(b)) ). Then, at time t12, the 501st special symbol variation ends, and the performance symbol 701 is stopped and displayed (main stop) (FIG. 14(c)). Further, the small symbol 702 is displayed in a stopped state, and the fourth symbol 705a is also displayed in a stopped state.

After a predetermined confirmation period has elapsed, at time t13, the next special symbol changes (FIG. 14(d)). At time t13, a jackpot determination is made regarding the second special symbol that was reserved in response to the game ball entering the second starting port 47 at time t10, and based on the result of the jackpot determination, a second special The pattern begins to change. As shown in FIG. 14(d), the production pattern 701 of the time-saving mode performs a starting operation, and the small pattern 702 and the fourth pattern 705b perform variable display. Then, the production symbol 701 is displayed in a variable manner (FIG. 14(e)), and then, in response to the stop display of the second special symbol, the production symbol 701, the small symbol 702, and the fourth symbol 705b are stopped and displayed (FIG. 14 (f)).

In this way, in the 501st special symbol change after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed, a shielding effect is performed that shields the effect symbol 701 (FIGS. 12(f) to 13(b)), A reaching effect is performed (FIG. 13(c)), and a second time saving transition effect is performed (FIG. 13(d)). During this time, the production pattern 701 is hidden. Then, a fade-in effect is performed in which the effect pattern 701 reappears over a predetermined period of time (FIGS. 13(e) to (f)). The performance pattern 701 that reappears here is a performance pattern in a time-saving mode. A series of performances from when these performance symbols 701 are hidden until they reappear are referred to as a "time-saving introduction performance" of the second time-saving.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the second time-saving game state is started, a shielding performance (shielding performance at time-saving entry) that shields the performance symbol 701 is performed. In the shielding effect, an appearance effect (gradually fading in effect) in which the shielding image 710 appears is performed, and a disappearing effect (gradually fading out effect) in which the effect pattern 701 is hidden is performed. Thereby, it is possible to appeal to the player that the second time-saving gaming state is started. That is, by shielding the variable performance using the performance symbols 701 and performing a shielding performance that covers the entire screen, it is possible to effectively appeal to the player that the situation is advantageous to the player. Moreover, since the shielding image 710 gradually appears while the effect pattern 701 gradually disappears, the screen can be switched smoothly without any discomfort.

In addition, since the performance symbol 701 is hidden and reappears after a predetermined time, it is possible to smoothly switch to the time-saving mode B indicating the second time-saving game state. In the normal game state, a variable performance is performed using the performance symbols 701 in the normal mode, and in the second time-saving game state, a variable performance is performed using the performance symbols 701 in the time-saving mode. The effect pattern 701 in the normal mode is blocked by the shielding image 710, and when the effect pattern 701 reappears, the effect pattern 701 in the time-saving mode is displayed (fluctuating display). Therefore, the effect pattern can be switched during the variation without any discomfort. It can be carried out.

Furthermore, by shielding the performance symbols 701 during the variable display of the performance symbols 701, a surprising performance can be performed and the player can have expectations.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a production example in which the shielding image 710 appears during the fluctuating display of the production pattern 701 was shown, but in other production examples, the shielding image 710 appears while the production pattern 701 is performing a start motion production. The effect pattern 701 may be covered by making it appear. Furthermore, the effect pattern 701 may be obscured by making the shielding image 710 appear while the effect pattern 701 is temporarily stopped. Even in this case, the small pattern 702 and the fourth pattern 705 are not shielded.

Moreover, during the stop display (main stop) of the effect pattern 701, the shielding image 710 may appear to cover the effect pattern 701.

In addition, after shifting to the second time-saving gaming state, for example, a predetermined warning effect may be performed to the player on the screen of the second image display device 71 (referred to as "sub-screen"). The predetermined warning performance is a performance that calls attention to the player, and is, for example, a notification performance to prevent the player from forgetting to take out an IC card for renting game balls or from becoming absorbed in the game. The predetermined warning performance may be performed during the second and subsequent changes in special symbols after the time-saving introduction performance is performed. By performing a predetermined warning performance after the time-saving introduction performance, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the time-saving introduction performance, and also to the predetermined caution notification performance.

For example, it is also conceivable to perform a predetermined caution notification performance immediately after the second time-saving game state is set (for example, during a predetermined period immediately after time t5), and to perform a time-saving introduction performance after or during that time. However, in this case, the player may focus on the time-saving introduction effect and may not notice or pay attention to the predetermined warning effect. Furthermore, even if the player notices the predetermined warning performance, if the predetermined warning performance is performed before or during the execution of the time-saving introduction performance, the player will not be able to concentrate on the time-saving introduction performance, and the player will not be able to continue playing the game. may reduce the interest of In this embodiment, such inconvenience can be prevented by performing a predetermined caution notification performance after the time-saving introduction performance.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the predetermined warning performance is not performed on the main screen but on the sub-screen, attention can be drawn to the performance of the second time-saving game state performed on the main screen.

Note that after the time-saving introduction effect, a predetermined warning effect may be performed on the main screen. For example, during a variable performance using the performance symbol 701, a predetermined warning performance may be performed in a part of the main screen. Moreover, when the second time-saving game state is set, such a predetermined warning performance does not need to be executed at all on either the main screen or the sub-screen.

Next, a description will be given of the time-saving introduction effect when the first special symbol is not held when the specified number of changes have been made after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed.

FIG. 15 is an example of a timing chart showing the flow of the time-saving introduction performance when the first special symbol is not held when the specified number of changes are performed after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed. . FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main screen at each timing shown in FIG. 15. Here, when the 500th special symbol change is completed after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed, the first special symbol is not held and the special symbol related to the 501st change becomes the second special symbol. A case will be explained below.

As shown in FIG. 15, the 500th special symbol change after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation ends at time t4, and the confirmation period ends at time t4-2 (FIG. 16(a) ). At time t4-2 when the confirmation period related to the 500th special symbol change ends, the gaming machine 1 enters the second time-saving gaming state. At this point, if the first special symbol is not on hold, the gaming machine 1 enters a customer waiting state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 16(b), a start image SG indicating the start of the second time-saving gaming state and a right-handed hitting notification image MH1 urging the player to play right-handed are displayed on the main screen. That is, as shown in FIG. 12(e), if the first special symbol is on hold at time t4-2 when the 500th special symbol variation ends, the start image SG and the notification image MH1 are changed to the 501st variation. However, if the first special symbol is not pending at this point, the start image SG and notification image MH1 will be displayed at time t4-2 when the 500th special symbol fluctuation ends. Is displayed. Further, at this time point t4-2, the second time saving count display image NC becomes "0".

The start image SG is displayed preferentially over the effect pattern 701 on the main screen. That is, the start image SG is displayed in front of the effect pattern 701. Further, the right-handed hitting notification image MH1 is displayed on the back side of the effect pattern 701 on the main screen. Note that at least one of the start image SG and the right-handed hitting notification image MH1 may be displayed on the sub-screen. Further, at least one of the start image SG and the right-hand hit notification image MH1 may be displayed on the front side of the effect pattern 701, or may be displayed on the back side of the effect pattern 701.

Thereafter, in response to the player hitting right and the game ball landing in the second starting hole 47, the second special symbol begins to fluctuate as the 501st fluctuation (time t5). In response to the start of variation of the second special symbol, the performance symbol 701 (normal mode) begins to vary, and the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705b also perform variable display (FIG. 16(c)). In this way, even if the special symbol related to the first variation in the second time saving game state is the second special symbol, the performance symbol 701 in the normal mode is displayed at the start of the variation. Further, the icon TI and background image are also the icon TI and background image in the normal gaming state.

Then, the shielding image 710 appears at time t6 (FIG. 16(d)), and the effect pattern 701 is completely shielded at time t7 (FIG. 16(e)). Furthermore, after that, as shown in FIG. 13, a reaching effect and a second time saving transition effect are performed, and the effect pattern 701 fades in. The performance pattern 701 that reappears here is a performance pattern in a time-saving mode.

In this way, if the first special symbol is not on hold at the time when the specified number of changes in the special symbol ends after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed, at the time when the specified number of changes ends. , a right-handed hitting notification is given to encourage the player to play right-handed. Thereby, the player can be urged to play right before the shift to the second time-saving gaming state is notified by the shielding image 710.

On the other hand, if the first special symbol is on hold at the end of the specified number of special symbol variations, the next first special symbol variation is immediately started. If a right-handed hit notification is given to prompt the player to hit right at this point, the right-handed hit notification will be suddenly given, resulting in an unnatural performance. Therefore, if the first special symbol is on hold at the end of the specified number of variations of the special symbol, the right hit notification is performed after the next variation of the first special symbol is started.

(Pre-introduction mode when there is a jackpot history)
Next, the pre-introduction mode that enters after the jackpot game is played and before reaching the specified number of times will be explained, and the flow of performance when the time-saving introduction performance is performed via the pre-introduction mode will be explained.

The pre-introduction mode is a special performance mode that is performed during a predetermined period before shifting to the second time-saving game state when there is a history of jackpot games, and is performed in the normal game state. Specifically, the pre-introduction mode is performed after the jackpot game is played, from the fluctuation 50 times before the second time-saving gaming state is set to the fluctuation setting to the second time-saving gaming state. That is, after the jackpot game is played, when the special symbols are changed 450 times, the pre-introduction mode is started. Then, when the special symbols are changed a prescribed number of times (500 times) after the jackpot game is played, the pre-introduction mode ends and the mode shifts to the time saving mode B.

FIG. 17 is an example of a timing chart showing the flow of effects when entering the pre-introduction mode. 18 to 19 are diagrams showing examples of images displayed on the main screen at each timing shown in FIG. 17.

As shown in FIG. 17, at time t0, the 450th special symbol change after the jackpot game is played ends. When a predetermined determination period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the 451st special symbol variation starts at time t1. This variation is performed based on the variation pattern included in the variation pattern table Tnx0. The variation pattern table Tnx0 includes variation patterns for executing a pre-introduction mode transition effect when shifting to the pre-introduction mode.

In response to the start of variation of the special symbol, the production symbol 701 in the normal mode starts to vary, and the first pending icons HA1 and HA2 shift to the right, respectively, and start moving to the display area of the icon TI and the first pending icon HA1. At the same time, the small pattern 702 and the fourth pattern 705a are displayed in a variable manner (FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b)).

While the performance pattern 701 is being displayed in a variable manner, the pre-introduction mode transition performance is started at time t2. In the pre-introduction mode transition performance, a pre-introduction shielding image 720 appears and a shielding performance (pre-introduction shielding performance) in which the performance pattern 701 is shielded is performed. Specifically, like a door closing, the pre-introduction shielding image 720L appears from the left side of the main screen and moves to the right, and the pre-introduction shielding image 720R appears from the right side of the screen and moves to the left. . The pre-introduction shielding image 720 is an image that suggests transition to the pre-introduction mode. The pre-introduction shielding image 720 is displayed over a predetermined period of time so as to cover the entire main screen (times t2 to t3, FIGS. 18(c) to 18(d)). Between time points t2 and t3, the pre-introduction shielding image 720 and the effect pattern 701 may be displayed simultaneously. In other words, during this time, there are regions that are shielded by the pre-introduction shielded image 720 and regions that are not shielded. In an area that is not covered by the pre-introduction blocking image 720, at least a portion of the production pattern 701, at least a portion of the background image (normal background image), and at least a portion of the first pending icon HA and the icon TI are displayed. be done. At time t3, the pre-introduction shielding image 720 covers the entire surface of the main screen, and the effect pattern 701, the normal background image, the first pending icon HA, and the icon TI are shielded.

On the other hand, the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705a are not shielded by the pre-introduction shielding image 720. That is, the small pattern 702 and the fourth pattern 705a are preferentially displayed on the near side of the screen rather than the pre-introduction shielded image 720. Further, the first digit reservation SHA and the second digit reservation SHB are also not shielded by the pre-introduction shielding image 720.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the pre-introduction shielding image 720 was displayed on the entire screen, the shielding image 710 gradually faded out (time t4, FIG. 18(e)). Specifically, the left and right pre-introduction shielded images 720L and 720R move to the left and right, respectively, so that the door opens. During this time, the small symbol 702, the fourth symbol 705a, the first digit retention SHA, the second digit retention SHB, and the right-hand hit notification image MH2 are continuously displayed, superimposed on the pre-introduction shielding image 720. On the other hand, in an area where the pre-introduction shielding image 720 is not displayed, at least a portion of the effect pattern 701, the pre-introduction background image, and the first hold icon HA that are displayed in the pre-introduction mode are displayed.

Then, at time t5, the pre-introduction shielding image 720 is completely hidden, and the effect pattern 701 reappears (FIG. 18(f)). This causes a transition from normal mode to pre-installation mode.

In the pre-introduction mode, a production pattern 701 in a special mode (pre-introduction mode) including only numbers is displayed. Furthermore, in the pre-introduction mode, a pre-introduction background image is displayed as a background image, and the display manner of the first pending icon HA1 is also different from that in the normal mode. Further, in the pre-introduction mode, lamp control by the lamp control unit 150 is in a dedicated manner. For example, during the period in which the ready-to-win effect is not performed during the pre-introduction mode, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are controlled to emit light in a dedicated light emission pattern.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18(f), the icon TI is not displayed in the pre-introduction mode, but the icon TI may be displayed in the pre-introduction mode as well.

In addition, in FIG. 18(f), at time t5 when the pre-introduction shielding image 720 is completely hidden, the three effect symbols 701 are temporarily stopped, but at this point the effect symbols 701 perform the variable display effect. You can leave it there.

Then, at the next time point t6, the three performance symbols 701 are stopped and displayed in response to the end of the variation of the special symbols (FIG. 19(a)). Further, at this point, the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705a are also stopped and displayed. Further, at time t7 thereafter, the 452nd special symbol variation is started (FIG. 19(b)), and the variation effect in the pre-introduction mode is started (FIG. 19(c)). In the 452nd and subsequent special symbol variations, a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table Tnx1.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the pre-introduction mode, a pre-introduction mode image DMG indicating the pre-introduction mode is displayed on the main screen (or a sub-screen). In addition, on the main screen (which may also be a sub-screen), a pre-introduction countdown effect is performed using a countdown image CDG showing the number of variations of the remaining special symbols until the second time-saving game state is set. The pre-introduction countdown performance is a performance in which the number indicated by the countdown image CDG is decreased every time the special symbol changes. As shown in FIG. 18(f), in the 451st variation, the number indicated by the countdown image CDG is "50", but as shown in FIG. 19(b), in the 452nd variation, , the number indicated by the countdown image CDG decreases to "49".

The countdown image CDG is always displayed when transitioning to the pre-introduction mode. Note that the countdown image CDG may be temporarily hidden while the special symbols are changing in the pre-introduction mode. For example, when a jackpot variation pattern or a reach variation pattern is selected in the pre-introduction mode, the countdown image CDG may be hidden during the variation of the special symbol.

In addition, the update of the countdown image CDG (reduction of the number) may be performed at the time t6 when the special symbol stops, or at the time (t7) when a predetermined fixed period has passed after the special symbol stops. You can. Further, the countdown image CDG may be updated when the next special symbol starts changing.

In the pre-introduction mode, an effect is performed that makes the player expect to move to the second time-saving gaming state. For example, a character on the player's side is displayed on the screen, and an effect is displayed in which the character aims to accomplish a predetermined mission. For example, a scene in which a player's character fights with an enemy character may be displayed, and an effect in which the characters attack each other may be displayed each time the special symbol changes. When the remaining number of changes in the special symbol until the second time-saving game state is set decreases, that is, when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the pre-introduction mode continues. In this case, in the variable performance, for example, a performance is performed in which the player's character evades or withstands an attack from an enemy character, and the continuation of the pre-introduction mode is notified, and the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. will be notified. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the remaining number of fluctuations of the special symbol until it is set to the second time-saving gaming state will be reset, so in the fluctuation performance based on the result of the jackpot determination. , the end of the pre-introduction mode is announced. Then, when the variation of the special symbols ends, a jackpot game is performed.

Also in the pre-introduction mode, the game number display image GC is displayed. Note that in the pre-introduction mode, the game number display image GC may be hidden.

In this way, when there is a history of jackpot games, the pre-introduction mode is set for a predetermined period before the second time-saving game state is set, and the time period until the second time-saving game state is set by the countdown image CDG is set. The remaining number of fluctuations will be notified. Thereby, the player's expectations for the second time-saving gaming state can be increased, and the interest level can be improved.

In addition, in the predetermined number of changes (451st time) after the jackpot game is played, the effect pattern 701 is shielded using the pre-introduction shielding image 720 while the effect pattern 701 is being displayed as a variable (or may be during the start operation). A shielding effect (pre-introduction shielding effect) is performed. Thereby, it is possible to emphasize that the pre-introduction mode is started rather than the variable performance using the performance symbol 701. Since a special variation pattern table Tnx0 is set in the predetermined number of variations after the jackpot game, the above-mentioned effect for shifting to the pre-introduction mode can be performed in the predetermined number of variations.

In addition, a special fluctuation pattern table Tnx1 is set during the period from the setting of the pre-introduction mode until the transition to the second time-saving gaming state. Therefore, in each variation of the special symbol, it is possible to secure a variation time for executing a special effect using the above-mentioned characters.

Next, the flow of the effect when the time-saving introduction effect is performed via the pre-introduction mode will be explained.

FIG. 20 is an example of a timing chart showing the flow of the time-saving introduction effect when the time-saving introduction effect is performed via the pre-introduction mode. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main screen at each timing shown in FIG. 20.

As shown in FIG. 20, at time t0, the 500th variation of the special symbols after the jackpot game ends (FIG. 21(a)). Here, three performance symbols 701 indicating that the result of the jackpot determination is a loss are stopped and displayed. At this time, the countdown image CDG is "1".

Next, when the confirmation period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the second time-saving gaming state is set at time t1, and the 501st variation related to the suspension of the first special symbol is started (Fig. 21 (b)). Further, the countdown image CDG is updated to "0" at time t1. In addition, in response to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, the effect symbol 701 starts to fluctuate, the first pending icon HA1 is erased, and the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705a perform variable display (FIGS. 21(b) to 21(c) )).

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first special symbol began to fluctuate, an achievement effect is performed at time t2 (FIG. 21(d)). The achievement performance is a performance indicating a transition to the second time-saving game state (time-saving mode B). Achievement effects are executed only when the specified number of changes occur after the jackpot game is played, and are not executed when the specified number of changes occur after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed. . In addition, before or after the achievement performance, the time-saving entry shielding performance is performed. In addition, when going through the pre-introduction mode, the achievement effect may be performed without performing the above-mentioned time-saving entry shielding effect.

While the achievement performance is being executed, the performance pattern 701, the background image, the pending icon, and the icon TI are hidden. On the other hand, even during execution of the achievement performance, the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705 are continuously displayed and continue to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, the first digit reservation SHA and the second digit reservation SHB are also continuously displayed.

The achievement performance is a performance advantageous to the player, and is performed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10-15 seconds). For example, in the achievement effect, a moving image showing that the player's character has achieved the mission is displayed on the main screen. Further, in the achievement performance, a performance using performance accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) may be performed. In addition, in the achievement effect, the lamp control unit 150 performs an effect (effect that causes the frame lighting device 10, the movable effect device 73, the board lighting device 74, etc. to emit light in a specific manner).

After the achievement performance, the arrival performance is performed at time t3 (FIG. 21(e)). The reaching effect executed here is similar to the reaching effect (FIG. 13(c)) that is executed when the RWM clearing operation or setting change operation is changed a predetermined number of times. Furthermore, after that, a second time saving transition effect similar to that shown in FIG. 13(d) is performed.

Then, at time t4, the effect pattern 701 fades in in the same manner as in FIGS. 13(e) to (f), and the transition from the pre-introduction mode to the time saving mode B is completed (FIG. 21(f)). The performance in time saving mode B is as described above.

In addition, in FIGS. 20 and 21, in the pre-introduction mode, the 501st variation is performed based on the suspension of the first special symbol, but when the 500th variation (the specified number of variations) is completed, If the first special symbol is not on hold, the state shifts to a customer waiting state and the same effect as shown in FIG. 16(b) is performed.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of the effect when the first special symbol is not held at the time when the prescribed number of fluctuations is completed in the pre-introduction mode.

As shown in FIG. 22, if the first special symbol is not on hold at the time t0 when the 500th variation ends, the state shifts to a customer waiting state. In the customer waiting state, as shown in FIG. 22(b), a start image SG indicating the start of the second time-saving gaming state and a right-hand hitting notification image MH1 urging the player to play right are displayed.

Then, in response to the player hitting right and the game ball entering the second starting hole 47, the second special symbol starts to fluctuate (time t1, FIG. 22(c)). Thereafter, similarly to FIG. 21, an achievement effect is performed at time t2, and an attainment effect is performed at time t3 (FIGS. 22(d) to (e)). Then, at time t4, the effect pattern 701 fades in, and the transition to time saving mode B is completed (FIG. 22(f)).

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, after a jackpot game is played, if the variation of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times, the time-saving introduction effect is performed via the pre-introduction mode. When the time-saving introduction effect is performed via the pre-introduction mode, a dedicated achievement effect is performed. By performing the achievement effect from the pre-introduction mode, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the character will accomplish the mission, and to satisfy the player by accomplishing the mission. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the performance when shifting to the second time-saving game state.

The time-saving entry shielding effect is executed only in the second time-saving game state. Specifically, this is carried out in the first special symbol variation after transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state. Further, the pre-introduction mode is executed only in the normal gaming state.

Note that the time-saving entry shielding effect may be executed during the normal game state. For example, a time-saving entry shielding performance may be performed in the variation of special symbols before shifting to the second time-saving game state. For example, in the variation of the special symbol one time before transitioning to the second time-saving game state, a time-saving entry shielding effect is performed and the production symbol 701 is covered, and in the previous variation, the production symbol 701 appears and the time is reduced. You may shift to mode B. In addition, a time-saving entry shielding performance is performed in the special symbol variation before shifting to the second time-saving game state, and when the production symbol 701 is shielded, the previous variation ends, and from the next time onwards. The production pattern 701 may appear in the variation (variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) and the mode may shift to the time saving mode B. In this case, the small pattern 702 is displayed even while the performance pattern 701 is hidden, and the small pattern 702 is used to indicate that the special pattern stops displaying and starts changing.

(Example of reach performance in normal gaming state)
Next, the ready-to-win effect performed in the normal gaming state other than the introduction mode will be explained. The ready-to-win performance is a performance using the performance pattern 701, and is a performance that makes the player expect a jackpot. Specifically, the reach effect is an effect in which the same type of effect pattern 701 temporarily stops on the left and right, and the effect pattern 701 changes in the middle area, and the same type of effect pattern 701 as the effect pattern 701 temporarily stopped on the left and right side temporarily stops. This is an effect that makes the player expect the game to stop in the area.

In this embodiment, the reach effect includes a normal reach effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "N reach"), an SP reach effect, and a SPSP reach effect. The N reach performance is a performance that has the lowest possibility of becoming a jackpot (also referred to as jackpot expectation level or reliability) among a plurality of reach performances. For example, the expected level of jackpot for N reach performance is 1% or less. Note that there may be a plurality of N reach performances with different (or the same) performance times and/or jackpot expectations.

The SP reach performance is a performance with higher expectations for a jackpot than the N reach performance, and is a reach performance with a longer performance time than the N reach performance. For example, the jackpot expectation level of SP reach performance is 5 to 10%. Note that there may be a plurality of SP ready-to-reach performances as the SP ready-to-reach performances. The jackpot expectation level may differ depending on each SP reach performance, and the performance time may also differ. It may be configured such that the longer the performance time of the SP reach performance, the higher the expectation level of jackpot.

The SPSP reach performance is a performance with higher expectations for a jackpot than the SP reach performance, and is a reach performance with a longer performance time than the SP reach performance. For example, the jackpot expectation level of SPSP reach performance is 30 to 50%. Note that there may be a plurality of SPSP reach effects as the SPSP reach effect. The jackpot expectation level may differ depending on each SPSP reach performance, and the performance time may also differ. It may be configured such that the longer the performance time of the SPSP reach performance, the higher the expectation level of jackpot.

(Example of SPSP Reach production)
Hereinafter, an example of the SPSP reach effect performed in the normal gaming state other than the introduction mode will be explained. An example of a performance will be described in which a loss is reported as a result of the SPSP reach performance and a case where a jackpot is reported.

(Example of SPSP reach performance when the result of jackpot judgment is a loss)
FIG. 23 is a timing chart illustrating an example of the performance when the SPSP reach performance is performed when the result of the jackpot determination performed in the normal gaming state other than the introduction mode is a loss. 24 to 26 are diagrams showing examples of effects at each timing in FIG. 23.

In the normal game state, for example, when the 101st special symbol fluctuation starts from the jackpot game (time t1), the three performance symbols 701 that have been stopped and displayed start to fluctuate, and the performance symbol 701, small symbol 702, and the fourth symbol 705 are displayed in a variable manner (FIGS. 24(a) to 24(b)). A preview performance may be performed at time t3 during the variable display of the performance pattern 701 (FIG. 24(c)). The preview performance is a performance that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, and the degree of expectation of a jackpot is suggested depending on the aspect of the preview performance. Depending on the form of the preview performance, the type (SP reach, SPSP reach) and content (which one of the multiple SPSP reach performances) of the next reach performance may be suggested. Further, a pseudo fluctuation performance using a plurality of performance symbols 701 may be shattered one or more times. The pseudo fluctuating performance is a performance in which any one of the plurality of performance symbols 701 temporarily stops and fluctuates again, and the greater the number of times the performance symbol 701 pseudo fluctuates, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. In addition, in this pseudo-fluctuation presentation, even when the presentation pattern 701 stops pseudo, the small pattern 702 and the fourth pattern continue to be displayed in a variable manner without pseudo-stopping.

When a predetermined time (for example, 5 to 20 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the left symbol (for example, the "6" symbol) temporarily stops (FIG. 24(d)). Furthermore, after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, the right symbol of the same type as the left symbol temporarily stops and a reach is established (time t4, FIG. 24(e)). When reach is achieved, reach notification is performed to indicate that reach is achieved. For example, an image spanning the left and right symbols may be displayed, or a voice saying "reach" may be output.

After the reach is achieved at time t4, the N reach effect is performed from time t4 to t5 (FIG. 24(f)). During the N reach performance, the left and right symbols temporarily stop, and the middle symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. The N reach performance is performed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 8 to 10 seconds). This makes the player expect that the middle symbols of the same type as the left and right symbols will stop. During this time, the normal background image is displayed, and the first pending icon HA and the icon TI are also displayed. Further, during the N reach performance, the performance pattern 701 is displayed in a normal format including characters and numbers, and its size is the same as at the start of variation. Note that the size of the performance pattern 701 may change during the N reach performance. For example, as the middle symbol approaches the center area from the top of the screen, the middle symbol in the normal mode may be displayed larger (or smaller) than the left symbol and the right symbol. Further, during the N reach performance, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are emitted by the lamp control unit 150 in a light emission pattern that suggests the possibility of a jackpot.

Next, an SP development performance that suggests the development from the N reach performance to the SP reach performance is performed (FIG. 25(a)). In the SP development performance, a display indicating that the SP ready-to-reach performance is started is performed. For example, a title indicating the type of SP reach effect to be executed is displayed. For example, any one of a plurality of title displays including a first title display corresponding to the first SP ready-to-win performance and a second title display corresponding to the second SP ready-to-win performance is displayed. The degree of jackpot expectation differs depending on the type and display mode of these title displays (for example, the color of text and background). Moreover, as shown in FIG. 25(a), the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed as being reduced and moved to the left and right areas above the main screen. In addition, in the N reach performance, the middle symbols of a type different from the left symbol and the right symbol may be temporarily stopped, the reach loss is temporarily notified, and then the SP development performance may be performed. In this case, the SP development effect is performed without displaying the post-reach shielding image described later after the reach failure.

Next, at time t5, the SP reach effect is started (FIG. 25(b)). During the SP ready-to-reach presentation, the presentation symbols in the SP ready-to-win mode are temporarily stopped on the left and right sides of the screen, and a presentation is performed in which the middle symbols change. The performance pattern in the SP ready-to-reach mode is a performance pattern that includes a numeric image but does not include a character, and is smaller than the performance pattern in the normal mode. Further, in the central area of the main screen, for example, a battle between the player's character and the enemy character is displayed. Moreover, a background image for SP reach effect is displayed as a background image.

Further, during the SP reach effect, the icon TI is displayed, but the first pending icon HA is hidden. In addition, in other embodiments, the first hold icon HA may be displayed during the SP reach effect.

On the other hand, the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705 are displayed even during the SP ready-to-win performance, and their positions and display modes do not change. Further, the first digit retention SHA and the second digit retention SHB are displayed even during the SP reach effect, and their positions and display modes do not change. Further, during the SP reach performance, the lamp control unit 150 causes the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 to emit light in a light emission pattern that suggests the possibility of a jackpot.

The SP reach performance is performed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 20 seconds). When a jackpot is announced as a result of the SP reach performance, the player's character wins and the same type of middle symbols on the left and right stop. On the other hand, when a loss is reported as a result of the SP reach effect, the player's character loses and the middle symbols, which are different from the left and right, stop.

As a result of the SP reach performance, a jackpot or loss is not reported, and immediately before time t6, an SPSP development performance suggesting that the SP reach performance will develop into an SPSP reach performance is performed (FIG. 25(c)). Incidentally, as a result of the SP reach performance, after the middle symbols different from the left and right are temporarily stopped and a reach loss is provisionally notified, the SPSP development performance may be performed. In this case, the SPSP development effect is performed without displaying the post-reach shielding image described later after the reach failure.

In the SPSP development performance, a display indicating that the SPSP reach performance is started is performed. For example, a title indicating the type of SPSP reach performance to be executed is displayed. The expectation of a jackpot differs depending on the type of title display and display format (for example, the color of the text and background).

Next, at time t6, the SPSP reach effect is started (FIG. 25(d)). During the SPSP reach performance, for example, a fighting scene following the SP reach performance is displayed. During the SPSP ready-to-win presentation, the presentation symbols of the SPSP ready-to-win mode are temporarily stopped on the left and right sides of the screen, and a presentation is performed in which the middle symbols change. The performance symbols in the SPSP ready-to-win mode are performance symbols that include numeric images but do not include characters, and are smaller than the performance symbols in the normal mode. Moreover, a background image for SPSP reach effect is displayed as a background image. Further, during the SPSP reach effect, the icon TI and the first pending icon HA are hidden. The small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705 are displayed even during the SPSP reach effect, and their positions and display modes do not change. Further, the first digit hold SHA and the second digit hold SHB are displayed even during the SPSP reach effect, and their positions and display modes do not change. Further, during the SPSP reach effect, the lamp control unit 150 causes the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 to emit light in a light emission pattern that suggests the possibility of a jackpot.

The SPSP reach effect is performed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds). At time t7, which is the final stage of the SPSP reach effect, the result of the SPSP reach effect is displayed (FIG. 25(e)). Here, since it is determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination at the start of the variation of the current special symbol, at time t7, the middle symbol of a type different from the left symbol and the right symbol temporarily stops. As a result, the reach loss is notified. Note that an operation performance that prompts the user to operate the performance button device 16 may be performed immediately before the result of the SPSP reach performance is displayed. Then, depending on the operation on the production button device 16, a reach loss may be notified. Moreover, when a reach loss is displayed, the lamp control unit 150 causes the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 to emit light in a light emission pattern that indicates a reach loss.

After the reach loss is reported, at time t8, a post-reach shielding image 730 appears on the main screen (FIG. 25(f)). For example, the after-reach shielding image 730 appears in the central area of the main screen and shields the middle symbol. The post-reach shielding image 730 is enlarged over a predetermined period of time (FIG. 26(a)) and comes to cover the entire main screen (FIG. 26(b)). While the post-reach shielding image 730 is displayed on the entire surface, the lamp control unit 150 performs lamp control in a specific manner, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit light in a specific light emission pattern. Note that the light emission patterns of the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74 may be the same or different between when the reach is missed and when the after-reach shielding image 730 is displayed.

The after-reach shielding image 730 is an image that shields the effect pattern 701, the background image, the first pending icon HA, and the icon TI, and is displayed in front of these images. Therefore, while the post-reach shielded image 730 is displayed on the entire screen, these images are not displayed. The post-reach shielding image 730 is enlarged over a predetermined period of time and displayed on the entire screen. For this reason, the after-reach shielding image 730 and the effect pattern 701 may be displayed at the same time after the after-reach shielding image 730 appears until it is displayed on the entire screen.

In addition, the after-reach shielding image 730 may be configured to change from a transparent state to an opaque state over a predetermined period of time, so that the after-reach shield image 730 covers the production pattern 701 and the background image over a predetermined period of time. . Even in this case, the after-reach shielding image 730 and the effect pattern 701 may be displayed at the same time from when the after-reach shielding image 730 appears until it is displayed on the entire screen.

On the other hand, the small symbol 702, the fourth symbol 705, the first number pending SHA, and the second number pending SHB are not shielded by the post-reach shielding image 730. That is, even while the after-reach shielding image 730 is displayed on the entire screen, the small symbol 702, the fourth symbol 705, the first number pending SHA, and the second number pending SHB are continuously displayed. Specifically, these images are placed in front of the post-reach shielded image 730 and are displayed preferentially.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the after-reach shielding image 730 was displayed on the entire screen, the after-reach shielding image 730 fades out and the production pattern 701 fades in (time t9). For example, as shown in FIG. 26(c), an elliptical area is formed in the center of the post-reach shielding image 730, and a part of the temporarily stopped performance symbol 701 and a background image (normally An image including a portion of the background image) is displayed. The elliptical area expands over a predetermined period of time (FIG. 26(d)). As the elliptical area expands, the normal screen (the normal background image, the production pattern 701, the first pending icon HA, and the image containing the icon TI) on the back side of the after-reach hidden image 730 gradually reappears. will be displayed.

Immediately before time t10, the post-reach shielding image 730 disappears and the re-appearance of the effect pattern 701 is completed (FIG. 26(e)). Here, the temporarily stopped production pattern 701 reappears. Further, a normal background image is displayed, and the first pending icon HA and the icon TI are also displayed. Note that when the effect pattern 701 reappears, an SPSP ready-to-reach effect background image may be displayed instead of the normal background image.

Then, at time t10, in response to the stop display of the special symbol, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 701 is stopped and displayed, and the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705 are stopped and displayed (FIG. 26(f)).

Here, the effect pattern 701 that reappears after the post-reach shielding image 730 is displayed is a normal effect pattern including a character image and a number image. On the other hand, before the post-reach shielding image 730 is displayed, the effect pattern 701 is an effect pattern of the SPSP ready-to-reach mode, which is only a number image. That is, the display mode of the effect pattern 701 is different before and after the after-reach shielding image 730 is displayed.

Moreover, before the after-reach shielding image 730 is displayed, the background image for SPSP reach effect is displayed, but after the after-reach shielding image 730 is displayed, the normal background image is displayed.

Furthermore, before the after-reach shielding image 730 is displayed, the first pending icon HA and the corresponding icon TI are hidden, but after the reach-after shielding image 730 is displayed, the first pending icon HA and the corresponding icon TI are hidden. Icon TI is displayed.

As described above, after the SPSP reach performance is performed and the reach is lost, a shielding performance (post-reach shielding performance) in which the performance symbol 701 is shielded using the post-reach shielding image 730 is performed. With the shielding performance, even if a loss in the reach is reported as a result of the SPSP reach performance with high expectations for a jackpot, the player can have expectations. In other words, even in the case where the left symbol and the middle symbol that are different from the right symbol are stopped and the player loses the reach, the effect symbol 701 is covered, so that the player can expect to hit the jackpot (three symbols line up) afterward. You can do it.

Further, in this embodiment, after reaching is missed, the after-reaching shielding image 730 appears in a small size, and as it enlarges, the effect pattern 701 gradually becomes difficult to see. As a result, even if the player is disappointed due to losing the reach, he or she can gradually recover his or her expectations and improve the level of interest.

Moreover, in this embodiment, after the after-reach shielding image 730 is displayed, the after-reach shielding image 730 is gradually hidden, and the temporarily stopped performance symbol 701 gradually reappears. Thereby, the effect pattern 701 in the temporarily stopped state gradually becomes visible from the difficult to see state, so that it is possible to arouse expectations and anxiety in the player and improve interest.

Note that the post-reach shielding image 730 is not always displayed when the SPSP reach effect is performed, but may be displayed in response to the variation pattern of the special symbol or in the lottery result using the effect random number based on the variation pattern. Depending on the location, it may or may not be displayed.

For example, if the first SPSP reach effect is performed where the expectation level among multiple SPSP reach effects is the first value (for example, the probability of hitting the jackpot is 40% or more), then the first probability is that the reach effect will be reached after the reach loss with the first probability. A post-occlusion image 730 may be displayed. In addition, when a second SPSP reach performance is performed where the expectation level among the multiple SPSP reach performances is the second value (for example, the probability of hitting the jackpot is 20% to 30%), the probability is higher than the first probability. The post-reach shielding image 730 may be displayed after a reach failure with a low (or high) second probability.

Further, the displayed post-reach shielding image 730 may be different or the same in the case where the first SPSP reach effect is performed and the case where the second SPSP reach effect is performed. Furthermore, the display time of the post-reach shielding image 730 may be different or may be the same when the first SPSP reach effect is performed and when the second SPSP reach effect is performed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the hold icon and the icon are hidden during the SPSP reach performance, and the hold icon and the icon are hidden also while the post-reach shielding image 730 is displayed. In other embodiments, the hold icon and/or the icon may be displayed during the SPSP reach performance, and the hold icon and/or the icon may be displayed also while the post-reach shielding image 730 is being displayed.

In addition, in the above production example, a loss is announced after the reach-to-reach shielding image 730 is displayed, but in other production examples, a jackpot may be announced after the reach-to-reach shielding image 730 is displayed after a reach-to-reach loss. You can. For example, after the after-reach shielding image 730 is displayed, the effect pattern 701 indicating a jackpot appears in a temporarily stopped state (a state in which three effect patterns 701 are aligned), and a jackpot is announced. You can.

Furthermore, in the case of a jackpot, the same after-reach shielding image 730 as in the case of a loss may be displayed, or a different after-reach shielding image 730 may be displayed. For example, if the red after-reach shielding image 730 is displayed after losing the reach, the possibility of hitting the jackpot may be higher than when the blue after-reach shielding image 730 is displayed. Furthermore, the possibility of hitting the jackpot later may vary depending on the type of the post-reach shielding image 730 that is displayed after losing the reach. Furthermore, if a specific image is included in the post-reach shielding image 730 that is displayed after a reach loss, a jackpot may be confirmed. Further, in the case of a jackpot, the display time of the post-reach shielding image 730 may be longer (or shorter) than in the case of a loss. Furthermore, the longer the display time of the post-reach shielded image 730 may be, the higher (or lower) the possibility of hitting the jackpot may be than when the display time is short.

Furthermore, after a reach loss is temporarily notified in the SP reach performance, the post-reach shielding image 730 may be displayed, and then the SPSP development performance may be performed.

Note that when the after-reach shielding image 730 is displayed, the probability of hitting the jackpot afterwards is relatively low. For example, the probability is set to be lower than the jackpot probability (for example, 1/200) in jackpot determination. Thereby, it is possible to increase the rarity of a performance pattern that results in a jackpot from the post-reach shielded image 730, and to increase the player's sense of satisfaction when the performance is performed. Note that the probability of a jackpot after the reach-to-reach shielding image 730 is displayed may be set to be higher than the jackpot probability in jackpot determination.

In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to the production pattern in which the production pattern 701 reappears in a state where the symbols are aligned from the shielding production using the post-reach shielding image 730, the production pattern 701 reappears after reaching loss is reported in the SPSP reach production. There is also a performance pattern in which a revival performance is performed in which the number changes again and then a jackpot is announced. In the revival performance, a jackpot may be announced by the appearance of a performance accessory. The post-reach shielding image 730 does not need to be displayed before this revival effect. Furthermore, the post-reach shielding image 730 may be displayed even before the revival effect.

Further, although the above performance is performed in the normal gaming state other than the introduction mode, a series of performances including the SPSP reach performance may also be performed in the pre-introduction mode. For example, in the transition to the pre-introduction mode, a series of performances including the SPSP reach performance may be performed. In this case, after the special symbol starts changing, a pre-introduction shielding effect is performed and the transition to the pre-introduction mode is performed, and then N reach, SP reach, and SPSP reach are performed in the same way as above, and a post-reach shielding image is displayed. You can. On the contrary, a series of performances including the SPSP reach performance may not be performed in the pre-introduction mode.

Further, a series of performances including the above-mentioned SPSP reach performance may be performed in the first variation after reaching the specified number of times (the first variation in the second time-saving game state). In this case, after the special symbol starts changing, a time-saving entry shielding effect is performed, and then N reach, SP reach, and SPSP reach are performed in order, and a post-reach shielding image may be displayed. Further, a series of performances including the SPSP reach performance may be performed in the second and subsequent fluctuations after reaching the specified number of times. On the contrary, the series of performances including the SPSP reach performance may not be performed in the second time-saving game state after reaching the specified number of times.

It should be noted that even when the variable performance ends with the SP SP reach performance without developing into the SPSP reach performance, the post-reach shielding image is displayed in the same manner as described above. That is, after a loss is reported as a result of the SP reach performance (after a reach loss), a post-reach shielding image is displayed in the same manner as described above.

Specifically, after the SP reach effect is performed in FIG. 25(b), instead of executing the SPSP development effect in FIG. 25(c), a middle symbol indicating a loss (for example, a "5 ” symbol) will temporarily stop and a missed reach will be displayed. After the reach loss, as shown in FIGS. 25(f) to 26(b), a post-reach shielding image appears and covers the effect pattern 701 of the lose state over a predetermined period of time. Then, as shown in FIG. 26(e), after the after-reach shielding image is displayed for a predetermined period of time, a temporarily stopped effect pattern 701 appears.

Note that the after-reach shielding image displayed after the SP reach effect may be the same as or different from the after-reach shield image displayed after the SPSP reach effect. Further, the display time of the after-reach shielding image after the SP reach performance may be the same as the display time of the after-reach shield image after the SPSP reach performance, or may be shorter or longer.

Further, if the variable performance ends with the N reach performance without developing into the SP reach performance and the SPSP reach performance, the post-reach shielding image is not displayed. That is, when a reach loss is reported as a result of the N reach effect, the post-reach shielding image is not displayed after the reach loss.

Specifically, after the N reach effect is performed in FIG. 24(f), instead of the SP development effect in FIG. 25(a) being executed, the middle symbol indicating a loss is stopped and a reach loss effect is performed. . After the reach-loss effect, the effect pattern 701 in the temporarily stopped loss mode is stopped and displayed without the after-reach shielding image being displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the effect pattern 701 is displayed in a manner indicating a loss in a reach effect where the expectation level for a jackpot is relatively high (SPSP reach effect, SP reach effect), the cover image after reach is displayed. A shielding performance (post-reach shielding performance) is performed in which the performance symbol 701 in a mode indicating a loss is shielded using this method. After the post-reach shielding image is displayed for a predetermined time, the effect pattern 701 in a temporarily stopped state reappears, and then the effect pattern 701 is stopped and displayed.

As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment when the player loses the reach even after having high expectations due to the reach effect, and it is possible to maintain the player's expectations even after the reach is lost. Furthermore, even if you lose the reach, you can create an expectation that you may hit the jackpot after the next fluctuation.

On the other hand, when a reach effect (N reach effect) with a relatively low expectation of a jackpot is performed, after the effect pattern 701 is displayed in a manner indicating a loss, the post-reach cover image does not appear and there is no possibility of a loss. The production pattern 701 is stopped and displayed in this manner. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the after-reach shielded image from appearing frequently, and it is possible to increase the value of the after-reach shielded image.

Note that the after-reach shielding effect may be executed only in the normal gaming state. Further, the after-reach shielding performance may be performed not only in the normal game state but also in the time-saving game state. In this case, the after-reach shielding effect may be more easily executed in the normal game state than in the time-saving game state. Conversely, the after-reach shielding effect may be more easily executed in the time-saving game state than in the normal game state.

(Example of performance when jackpot is announced as a result of SPSP reach performance)
Next, an explanation will be given of an example of a performance in which a jackpot is announced as a result of the SPSP reach performance when the result of a jackpot determination performed in a normal gaming state other than the introduction mode is a jackpot.

FIG. 27 is a timing chart showing an example of a performance when a reach hit is announced in the SPSP reach performance when the result of the jackpot determination performed in the normal gaming state other than the introduction mode is a jackpot. 28 to 29 are diagrams showing examples of effects at each timing in FIG. 27.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, from time t1 to just before t7, effects similar to those shown in FIGS. 24 to 25(d) are performed. At time t7, as a result of the SPSP ready-to-reach performance, the same type of performance symbols 701 as the left and right performance symbols 701 are temporarily stopped as middle symbols, and a reach-to-reach performance is notified (FIG. 28(b)).

Next, at time t8, a jackpot notification effect is performed (FIG. 28(c)). In the jackpot notification performance, three performance patterns 701 of the same type are displayed in an enlarged manner on the main screen, and the performance pattern 701 is emphasized. Also, at this time, a jackpot background image that suggests a jackpot is displayed.

Next, at time t9, the three same type of performance symbols 701 temporarily stop at their normal size (FIG. 28(d)). Here, the normal mode effect pattern 701 including a character image and a number image may be temporarily stopped. Further, the effect pattern 701 (the effect pattern of the ready-to-win mode) of a number image that does not include a character image may be temporarily stopped. Furthermore, at time t9, the first pending icon HA and the icon TI are also displayed. Note that the first pending icon HA and the icon TI may remain hidden at time t9.

Then, in response to the special symbol being stopped and displayed at time t10, the performance symbol 701 is stopped and displayed (FIG. 28(e)). In response to the stop display of this special symbol, the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705 are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

When a predetermined fixed period has elapsed since the special symbol stopped being displayed, the opening performance is started (FIG. 28(f)). In the opening performance, a performance indicating that a jackpot game is to be started is performed, and a right-hitting notification performance is performed to encourage the player to play right-handed.

Next, the jackpot game is started, and the jackpot game production related to the first round of the jackpot game is started (FIG. 29(a)). In the jackpot game performance, a round number display image 780 indicating the remaining number of rounds is displayed. Further, as a jackpot game effect, the number of prize balls won by the player is displayed. For example, the total number of prize balls won in the current jackpot game may be added and displayed, or each time a game ball enters the jackpot, the number of prize balls related to the winning may be displayed. Further, in the jackpot game production, the player's character may be displayed.

When the jackpot game progresses and the last round game in the jackpot game ends, an ending effect is performed (FIG. 29(b)). In the ending performance, a performance suggesting entering time saving mode A (any of time saving modes A1 to A3) is performed, and for example, a right hitting notification image is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen to encourage the player to hit right. .

Furthermore, in the ending performance, a predetermined warning performance is performed on the main screen to call attention to the player (FIG. 29(c)). For example, as a predetermined warning performance, a performance may be performed to urge the player not to forget to take out the IC card, or a warning may be performed to prevent the player from becoming absorbed in the game.

Then, when the ending performance ends, at time t11, if there is a hold on the first special symbol, a variable display of the first special symbol related to the hold is performed, and if there is no hold on the first special symbol, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. A variable display of the second special symbol is performed in accordance with the winning of the second starting hole 47 (FIG. 29(d)). Here, the time-saving mode A is set, and a right-handed hitting notification effect is performed to encourage the player to play right-handed.

In the time saving mode A, a variable effect is performed using a time saving mode effect pattern 701 that includes a numeric image and does not include a character image. In addition, a time-saving background image is displayed as a background image. Here, time-saving background images JA1 to JA3 corresponding to each of the time-saving modes A1 to A3 may be prepared. Further, the time-saving background image JA1 corresponding to the time-saving mode A1 and the time-saving background image JA2 corresponding to the time-saving mode A2 are different from the time-saving background image corresponding to the above-mentioned time-saving mode B, and the time-saving background image JA3 corresponding to the time-saving mode A3 is different from the time-saving background image JA2 corresponding to the time-saving mode A2. , may be the same as the time-saving background image corresponding to the time-saving mode B described above.

In the time saving mode A, the second pending icon HB is displayed according to the number of pending changes in the variable display of the second special symbol, and the icon TI corresponding to the special symbol being varied is displayed. The shapes of the second hold icon HB and the icon TI in the time saving mode A may be the same as or different from the shapes of the second hold icon HB and the icon TI in the time saving mode B. Further, the shape of the second hold icon HB and the icon TI may be different between the time saving mode A1 and the time saving modes A2 and A3.

Further, in the time saving mode A, only the second hold icon HB may be displayed, and the icon TI may be hidden. Further, in the time saving mode A, a remaining time saving number display (N times remaining) that is not displayed in the time saving mode B and indicating the remaining number of time saving times may be displayed. Note that the remaining time saving number display may also be displayed in the time saving mode B.

In this way, when a jackpot is announced due to a reach hit as a result of the SPSP reach performance, the three performance symbols 701 are temporarily stopped in a jackpot mode without the above-mentioned post-reach shielding image 730 being displayed. Thereby, the jackpot can be notified from the SPSP reach performance, and the game can proceed smoothly to the jackpot game. Note that as a result of the SPSP reach effect, a post-reach shielding image may be displayed even after the reach hit is displayed.

In addition, if it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination performed in the normal gaming state other than the introduction mode, the three performance symbols 701 will be stopped in a jackpot mode before the variable display of the special symbols ends, and after that, the jackpot game will be played. Since the game shifts to the time-saving game state via , it takes a relatively long time from when the three performance symbols 701 are stopped in the jackpot mode to the time-saving game state. On the other hand, if it is judged as a loss in the jackpot judgment immediately after reaching the specified number of times, the introduction shielding image will be displayed before the fluctuating display of the special symbol ends, and after a relatively short period of time, the special symbol will be A time-saving game state is entered at the timing when the symbols stop. As a result, when a player performs an advantageous event (display of a shielding image at the time of introduction, display of an image indicating a jackpot), it is possible to vary the time it takes to shift to the time-saving gaming state, allowing for a variety of games. At the same time, if the shielding image is displayed at the time of introduction, it is possible to shift to the time-saving gaming state in a relatively short time.

In addition, in Figures 27 to 29, we have shown the case where a jackpot is announced in the SPSP reach effect, but when a jackpot is announced as a result of the SP reach effect, the middle symbols of the same type on the left and right temporarily stop and the reach hit is announced. After being notified, the post-reach shielding image will not be displayed in the same way as above.

In addition, although FIGS. 27 to 29 have explained the performance when it is determined to be a jackpot in the normal gaming state other than the introduction mode, for example, when it is determined to be a jackpot during the pre-introduction mode, the production shown in FIGS. A similar performance may be performed. Note that, on the contrary, if a jackpot is determined during the pre-introduction mode, a special performance different from the above may be performed.

(Example of production when not reachable)
Hereinafter, an example of a performance in which the reach performance is not performed when the result of the jackpot determination performed in the normal gaming state other than the introduction mode is a loss will be described. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a timing chart showing an example of a performance when the reach performance is not performed when the result of the jackpot determination performed in the normal gaming state other than the introduction mode is a loss. 31 and 32 are diagrams showing examples of effects at each timing in FIG. 30.

In the normal game state, for example, when the 101st special symbol fluctuation starts from the jackpot game (time t1), the three performance symbols 701 that have been stopped and displayed start to fluctuate, and the performance symbol 701, small symbol 702, and the fourth symbol 705 are displayed in a variable manner (FIG. 31(a)). After the effect pattern 701 starts to fluctuate, the effect pattern 701 performs a variable display effect (time t2, FIG. 31(b)).

Next, at time t3, a variable shielding image 740 appears that blocks the effect pattern 701 that is being displayed in a variable manner (FIG. 31(c)). For example, the changing occlusion image 740 appears from the right edge of the main screen and gradually expands. As shown in FIG. 31(c), while the changing shielding image 740 is being enlarged, the production pattern 701 and a part of the background image remain displayed. At time t4, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fluctuating shielding image 740 appeared, the fluctuating shielding image 740 is displayed on the entire main screen (FIG. 31(d)).

When the changing shielding image 740 is displayed on the entire main screen, the effect pattern 701, the background image, and the game number display image GC are blocked by the changing shielding image 740. Further, while the changing shielding image 740 is displayed on the entire surface, the lamp control by the lamp control unit 150 is in a dedicated mode, so that the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern. controlled.

On the other hand, the first pending icon HA1 and the icon TI are not shielded by the changing shielding image 740. Further, the small symbol 702, the fourth symbol 705, the first digit pending SHA, and the second pending digit SHB are also not blocked by the changing blocking image 740. That is, these images continue to be displayed even while the changing occlusion image 740 is being displayed. Note that the number of games display image GC may be continuously displayed without being blocked by the changing blocking image 740.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the entirety of the effect pattern 701 was covered by the changing cover image 740, the effect pattern 701 faded in while the variable cover image 740 faded out (FIG. 31(e)). Specifically, a part of the changing shielding image 740 is hidden, and an image including the normal background image and the effect pattern 701 is displayed in the hidden area.

Then, the display area of the changing shielding image 740 gradually shrinks, and the area including the normal background image and the effect pattern 701 expands, and at time t5, the reappearance of the effect pattern 701 is completed (FIG. 31(f) )). At this point in time t5, a temporarily stopped loss mode effect pattern 701 is displayed. Furthermore, at this point, the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705 continue to be displayed in a variable manner. Then, in response to the stop display of the special symbol, the performance symbol 701 is stopped and displayed (time t6). Further, in response to the stop display of the special symbol, the small symbol 702 and the fourth symbol 705 are also stopped and displayed.

FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance when the three performance symbols 701 stop in a predetermined order without the changing shielding image 740 being displayed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

As shown in FIG. 32, in response to the start of variation of the special symbols, the three performance symbols 701 begin to fluctuate (FIG. 32(a)), and perform a variable display performance for a predetermined period of time (FIG. 32(b)). After that, the left symbol 701L temporarily stops, then the right symbol 701R, which is a different type from the left symbol 701L, temporarily stops, and then the middle symbol 701C temporarily stops (FIGS. 32(c) to (e)). Then, in response to the stop display of the special symbols, the three performance symbols 701 are stopped and displayed (FIG. 32(f)).

In this way, when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the three performance symbols 701 normally stop in a predetermined order without the variable shielding image 740 appearing. Note that the order in which the three performance symbols 701 stop is not limited to this. Furthermore, there may be a plurality of orders in which the three performance symbols 701 stop. For example, the three production symbols 701 may be stopped in a first order (for example, left, right, center order), and may be stopped in a second order (for example, right, left, center order). There may be. In this case, the degree of expectation of a jackpot may vary depending on the order in which the three performance symbols 701 are stopped. For example, the second order may have higher expectations than the first order.

As described above, in this embodiment, during the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 701, a shielding performance (fluctuation shielding performance) in which the performance symbol 701 is shielded using the fluctuating shielding image 740 may be performed. In the shielding effect, an appearance effect is performed in which the changing shielding image 740 gradually appears, and a disappearing effect is performed in which the effect pattern 701 gradually disappears. Since the performance symbols 701 are shielded during the variable display of the performance symbols 701, a surprising performance can be performed and the expectations of the player can be increased.

Further, since the changing hidden image 740 gradually appears, it is possible to make the player interested in what kind of performance will be performed next when a part of it is displayed.

In addition, the changing shielding image 740 gradually fades out, and the temporary stop state effect pattern 701 gradually fades in. Therefore, when a part of the performance symbols 701 appears, the player can have an expectation that the performance symbols 701 in a jackpot mode may appear.

Further, in this embodiment, even while the effect pattern 701 is covered by the changing blocking image 740, the first pending icon HA and the icon TI are continuously displayed. Thereby, even if the performance symbol 701 that is being displayed in a variable manner is suddenly covered, the player can easily recognize that the special symbol continues to vary.

Furthermore, when the changing shielding image 740 is not displayed, the three effect symbols 701 stop in a predetermined order, and when the fluctuating shielding image 740 is displayed, the three effect symbols 701 stop in a predetermined order. Do not stop. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the motion when stopping the production pattern 701, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Note that the timing at which the changing shielding image 740 appears is not limited to the period during which the effect pattern 701 is being displayed in a changing manner. For example, the changing shielding image 740 may appear during the start motion performance of the performance pattern 701. Further, the changing shielding image 740 may appear while the effect pattern 701 is temporarily stopped.

Furthermore, in the above description, when the effect pattern 701 reappears after the changing shielding image 740 is displayed, it appears in a temporarily stopped state. However, when the effect pattern 701 reappears, three effect patterns Some of the symbols 701 may be displayed in a variable manner, and the other portion may be temporarily stopped, or all three performance symbols 701 may be displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, in FIG. 31, an example is shown in which the effect pattern 701 appears in a losing manner after the changing occluding image 740 is displayed, but in other examples of effects, after the changing occluding image 740 is displayed. , the performance pattern 701 in the form of a jackpot may appear.

In addition, after the variable shielding image 740 is displayed, the effect pattern 701 that is being displayed in a variable manner reappears, and then, as shown in FIGS. 24 to 26, reach is established, N reach effect, SP reach effect. , SPSP reach performance, and so on, may develop into highly anticipated performances. In this case, there may be a case where the reach is missed and a post-reach shielded image is displayed, or there may be a case where the reach is hit. Furthermore, after the changing shielding image 740 is displayed, the effect symbol 701 which is being displayed in a variable manner appears, and then a reach is established, an N reach effect is performed, and a reach loss may occur. In this case, the effect pattern 701 may be stopped and displayed without displaying the cover image after reach.

Further, after the changing shielding image 740 is displayed, the effect pattern 701 may appear in a state where a reach is established, and then an N reach effect or the like may be performed. In this case, there may be a case where the reach is hit after that, a case where the reach is missed and a hidden image is displayed after the reach, or a case where the reach is lost and the screen is stopped as it is. good.

Furthermore, when the changing shielding image 740 is displayed, it may be easier to develop into a reach effect, or it may be less likely to develop into a reach effect than when the changing shielding image 740 is not displayed.

In addition, the changing occluding image 740 is displayed, and the changing occluding image 740 is hidden, indicating that a specific performance with high expectations for a jackpot will develop (for example, the above-mentioned SPSP reach performance or another performance). A suggestive image may appear and develop into the specific effect. In addition, after the changing occluding image 740 is displayed, an image that suggests that there is a possibility of developing into the specific effect appears, and after the image is displayed, the case where the change develops into the specific effect and the development There may be cases where it is not.

Further, in this embodiment, the time during which the changing shielding image 740 is displayed differs depending on the changing pattern of the special symbol. There are times when the variable occlusion image 740 is displayed for a relatively long time, and there are times when it is displayed for a short time. That is, the display time of the changing occlusion image 740 is variable. For example, the display time of the varying occlusion image 740 may vary between 1 second and 20 seconds. The longer the display time of the variable occlusion image 740 is, the higher the expectation level for a jackpot may be.

It should be noted that the changing shield effect may be executed only in the normal gaming state. Further, the changing shielding effect may be executed not only in the normal game state but also in the time-saving game state. In this case, the changing shielding effect may be more easily executed in the normal game state than in the time-saving game state. On the contrary, the variable shielding effect may be more easily executed in the time-saving game state than in the normal game state. Further, the changing shielding performance may be executable in the first time-saving game state, and may not be executable in the second time-saving game state, or vice versa.

(Characteristics of each shielding effect)
As described above, in this embodiment, a shielding performance (shielding performance at the time of time-saving entry) is performed in which the performance symbol 701 is shielded using the shielding image 710 when transitioning to the second time-saving game state. In addition, during a predetermined period before the fluctuation of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times after the jackpot game is played, the pre-introduction mode is set which suggests a shift to the second time-saving game state. When this pre-introduction mode is set, a shielding effect (pre-introduction shielding effect) in which the effect pattern 701 and the like are covered using the pre-introduction shielding image 720 is performed. Further, after a reach loss in the reach effect, a shielding effect (post-reach shielding effect) in which the effect pattern 701 is shielded using the after-reach shielding image 730 may be performed. Further, even when the ready-to-win effect is not performed (even before the ready-to-win effect is established), a shielding effect (a changing-in-the-moment shielding effect) in which the effect pattern 701 is shielded using the changing-in-the-movement shielding image 740 may be performed. The characteristics of each of these shield effects will be explained below with reference to FIG. 33.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example of the characteristics of each shielding effect.

(Shielding effect during time-saving entry)
As shown in FIG. 33, the time-saving entry shielding effect indicates that the number of changes in the special symbol has reached the specified number after a jackpot game is played, or after an RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed. It is executed in response to an opportunity.

The execution timing of the time-saving entry shielding performance is a fixed timing during the first special symbol fluctuation after reaching the specified number of times. For example, the execution timing may be during the start motion presentation of the presentation pattern 701, during the variable display presentation, or during a temporary stop. Furthermore, the execution timing of the time-saving entry shielding effect differs depending on whether there is a jackpot history or not. That is, the execution timing of the time-saving entry shielding effect is different between after the specified number of times is reached after the jackpot game is played and after the specified logarithm is reached after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed.

In other embodiments, the execution timing of the time-saving entry shielding effect may be when the fluctuation stops for the predetermined number of times. Further, the execution timing of the time-saving entry shielding effect may be variable according to the fluctuation pattern. That is, depending on the variation pattern, the timing at which to start the time-saving entry shielding performance may be set in the variation.

Additionally, the pre-introduction mode performance is performed as a suggestive performance that suggests the time-saving entry shielding performance. The pre-introduction mode is performed over a plurality of variations of special symbols, and indicates the remaining number of variations until the time-saving entry shielding effect is executed. The pre-introduction mode actively (directly) suggests that the time-saving entry shielding effect will be executed. When the mode shifts to the pre-introduction mode, the time-saving entry shielding effect is always executed unless a jackpot game is played during that time.

The execution time of the time-saving entry shielding performance (the time during which the performance symbol 701 is shielded) is fixed regardless of whether the variation time of the special symbol is long or short. For example, in the first special symbol variation after reaching the specified number of times, even if the reach effect is not performed and the normal loss effect is performed (when the loss variation pattern is selected), the reach effect is performed (the reach effect is Even if a variable pattern is selected, the execution time of the time-saving entry shield effect is fixed.

There are cases where the time-saving entry shielding effect is executed without going through the pre-introduction mode, and cases where the time-saving entry shielding effect is executed via the pre-introduction mode, and the time-saving entry shielding effect is executed in both cases. Time is different. That is, the execution time of the time-saving entry shielding effect differs depending on whether there is a jackpot history or not. Specifically, when the time-saving entry shielding effect is executed via the pre-introduction mode, the time-saving entry shielding effect is more effective than when the time-saving entry shielding effect is executed without going through the pre-introduction mode. The execution time of the occlusion effect is long.

In other embodiments, the execution time of the time-saving entry shielding performance may be shorter if the time-saving entry shielding performance is executed via the pre-introduction mode. In addition, whether the time-saving entry shielding effect is executed via the pre-introduction mode or the time-saving entry shielding effect is executed without going through the pre-introduction mode, the execution time of the time-saving entry shielding effect is It can be the same. In other embodiments, the execution time of the time-saving entry shielding effect may be variable according to the variation pattern. For example, in a jackpot variation pattern or a reach variation pattern, the execution time of the time-saving entry shielding performance may be long, and in the loss variation pattern, the execution time of the time-saving entry shielding performance may be short.

Further, while the time-saving entry shielding effect is being executed, the hold icon and the icon are hidden. Furthermore, the background image is also hidden.

Further, after the execution of the time-saving entry shielding performance, the display mode of the performance pattern 701 becomes different from before the execution of the shielding performance. For example, when the time-saving entry shielding effect is executed in the normal mode, before the time-saving entry shielding effect is executed, the normal mode effect pattern 701 including a character image and a number image is displayed, and the time-saving effect is displayed. After the entry shielding performance is executed, a time-saving performance pattern 701 including only numeric images is displayed. In addition, when the time-saving entry shielding effect is executed in the pre-introduction mode, before the time-saving entry shielding effect is executed, the effect pattern 701 of the pre-introduction mode consisting of a number image is displayed, and the time-saving effect is displayed. After the entry shielding effect is executed, a time saving mode effect pattern 701 is displayed.

Further, after the execution of the time-saving entry shielding effect, the hold icon and the icon are displayed, and the display mode thereof changes. Specifically, the hold icon and the shape of the icon change before and after the execution of the time-saving entry shielding effect. The color of the pending icon indicating the jackpot expectation level does not change before and after the execution of the time-saving shielding effect. Note that the color of the pending icon indicating the degree of jackpot expectation may change before and after the execution of the time-saving entry shielding effect. For example, the hold icon may be displayed in a color that suggests the degree of jackpot expectation before the time-saving shielding effect is executed, and may be displayed in a normal color after the time-saving shielding effect is executed. In addition, the pending icon is displayed in a color having a first expectation level (for example, blue) before the execution of the time-saving shielding effect, and after the execution of the time-saving shielding effect, it is displayed in a color with a higher expectation level than the first expectation level. It may be displayed in a color (for example, red) having an expectation level of 2.

Furthermore, after the time-saving entry shielding effect is executed, the background image changes. For example, a normal background image is displayed before the time-saving entry shielding performance is executed, and the time-saving background image is displayed after the time-saving entry shielding performance is performed.

That is, the performance mode is switched before and after the time-saving entry shielding performance is executed. Specifically, the mode is switched from the normal mode or the pre-introduction mode to the time saving mode B.

(Shielding effect before introduction)
The pre-introduction shielding performance is executed in the variation of the special symbol a predetermined number of times before the predetermined number of times after the jackpot game is played. Specifically, the pre-introduction shielding performance is executed at the 451st variation after the jackpot game is played.

The execution timing of the pre-introduction shielding effect is a fixed timing during the variation of the 451st special symbol. For example, the execution timing is during the start motion performance of the performance symbol 701 or during the variable display performance.

In other embodiments, the execution timing of the pre-introduction shielding effect may be when the fluctuation stops for a predetermined number of times. Further, the execution timing of the pre-introduction shielding effect may be variable according to the variation pattern.

In addition, a suggestive effect that suggests a pre-introduction shielding effect is not executed. Note that since the game number display image GC indicates the number of times the special symbol has changed since the gaming machine 1 was powered on, the player can grasp to some extent the timing at which the pre-introduction shielding effect is executed from the game number display image GC. be able to. However, since the game number display image GC is reset when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off, it does not accurately display the number of changes in the special symbols after the jackpot game is played. Therefore, it can be said that the game number display image GC does not actively (directly) suggest the pre-introduction shielding effect. Note that there may be a suggestive effect that suggests a pre-introduction shielding effect. The suggestion performance that suggests the pre-introduction shielding performance may be always executed a predetermined period before the pre-introduction shielding performance is executed, or may be executed with a predetermined probability.

The execution time of the pre-introduction shielding performance (the time during which the performance symbol 701 is shielded) is fixed regardless of whether the variation time of the special symbol is long or short. The execution time of the pre-introduction shielding effect is fixed whether a normal losing effect is performed without a reach effect or a reach effect is performed. Note that the execution time of the pre-introduction shielding effect may be variable according to the fluctuation pattern.

Further, while the pre-introduction shielding effect is being executed, the pending icon and the icon are hidden. Furthermore, the background image is also hidden.

Furthermore, after the pre-introduction shielding effect is executed, the display mode of the effect pattern 701 changes. Specifically, before the pre-introduction shielding effect is executed, a normal presentation pattern 701 including a character image and a number image is displayed, but after the pre-introduction shielding effect is executed, the pre-introduction pattern 701 containing only the number image is displayed. A mode effect pattern 701 is displayed.

Further, after the pre-introduction shielding effect is executed, while the hold icon is displayed, the icon is not displayed. After the pre-introduction shielding effect is executed, the display mode of the pending icon changes. Specifically, the shape of the hold icon changes before and after the pre-introduction shielding effect is executed. Note that the color of the pending icon indicating the jackpot expectation level does not change between before and after the pre-introduction shielding effect is executed. That is, the color of the pending icon indicating the degree of jackpot expectation is maintained before and after the pre-introduction shielding effect is executed. Note that the color of the pending icon indicating the degree of jackpot expectation may change before and after the pre-introduction shielding performance is performed.

Note that the icon may be displayed after the pre-introduction shielding effect is executed. In this case, the display mode (shape) of the icon may change.

Furthermore, after the pre-introduction shielding effect is executed, the background image changes. Specifically, a normal background image is displayed before the pre-introduction shielding effect is executed, and the pre-introduction background image is displayed after the pre-introduction shielding effect is executed.

That is, the presentation mode is switched before and after the pre-introduction shielding presentation is performed. Specifically, the normal mode is switched to the pre-installation mode.

(Occupation effect after reach)
The after-reach shielding performance is executed according to the variation pattern selected at the start of the special symbol variation, regardless of the number of variations of the special symbol. Specifically, the after-reach shielding effect is executed when the variation pattern corresponding to the SP ready-to-reach effect or the variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP ready-to-reach effect is selected.

The execution timing of the after-reach shielding performance is a variable timing from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, and is determined according to the fluctuation pattern. The execution timing of the after-reach shielding performance is the timing after the reach loss in the reach performance where the expectation of a relatively high jackpot is reached, and the timing after a relatively long time has elapsed since the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. On the other hand, the above-mentioned time-saving entry shielding performance is executed at a timing when a relatively short time has elapsed after the special symbols start changing. Moreover, the above-mentioned pre-introduction shielding performance is also executed at a timing when a relatively short time has passed after the special symbols start changing.

In addition, a suggestive effect that suggests a cover effect after reach is not executed. Note that in other embodiments, a suggestive effect that suggests a cover effect after reach may be performed. In this case, it is determined by lottery whether or not to execute a suggestive effect that suggests a cover effect after reach. Even if it is determined that the after-reach shielding effect will be executed, the suggesting effect is not necessarily executed. In this case, the rate at which the suggestive performance of the post-reach shielding performance is executed is relatively low, and is lower than the rate at which the pre-introduction mode suggesting the time-saving entry shielding performance is executed. Regarding the pre-introduction mode that suggests a time-saving entry shielding effect, its execution is not determined by lottery, but is always executed after a predetermined number of changes after the jackpot game. Note that there may be a suggestive effect that suggests a cover effect after reach. Even if a suggestive performance that suggests a post-reach shielding performance is executed, the post-reach shielding performance does not necessarily have to be executed afterwards, and there are times when the post-reach shielding performance is executed and times when it is not executed. Good too. When a suggestive performance that suggests a post-reach shielding performance is executed, the post-reach shielding performance may be more likely to be executed than when the suggestive performance is not performed.

The execution time of the after-reach shielding effect (the time during which the effect pattern 701 is covered) is fixed. The execution time of the after-reach shielding performance is shorter than the execution time of the time-saving entry shielding performance. Further, the execution time of the post-reach shielding effect is shorter than the execution time of the pre-introduction shielding effect. Note that the execution time of the after-reach shielding performance may be longer than the execution time of the time-saving entry shielding performance and/or the pre-introduction shielding performance. Furthermore, the execution time of the post-reach shielding effect may vary depending on the variation pattern. That is, the execution time of the after-reach shielding effect may be variable. In this case, the jackpot expectation level may vary depending on the length of execution time of the post-reach shielding effect.

Further, while the post-reach shielding effect is being executed, the hold icon and the icon are not displayed. Furthermore, the background image is also hidden.

After the execution of the after-reach shielding performance, the display mode of the performance pattern 701 changes from before the execution of the after-reach shielding performance. Specifically, before the execution of the after-reach shielding effect, a reach mode effect pattern 701 made up of number images is displayed, but after the execution of the reach-to-cover effect, the normal effect effect pattern 701 is displayed. Ru. In addition, when comparing before the reach is established and during the N reach performance and after the execution of the after-reach shielding performance, the display mode of the performance pattern 701 does not change before and after the execution of the after-reach shielding performance.

Furthermore, after the execution of the post-reach shielding effect, the hold icon and the icon are displayed. After the execution of the after-reach shielding effect, the hold icon and the display mode of the icon are the same as the hold icon and the display mode when the icon was displayed before the execution of the after-reach cover effect. That is, the hold icon and the shape of the icon after the execution of the reach-to-reach effect are the same as the hold icon and the shape of the icon before being hidden by the reach-to-reach effect.

The pending icon indicating the expectation level of a jackpot and the color of the icon are the same before being hidden by the reach effect and after the execution of the post-reach effect. Note that the pending icon that indicates the degree of expectation of a jackpot and the color of the icon may be different before being hidden by the reach effect and after the execution of the post-reach effect shielding effect. Furthermore, while the color of the pending icon is the same before it is hidden by the reach effect and after the execution of the post-reach effect, the color of the icon is the same before it is hidden by the reach effect. It may be different between the time and the time after execution of the post-reach shielding effect. In addition, the color of the pending icon may differ between before it is hidden by the reach effect and after the execution of the post-reach effect, while the color of the icon may be hidden by the reach effect. It may be the same before and after execution of the post-reach shielding effect.

Furthermore, the background image changes before and after the execution of the post-reach shield effect. Specifically, before the execution of the after-reach shielding effect, it is the reach background image, and after the execution of the after-reach shielding effect, it is the normal background image. Note that when comparing before the reach is established, during the N reach, and after the execution of the after-reach shielding effect, the background image does not change before and after the execution of the after-reach shielding effect.

Furthermore, the performance mode does not change before and after the execution of the post-reach shielding performance.

(Shielding effect during fluctuation)
Regarding the shielding performance during fluctuation, it is executed according to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, regardless of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. The shielding performance during fluctuation may be executed when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the reach performance is selected, when a loss fluctuation pattern is selected, or when a jackpot fluctuation pattern is selected. may be executed.

The execution timing of the shielding performance during fluctuation is a variable timing from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. That is, the shielding performance during fluctuation is sometimes executed at the first timing from the start of the variation of the special symbol, and sometimes executed at the second timing. The shielding performance during fluctuation is executed at a timing when a relatively short time has passed after the special symbols start changing, and is executed during the fluctuating display performance of the performance symbols 701. Note that the changing shielding effect may be executed during the start motion effect of the effect pattern 701.

In addition, a suggestive effect that suggests a shielding effect during the fluctuation is not executed. In addition, the shielding performance during fluctuation may be performed continuously over the fluctuation of a plurality of special symbols based on the result of the preliminary determination. In this case, the first fluctuating shielding performance can be said to be a performance that suggests the second fluctuating shielding performance that will be performed in the next special symbol fluctuation, but the second fluctuating shielding performance is directly It is not a production exclusively for suggesting things (positively). In other words, when the changing occluding effect is performed continuously over the variations of multiple special symbols, each changing occluding effect is itself an independent effect, and directly suggests the changing occluding effect in another variation. It's not a thing. Note that there may be a suggestive effect that suggests a shielding effect during fluctuation. Even if a suggestive effect that suggests a changing occluding effect is executed, the changing occluding effect does not necessarily have to be executed afterwards, and there are times when the changing occluding effect is executed and times when it is not executed. Good too. When a suggestive performance that suggests a changing shielding performance is performed, the fluctuating shielding performance may be more likely to be executed than when the suggestive performance is not performed.

Note that in the case where the changing shielding effect is executed, a suggestion effect that suggests the changing shielding effect may be executed. In this case, the rate at which the suggestion performance suggesting the shielding performance during fluctuation is executed is lower than the rate at which the suggestion performance suggesting the time-saving entry shielding performance (pre-introduction mode) is executed. That is, a suggestion performance that suggests a shielding performance during time-saving entry is more likely to be executed than a suggestion performance that suggests a shielding performance during fluctuation.

The execution time of the changing shielding effect (the time during which the effect pattern 701 is covered) is variable according to the changing pattern. For example, the execution time of the changing shield effect may vary between 1 second and 20 seconds. The expectation level of a jackpot may vary depending on the execution time of the variable shielding performance. That is, which one of the plurality of fluctuating shielding performances including the first fluctuating shielding performance having a first execution time and the second fluctuating shielding performance having a second execution time is selected based on the fluctuation pattern. Either one may be selected and executed. For example, the longer the execution time of the changing shield effect, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. Conversely, the longer the execution time of the changing shield effect, the lower the expectation level may be.

In addition, the execution time of the first fluctuating shielding performance is shorter than the execution time of the time-saving entry shielding performance, the pre-introduction shielding performance, and the post-reach shielding performance, and the execution time of the second fluctuating shielding performance is The execution time may be longer than the execution time of the entry shielding performance, the pre-introduction shielding performance, and the post-reach shielding performance. For example, by making the execution time of the first fluctuating occlusion effect (the display time of the fluctuating occlusion image) shorter than the execution time of the after-reach occlusion effect (the display time of the after-reach occlusion image), While you can momentarily raise your expectations, you can also raise your expectations when you lose the reach. In addition, by making the execution time of the second variable shielding performance longer than the execution time of the post-reach shielding performance, the fluctuating shielding performance can suddenly raise expectations and maintain those expectations for a certain amount of time. Also, if you lose the reach, you can momentarily raise your expectations.

Furthermore, the pending icon and the icon are displayed even while the changing shielding effect is being executed.

Further, the display mode of the effect pattern 701 is the same before and after the execution of the changing shield effect. Further, the display mode (shape) of the pending icon and the icon is the same before and after the execution of the changing shielding effect.

It should be noted that the pending icon indicating the expectation level of a jackpot and the color of the icon may be changeable while the changing shielding performance is being executed.

Moreover, the background image does not change before and after the execution of the changing shield effect. That is, the normal background image is maintained after execution of the changing shield effect. It should be noted that a normal background image may be displayed after the variable shielding effect is executed, and then a specific effect may develop and the background image may change to correspond to the specific effect.

Furthermore, the performance mode does not change before and after the execution of the variable shielding performance.

As described above, each shielding effect has different points and common points, such as the timing of occurrence, execution timing, presence or absence of suggestive effect, execution time, effect mode, changes to other images before and after execution, etc. The common point is that they all shield the performance pattern 701. Such a shielding effect that shields the effect pattern 701 is performed at various timings and at various opportunities, greatly increasing the feeling of elation at transitioning to an advantageous state, greatly increasing expectations, and reducing disappointment. By reducing this, it is possible to give a slight sense of expectation or surprise, and it is possible to improve the interest of the gaming machine as a whole.

Note that other shielding effects may be performed in addition to the effects described above. For example, based on the first preliminary determination process that is executed in response to winning in the first starting port 45, a zone performance (an example of a preliminary determination performance) that covers the variation of one or more special symbols is performed, and the zone performance When entering, a shielding effect may be performed to cover the effect pattern 701. After the shielding performance is performed, a background image dedicated to the zone performance is displayed, and a display indicating that the zone performance is being performed is also performed. Furthermore, a performance pattern 701 dedicated to zone performance may be displayed. Furthermore, when a hold icon or a performance in which the icon changes is executed, a performance may be performed in which the performance pattern, the hold icon, etc. are covered.

In the above embodiment, the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed after the time-saving entry shielding performance, but during the time-saving entry shielding performance, the special symbol (second special symbol) The variation and stop of the symbols may be performed multiple times. In this case, the variation and stoppage of the special symbol is notified by the variation and stoppage of the small symbol. In addition, if there is no jackpot history, the second special symbol will fluctuate and stop multiple times during the time-saving shielding performance, and if there is a jackpot history, one special symbol (first special symbol or second A time-saving entry shielding effect may be performed while the special symbol) is changing.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the time-saving entry shielding effect is executed in the first variation after reaching the specified number of times, but in the specified number of changes (the variation immediately before setting to the second time-saving game state) , the performance may be performed.

In addition, the time-saving entry shielding effect is executed from the predetermined number of fluctuations (the fluctuation immediately before being set to the second time-saving gaming state) to the first or multiple fluctuations after being set to the second time-saving gaming state. Good too. In other words, the time-saving entry shielding performance may be performed over the specified number of fluctuation end points.

Note that the performance control unit 130 executes the time-saving entry shielding performance in response to a command (variation start command) from the main control unit 100 in the first variation after reaching the specified number of times. If the performance control part 130 does not normally receive the fluctuation start command in the first fluctuation after reaching the specified number of times, the time-saving entry shielding performance is not performed and the state shifts to a second time-saving game state. For example, if a fluctuation start command related to the first fluctuation after reaching the specified number of times is not received, the first fluctuation will end without the time-saving entry shielding effect being performed, and the second (or third and subsequent) fluctuations will not be performed. When a fluctuation start command related to fluctuation is received, the time saving mode B may be shifted to without performing the shielding effect at the time of time saving entry.

(Lamp control after second time saving through)
Next, lamp control when the second time-saving game state shifts to the normal game state without a jackpot game being played will be explained.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of lamp control when the second time-saving game state is shifted to the normal game state without a jackpot game being played.

As shown in FIG. 34, when the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the normal gaming state is set. In this case, the lamp control by the lamp control unit 150 is in a normal mode according to the normal mode. In the normal mode of lamp control, the frame lighting device 10, the movable presentation device 73, the board lighting device 74, the presentation button light emitting LED 17c, etc. are controlled according to the execution status of the variable presentation while the special symbol is changing. For example, before the ready-to-win performance in the variable performance, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit light in a white manner that does not indicate the degree of expectation. During the ready-to-win performance in the variable performance, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit light in a manner that suggests the degree of expectation depending on the type of the ready-to-win performance. For example, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74 emit light in a reddish color or in a bluish color depending on the level of expectation during the reach effect. The light emitting color and the light emitting pattern of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 may change depending on the type of reach effect being executed (N reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect). In addition, at the time of jackpot notification (when the performance symbols 701 are aligned), the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74 emit light in a jackpot light emission pattern, and the movable performance device 73 is activated. Further, during a jackpot game, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit light in a jackpot light emission pattern. Further, during the above-mentioned after-reach shielding effect or during the variable shielding effect, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74 emit light in predetermined light emission patterns set respectively.

If the jackpot game is not performed after the RWM clear operation or the setting change operation, and the power is cut off at time t1 shown in FIG. 34, and then the power is restored, a recovery process is performed. Through this restoration process, the number of operations n is restored to the value before the power was cut off. During the restoration process, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are controlled in a restoration mode. For example, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are controlled to blink in a specific pattern indicating that the restoration process is in progress. When the recovery process is completed normally and the game becomes possible, the lamp control becomes the normal mode.

Thereafter, when the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is changed 500 times, the above-mentioned time-saving entry shielding effect is performed. During the time-saving entry shielding effect, etc., lamp control is performed in a specific manner. After that, a second time saving game state is set. During the second time-saving game state, lamp control is performed in a time-saving mode.

If the special symbol is changed by the set number of times in the second time-saving game state, the gaming machine 1 shifts to the normal game state. Along with this, the lamp control becomes the normal mode.

Thereafter, when the power is cut off at time t2 and the power is restored without a jackpot game being played, a recovery process is performed. During the recovery process, the lamp control is in the recovery mode described above. In this restoration process, the value of the number of operations n is restored to the state before the power was cut off (set to "0"). Further, the value of the second time-saving history flag indicating that the second time-saving game state has been executed is restored to the state before the power was cut off. Here, in the state before the power is turned off, the second time-saving game state has already been executed and the game has returned to the normal game state, so the second time-saving history flag is set to "ON".

When the recovery process is completed, the player is able to play, the game is played in the normal gaming state, and the production mode becomes the normal mode. However, the lamp control will go into a warning mode. Specifically, when the power is restored, the value of the number of operations n and the value of the second time saving history flag are transmitted from the main control unit 100 to the production control unit 130. Based on this, the lamp control unit 150 performs lamp control in a warning mode after the restoration process.

In the warning mode, for example, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit light in a special light emission pattern indicating that the second time saving has passed. For example, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 flash in red at a shorter cycle than in the normal mode. The lamp control in this warning mode continues, for example, until a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination and the jackpot symbol stops. Further, the lamp control in the warning mode may be continued until the jackpot game starts or ends. Further, the lamp control in the warning mode may be continued until the first time-saving game state is set after the jackpot game.

The lamp control in this warning mode is continuously performed both while the special symbol is stopped and while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. For example, the lamp control is performed in a warning mode even during the variation of the special symbol and during the reach effect in the variation effect. That is, the light emission pattern according to the lamp control in the warning mode is given priority over the light emission pattern according to the reach effect in the normal mode, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit light.

By performing the lamp control in the warning mode in this way, it is possible to notify the player and the clerk at the game parlor that the second time-saving game state has been skipped. Thereby, the store clerk can reset the gaming machine 1 (RWM clear) and put it into a state where the second time-saving gaming state can be generated. The second time-saving throughput does not occur frequently, but it does not occur due to fraud or malfunction of the gaming machine. For this reason, if the throughput of the second time reduction is announced using an image or sound, for example, there is a possibility that players and store staff may misunderstand that an abnormality has occurred, which may confuse the players and store staff. Therefore, in this embodiment, the lamp control unit 150 causes the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74 to emit light to notify that the second time saving period is through.

Note that when a specific effect is executed, lamp control according to the specific effect may be given priority over lamp control in the warning mode. For example, when a predetermined error is detected, lamp control according to the predetermined error may be given priority over lamp control in a warning mode. Predetermined errors include, for example, when an abnormal prize is detected (e.g., a prize is entered into the big prize opening when a jackpot game or a small prize game is not in progress), when a door is detected to be opened, when magnetism is detected, etc. may be generated. Note that the lamp control in the warning mode may be performed preferentially over the lamp control in response to detection of a predetermined error. Further, during execution of a specific ready-to-reach effect (for example, SP ready-to-reach effect or SPSP ready-to-reach effect), lamp control according to the specific ready-to-reach effect may be given priority over lamp control in a warning mode.

Further, the lamp control in the warning mode is not limited to controlling the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 to emit light in a special light emission pattern, but may also be control to cause a production button to emit light, or a control provided on the handle. The control may be such that the light emitting means that has been set is caused to emit light.

Further, the lamp control in the warning mode may be performed only for a predetermined period after the power is restored. For example, it may be performed until the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times. Further, the lamp control in the warning mode may be terminated depending on the elapsed time since power restoration.

(Third time-saving game state with time-saving symbols)
In the gaming machine according to the above embodiment, in the jackpot determination regarding the first special symbol or the second special symbol, either a jackpot, a small win, or a loss is determined. In the gaming machine according to the modified example, as a result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol, in addition to the jackpot, small hit, and loss, there may be a loss time saver (time saver symbol). Hereinafter, the loss time saving (time saving symbol) will be explained.

Specifically, the jackpot determination table used in jackpot determination includes random numbers that are determined to be a jackpot, random numbers that are determined to be a small hit, and random numbers that are determined to be a loss, as well as random values that are determined to be a loss. A random value will be provided. For example, when a jackpot determination is made regarding the first special symbol, it may be determined that the losing time is shortened with a probability of 1/500. If it is determined in the jackpot determination that the losing time is short, the time-saving symbol C, for example, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 after a predetermined variable time has elapsed.

Even if the time-saving symbol C stops, the jackpot game is not played. That is, the time saving symbol C indicates that the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. When the time saving symbols stop, the time saving game state is set. Here, the time-saving game state that is set in response to the stoppage of the time-saving symbols is referred to as a "third time-saving game state."

The third time-saving game state may be configured to have the same time-saving performance (normal symbol fluctuation time and second starting port 47 opening time) as the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state. That is, in the third time-saving gaming state, it may be a state in which it is easy to enter the second start opening 47, similar to the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state.

Further, the third time-saving game state may be configured to have a different time-saving performance from the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state. The third time-saving game state may be a state in which it is more difficult to win a prize at the second starting opening 47 than in the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state, or the winning at the second starting opening 47 is substantially difficult. It may be impossible to do so.

In addition, a plurality of time-saving symbols are prepared, and a transition may be made to a third time-saving game state having different time-saving performance (variation time of the normal symbol and opening time of the second starting port 47) depending on the time-saving symbol. Moreover, the number of times of time saving in the third time saving game state may be different depending on the time saving symbols.

Here, in the gaming machine according to the first modification, it is assumed that the third time-saving game state is a state in which it is more difficult to enter the second start opening 47 than in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state. . A gaming machine according to a first modification will be described below.

(First modification)
In the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, the variation time of the normal symbol is sufficiently short (for example, 1 second), and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when the normal symbol determination is determined to be a hit. is sufficiently long (for example, 5 seconds). Therefore, when the player hits right, the game ball easily enters the second starting port 47, and the game ball enters the second starting port 47 in a relatively short time.

On the other hand, in the first modification, in the third time-saving game state, the opening time of the second starting port 47 is only slightly longer than in the normal game state. For example, while the opening time of the second starting port 47 is "0.05 seconds" in the normal game state, it is set to "0.051 seconds" in the third time-saving game state. Alternatively, in the third time-saving game state, the variation time of the normal symbols may be slightly shorter than in the normal game state. For example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is "30 seconds" in the normal game state, but may be set to "29.5 seconds" in the third time-saving game state.

Therefore, in the third time-saving game state, it is slightly easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47 than in the normal game state, but it is not as easy as in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state. does not enter the second starting slot 47. The ease of winning a prize in the second start opening 47 in the third time-saving gaming state is substantially the same as in the normal gaming state. Here, the time-saving gaming state in which the ease of winning a prize in the second start opening 47 is substantially the same as the normal gaming state will be referred to as a "slight time-saving state."

In the gaming machine according to the first modification, a regular game gate is also provided in the left gaming area. In the slight time saving state, the game is played by left-handed hitting as in the normal gaming state. The same fluctuation pattern table is used in the slight time saving state and the normal gaming state.

In addition, in the normal game state, the opening time of the second starting port 47 is set to 0.05 seconds at a rate of 100% when a hit is determined in the normal symbol determination, and in the slight time saving state, the opening time of the second starting port 47 is set to 0.05 seconds. The opening time may be set to 0.05 seconds at a ratio of 499/500, and may be set to 3 seconds at a ratio of 1/500. Even in such a configuration, in the slight time saving game state, it is slightly easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47 than in the normal gaming state, but in the second time saving game state than in the first time saving game state and the second time saving game state. It is difficult to win a prize in the starting opening 47, and the ease of winning in the second starting opening 47 in the slight time saving state is substantially the same as in the normal gaming state. Note that when the opening time of the second starting port 47 is short (0.05 seconds), the right hit notification is not performed while the second starting port 47 is open, and the opening time of the second starting port 47 is long (3 seconds). second), the right-hand hit notification may be performed while the second starting port 47 is open.

Referring to FIG. 35, the game flow of the gaming machine according to the first modified example having the slight time saving state will be described. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of a game flow of the gaming machine according to the first modification.

As shown in FIG. 35, the gaming machine is initially set to a normal gaming state. In the normal game state, a jackpot determination regarding the first special symbol is performed, and a variable display of the first special symbol is performed. When a jackpot is determined in the normal game state, for example, the jackpot symbol A stops with a probability of 1/2, and after the jackpot game is performed, the game shifts to a first time-saving game state in which the number of time-savings is 5 times. Further, when a jackpot is determined in the normal game state, the jackpot symbol B stops with a probability of 1/2, and after the jackpot game is performed, the game shifts to a first time-saving game state in which the number of time-savings is 50 times. In the first time-saving game state, the variation time of the normal symbol is short (for example, 1 second), and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when a hit is determined is long (for example, 5 seconds), so the second starting port It becomes easier to win the game ball in 47.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination in the normal game state is a loss time saver, the time saver symbols stop and the game shifts to a third time saver game state (slight time saver state). The slight time saving state continues until the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 or 200 times). In addition, depending on the type of the time-saving symbol, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (time-saving frequency) in which the slight time-saving state continues may vary.

When the jackpot symbol A stops in the slight time saving state, after the jackpot game is played, the state shifts to the first time saving game state where the number of time saving times is 50. Further, when the jackpot symbol B stops in the slight time saving state, after the jackpot game is played, the state shifts to the first time saving game state where the number of time saving times is 100.

As described above, in the gaming machine according to the first modification, in addition to the normal gaming state and the first time-saving gaming state that is advantageous for the player who can easily win a prize in the second start opening 47, there is a slight time-saving state. be. In the slight time saving state and the normal gaming state, the ease with which the game ball enters the second starting port 47 is almost the same. However, in the slight time saving state and the normal game state, the number of time saving times set is different even when winning with the same jackpot symbol. Specifically, when winning a jackpot in a slight time-saving state, it is easier to set a larger number of time-savings than when winning a jackpot in a normal gaming state, and it is easier to shift to an advantageous state.

In the slight time saving state, almost the same performance as in the normal gaming state is performed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the current gaming state is a normal gaming state or a slight time saving state. Thereby, when the time-saving symbols stop, the appearance remains the same, but the game can be internally shifted to a slight time-saving state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the game can be made more interesting. Since the jackpot game is not performed even if the time-saving symbols stop, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the time-saving state has shifted to a slight time-saving state.

When the current gaming state is a slight time saving state, a production mode that suggests a slight time saving state may be set. Thereby, it is possible to suggest a slight time saving state, and it is possible to increase the expectations of the players. In addition, there is a production mode C1 that suggests that there is a possibility of a slight time saving state, a production mode C2 that suggests that the possibility of a slight time saving state is higher than production mode C1, and a production mode that notifies the confirmation of a slight time saving state. There may also be C3.

In the normal game state, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times, a transition is made to the second time-saving game state. When transitioning from the normal game state to the second time-saving game state, the above-mentioned time-saving entry shielding performance may be performed, and before that, a pre-introduction mode performance may be performed. In addition, even in the slight time-saving state, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times, the game shifts to the second time-saving game state. In this case as well, the above-described time-saving entry shielding performance may be performed, or the pre-introduction mode performance may be performed before that.

Here, if a jackpot is achieved in the slight time saving state, a larger number of time saving times is set than in the normal gaming state. In another embodiment, in a gaming machine that can change between a low probability state in which the probability of being judged as a jackpot is low and a high probability state in which the probability of being judged as a jackpot is high, It may be configured such that when a jackpot is achieved in the normal gaming state, it is easier to shift to a high probability state than when a jackpot is achieved in the normal gaming state. Further, in the slight time saving state, it may be configured so that it is easier for the player to win a jackpot in which the number of prize balls that can be acquired is larger when a jackpot is determined than in the normal gaming state. This makes it possible to make the slight time saving state more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state.

(Second modification)
Next, a gaming machine according to a second modified example using the above-mentioned slight time saving state will be explained. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of the game flow of the gaming machine according to the second modification.

As shown in FIG. 36, the gaming machine is initially set to a normal gaming state. When a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination in the normal game state, after the jackpot game is played, the game shifts to a rush state or a challenge mode that is advantageous for the player. For example, if it is determined that it is a jackpot in the normal gaming state, there is a 1/3 probability that jackpot symbol A will stop and move to challenge mode, and a 1/3 probability that jackpot symbol B will stop and shift to challenge mode. , the jackpot symbol C stops and shifts to a rush state with the remaining 1/3 probability.

The challenge mode is a first time-saving game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting slot, and for example, five times is set as the number of time-savings. Further, the rush state is a first time-saving game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second start opening, and for example, 50 or 100 times is set as the number of time-savings. In the challenge mode or rush state, the game is played by hitting right, and a jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol is performed. When the game shifts to the rush state, the next jackpot will occur with a probability of, for example, 80%, and after the jackpot game, the game always shifts to the rush state (or at a high rate).

When the special symbol is changed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times) in the rush state, the rush state ends and the state shifts to a short time saving state. Further, when the special symbol is changed five times in the challenge mode, the challenge mode ends and shifts to a slight time saving state.

In the slight time saving state, the game is played by left-handed hitting as in the normal gaming state, and the first special symbol changes in accordance with the landing of the game ball in the first starting hole 45. If a jackpot is achieved in the short time saving state, the probability of transitioning to the rush state is higher than in the normal gaming state.

Specifically, in the slight time saving state, if there is a jackpot, there is a 1/3 chance that the jackpot symbol A will stop and move to challenge mode, and a 1/3 probability that the jackpot symbol B will stop and enter a rush state. Then, with the remaining 1/3 probability, the jackpot symbol C stops and shifts to a rush state. That is, in the normal game state, when the jackpot symbol B stops, the time saving number is set to 5 times, but in the slight time saving state, when the jackpot symbol B stops, the time saving number is set to, for example, 100 times. As a result, in the slight time saving state, the probability of transitioning to the rush state when a jackpot is achieved is higher than in the normal gaming state.

More specifically, in the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol, if it is determined to be a loss, the time saving symbol is configured to stop with a predetermined probability. The predetermined probability is here 100%. In addition, multiple time-saving symbols are prepared. For example, a time-saving symbol C1 and a time-saving symbol C2 are prepared.

In the first time-saving game state, when a loss is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol, the time-saving symbol C1 or C2 stops, but the state does not shift to a slight time-saving state in response to the stop of the time-saving symbol. That is, the first time-saving game state has priority over the slight time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) corresponding to the stop of the time-saving symbol. If the time saving symbol stops in the first time saving game state, the remaining time saving number in the first time saving game state is subtracted by 1, and if the remaining time saving number is 1 or more, the first time saving gaming state is continued. .

When the final variation in the rush state or challenge mode ends, the remaining time saving number becomes "0", the first time saving game state ends, and the game shifts to the normal game state. If the second special symbol is on hold at the time this final variation ends, the second special symbol on hold is made to fluctuate in the normal gaming state. In the normal game state, when the time saving symbols stop, the game shifts to a slight time saving state. For example, when the time saving symbol C1 stops, the state shifts to a slight time saving state where the number of time savings is 15, and when the time saving symbol C2 stops, the state shifts to a slight time saving state where the number of time savings is 30. Therefore, if the second special symbol is pending at the end of the final variation in the rush state or challenge mode, if the second special symbol related to the first pending is determined to be a loss, the corresponding When the variation of the second special symbol is finished, the state is sure to shift to a slight time saving state.

In this way, when the rush state ends, the game shifts to a slight time saving state where the probability of shifting to the rush state upon winning a jackpot is higher than in the normal gaming state. Thereby, even if the rush state ends, the game can be played in a state advantageous to the player for a predetermined period (until it changes 15 or 30 times).

In the slight time saving state, the same performance as in the normal gaming state may be performed. Furthermore, in the slight time saving state, a performance may be performed in a specific performance mode that suggests that the state is advantageous to the player.

With the above configuration, in the second modification, it is possible to always shift to the slight time saving state after the end of the rush state, and it is possible to make the predetermined period after the end of the rush state an advantageous state for the player. . This can improve interest. In addition, if it is determined that the second special symbol is a loss in the jackpot determination, the time saving symbol may be configured to stop with a predetermined probability lower than 100%.

(Third modification)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38, a gaming machine according to a third modification using the above-described slight time saving state will be described. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of the game flow of the gaming machine according to the third modification.

As shown in FIG. 37, the gaming machine is initially set to the normal gaming state. In determining a jackpot in the normal gaming state, the probability of determining a jackpot is, for example, 1/319. When a jackpot is determined, after the jackpot game is played, the game shifts to a rush state that is advantageous for the player. For example, when the jackpot symbol A stops, the game shifts to the first rush state after the jackpot game, and when the jackpot symbol B stops, the game shifts to the second rush state after the jackpot game.

The second rush state is a first time-saving game state in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 47, and the number of time-saving times is set to, for example, 25 times.

The first rush state is the most advantageous state for the player, and is a first time-saving game state in which the number of time-savings is set to, for example, 200 times. When the game shifts to the rush state (the first rush state or the second rush state), the probability of the next jackpot is, for example, 80%, and the game always shifts to the rush state after the jackpot game.

The condition for transitioning from the normal gaming state to the rush state is that it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination regarding the first special symbol (the jackpot symbol stops). Therefore, the probability of transitioning from the normal gaming state to the rush state is 1/319. In the jackpot determination, if it is determined to be a jackpot, the jackpot is notified by a pattern alignment in which three performance symbols 701 are aligned in a fluctuating performance using a fluctuating performance pattern 701 of the special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the losing time is shortened in the jackpot determination regarding the first special symbol in the normal game state and the time-saving symbols are stopped, the game shifts to a third time-saving game state (slightly time-saving state) without going through the jackpot game. Even if the time-saving symbols stop in the normal game state, the game does not shift to the rush state. Specifically, in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol, a plurality of time-saving symbols C1 and C2 are prepared which are special symbols indicating a loss and which shift to the third time-saving gaming state.

For example, in the normal game state, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the time-saving symbol C1 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60, the state shifts to a slight time-saving state where the number of time-savings is 20 times. Further, in the normal game state, when the time saving symbol C2 is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to a slight time saving state where the number of time saving times is 1000. In the jackpot determination regarding the first special symbol, the probability that the time saving symbol C1 or C2 is selected as the stop symbol may be, for example, 1/530 or 1/300.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the setting of the third time-saving game state according to the time-saving symbol in the gaming machine according to the third modification. As shown in FIG. 38, when the time-saving symbol C1 stops in the normal gaming state, the first time-saving performance (normal symbol fluctuation time = 29.5 seconds, opening time of the second starting port 47 = 0.051 seconds) ) is set, and the number of times is set to 20. In addition, when the time saving symbol C1 stops in the normal gaming state, a third time saving symbol having the first time saving performance (normal symbol fluctuation time = 29.5 seconds, opening time of the second starting port 47 = 0.051 seconds) A gaming state (slight time saving state) is set, and the number of time saving times is set to 1000 times. In the slight time saving state, it is difficult or virtually impossible for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47, and the game is played by hitting left-handed.

As shown in FIG. 37, even if it is determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination in the slight time saving state, if the time saving symbol C3 or C4 stops, the game ball shifts to the rush state where it is easy to enter the second starting hole 47. do. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38, when the time-saving symbol C3 or C4 stops in the slight time-saving state, the second time-saving performance (normal symbol fluctuation time = 1 second, opening time of the second starting port 47) = 5 seconds) is newly set. Further, even when either of the time saving symbols C3 and C4 stops in the slight time saving state, 200 times is set as the number of time saving times. In addition, when the time saving symbol C3 stops during the slight time saving state, 20 times may be set as the number of time saving times, and when the time saving symbol C4 stops during the slight time saving state, 200 times may be set as the number of time saving times.

In addition, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot in the jackpot determination regarding the first special symbol in the slight time saving state, after the jackpot game is performed, the state shifts to the rush state. Even if either jackpot symbol A or B stops in the slight time saving state, 200 times is set as the number of time saving times.

In the slight time saving state, the conditions for shifting to the rush state are either a jackpot in the jackpot determination or the time saving symbol C3 or C4 stopping. The probability of transitioning from the slight time saving state to the rush state is the sum of the probability that the jackpot symbol stops (1/319) and the probability that the time saving symbol C3 or C4 stops (1/530). Therefore, the total probability of transition from the short time saving state to the rush state is approximately 1/199.

In addition, in the slight time-saving state, in the variation of the special symbol in which the time-saving symbol stops, a performance is performed in which three performance symbols 701 are aligned, and a performance as if a jackpot has been achieved is performed.

On the other hand, when the time-saving symbol C3 or C4 stops in the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 38, although the time-saving performance does not change compared to when the time-saving symbol C3 or C4 stops during the slight time-saving state, When the time saving number is set to 1 and the special symbol is changed once, the game returns to the normal gaming state. That is, if the time saving symbol C3 or C4 stops in the normal game state, the game does not shift to the rush state. In addition, when the time saving symbol C3 or C4 stops in the normal game state, the number of time saving times may be set to 0 times. In this case, even if the time-saving symbols C3 or C4 stop, the game does not shift to the time-saving gaming state and remains in the normal gaming state. That is, when the time-saving symbol C3 or C4 stops in the normal gaming state, the transition to the time-saving gaming state corresponding to the time-saving symbol C3 or C4 does not need to be performed.

Therefore, in the normal gaming state, unless a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, there is no transition to the rush state.

In this way, the slight time saving state is an advantageous state in which the probability of transitioning to the rush state is higher than in the normal gaming state. In the slight time saving state, when the time saving symbols C3 or C4 stop, a performance as if a jackpot has been won by matching the symbols is performed, so that the jackpot probability can be made to appear higher than in the normal game state. This makes it possible to satisfy the players. In addition, in the slight time saving state, when the jackpot symbol or the time saving symbol C3 or C4 stops, the state always shifts to the first rush state. For this reason, it is possible to increase the expectations of the players in the slight time saving state.

When the time saving symbol C1 or C2 stops in the rush state, the state shifts to a slight time saving state. In addition, when the time-saving symbol C1 or C2 stops in the rush state, the time-saving game state according to the time-saving symbol C1 or C2 is not set, and the rush state may continue.

Moreover, when the time saving symbol C1 or C2 stops in the slight time saving state, the slight time saving state may be newly set according to the stopped time saving symbol C1 or C2. For example, if the time saving symbol C1 stops during the slight time saving state, a new number of 20 time saving times may be given and the state may shift to the slight time saving state.

In addition, when the time saving symbol C1 or C2 stops in the slight time saving state, a new slight time saving state according to the stopped time saving symbol C1 or C2 does not need to be set. In this case, when the time-saving symbol C1 or C2 stops, the number of time-savings is subtracted by 1, and if the number of time-savings after the subtraction is 1 or more, the slight time-saving state is continued.

In the slight time saving state, the game is played with the left hand as in the normal gaming state. The slight time saving state may be set to the same production mode as the normal gaming state, and may be configured such that it is difficult for the player to distinguish it from the normal gaming state. Further, in the short time saving state, a production mode different from the normal gaming state may be set. For example, in a slight time-saving state, the game may shift to a production mode that suggests a slight time-saving state, and notify that the state is more likely to result in a jackpot than in the normal gaming state. In addition, in the slight time saving state, an effect may be performed in a presentation mode that suggests that there is a high possibility of being in the slight time saving state.

Also, in the gaming machine according to the third modification, when the special symbols are changed a specified number of times, the game may shift to a second time-saving gaming state in which it is easy to enter the second start opening 47. Specifically, if the special symbol changes a specified number of times after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed, or after the jackpot game is performed, the second Shift to time-saving gaming state. In such a gaming machine as well, the above-mentioned time-saving entry shielding effect may be performed when transitioning to the second time-saving game state.

(Fourth modification)
Next, a gaming machine according to a fourth modification using the above-mentioned slight time saving state will be explained. In the fourth modification, the normal gaming state is more advantageous than the slight time saving state. The fourth modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of the game flow of the gaming machine according to the fourth modification.

In the fourth modification, the game flow is basically the same as in the third modification, except that the advantageous conditions are opposite to those in the third modification.

As shown in FIG. 39, when the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed, or when the rush state ends, the game shifts to the normal gaming state. This normal gaming state is more advantageous than the slight time saving state.

Specifically, in the normal gaming state, when the time-saving symbol C0 stops with a probability of 1/530, the second time-saving performance (normal symbol fluctuation time = 1 second) makes it easy to enter the second start opening 47. , the opening time of the second starting port 47 = 5 seconds). Further, the number of time saving times is set to, for example, 200 times. That is, when the time saving symbol C0 stops in the normal game state, the game shifts to the first rush state. In addition, in the normal game state, for example, if there is a jackpot with a probability of 1/319, after the jackpot game, the second time saving performance (normal symbol fluctuation time = 1 second, second starting port 47 opening time = 5 200 times is set as the number of time savings. That is, when the jackpot symbols stop in the normal gaming state, the game shifts to the first rush state. It should be noted that when the time saving symbol C0 stops in the normal game state, the game may shift to a second rush state in which the time saving number is 25 times. Further, when the jackpot symbols stop in the normal game state, a transition may be made to a second rush state.

Thus, in the fourth modification, in the normal game state, when the jackpot symbol stops or the time saving symbol C0 stops, the game shifts to the rush state. The probability of transitioning from the normal gaming state to the rush state is approximately 1/199.

On the other hand, in the normal game state, any of the time-saving symbols C1 to C3 stops with a predetermined probability. When the time saving symbols C1 to C3 stop, the state shifts to a slight time saving state. Specifically, when the time saving symbol C1 stops, the time saving pattern changes to a slight time saving state of 100 time saving times, when the time saving symbol C2 stops, it moves to a slight time saving state of 200 time saving times, and when the time saving pattern C3 stops, the time saving number of times increases to 300 times. Shifts to a slightly shorter time state.

In the slight time saving state, the time saving symbol C0, which causes a transition to the rush state in the normal gaming state, is invalidated. Specifically, even if the time saving symbol C0 stops in the slight time saving state, it does not shift to the rush state. For example, when the time-saving symbol C0 stops in the slight time-saving state, the third time-saving game state based on the newly stopped time-saving symbol C0 is not set. When the time saving symbol C0 stops in the slight time saving state, the remaining time saving number in the slight time saving state is subtracted by 1, and if the remaining time saving number after the subtraction is 1 or more, the slight time saving state continues. The same applies even if the time saving symbols C1 to C3 stop in the slight time saving state, and the third time saving game state based on the newly stopped time saving symbols is not set. It should be noted that the time saving symbols may not stop in the slight time saving state.

In the slight time saving state, if there is a jackpot with a probability of 1/319, the second time saving performance (normal symbol fluctuation time = 1 second, opening time of the second starting port 47 = 5 seconds) is obtained after the jackpot game. Shift to the first time-saving game state. In this case, the time saving number is set to 25 or 200 depending on the jackpot symbol.

In this manner, in the fourth modification, the time saving symbol is invalidated in the slight time saving state, so the probability of transitioning from the slight time saving state to the rush state is 1/319, which is the same as the jackpot probability.

As described above, in the fourth modification, the normal gaming state is an advantageous state in which it is easy to shift to the rush state. In this advantageous state, a specific mode of performance is performed to indicate that the player is in an advantageous state. On the other hand, the slight time saving state is not an advantageous state, and the production mode is set to the normal mode. For example, by increasing the probability that the time-saving symbols C1 to C3 will stop in the normal game state, the period during which the time-saving symbols C1 to C3 stay in the slight time-saving state is lengthened. For example, in the normal game state, when the special symbols other than the jackpot symbol or the time-saving symbol C0 stop, the time-saving symbols C1 to C3 are made to stop. As a result, the player usually plays the game in a slightly time-saving state (normal mode).

The period of the slight time saving state (normal mode) is determined according to the time saving symbols C1 to C3 stopped in the advantageous state (specific mode). In the slight time saving state (normal mode), when the special symbols are changed a number of times according to the time saving symbols C1 to C3, the state shifts to an advantageous state (specific mode). Thereby, it is possible to periodically shift to an advantageous state (specific mode).

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of mode transition according to the number of changes in the special symbol in the fourth modification.

As shown in FIG. 40, when an RWM clear operation or a setting change operation is performed, or when a rush state ends, a specific mode (advantageous state) is initially set. This specific mode is the normal gaming state as described above. If the special symbol changes in a specific mode (advantageous state) and the jackpot symbol or time-saving symbol C0 does not stop, any of the time-saving symbols C1 to C3 will stop.

For example, when the time saving symbol C1 stops, a transition is made to a slight time saving state (normal mode) in which the number of time saving times is set to 100 times. When the special symbol changes 100 times in the normal mode, the game shifts to a normal gaming state and then shifts to a specific mode (advantageous state). As a result, when the special symbol changes 100 times in the normal mode, a jackpot determination is performed in an advantageous state. As long as the time-saving symbol C1 stops in the specific mode, it shifts to an advantageous state (specific mode) every 100 times.

Also, by selecting one of the time-saving symbols C1 to C3 with a predetermined probability in the specific mode, for example, the transition to the specific mode will occur with a 10% probability on the 100th change after transitioning to the normal mode. , at the 200th variation, the mode shifts to the specific mode with a probability of 10%, and at the 300th variation, the mode shifts to the specific mode with a probability of 100%.

In this way, in the fourth modification, there is a possibility that the game will periodically shift to an advantageous state, and the player can be made to look forward to it on a regular basis. Further, in the fourth modification, by providing a second time-saving game state, the game may be further shifted to the second time-saving game state when the prescribed number of times is reached. For example, assume that 600 times is set as the specified number of times. In this case, as shown in FIG. 40, there is a possibility that the mode will shift to the specific mode every 100 times, and the mode will definitely shift to the specific mode at the 300th time. Even if the game does not shift to the rush state in the specific mode, it always shifts to the second time-saving game state after 600 variations. Also in such a gaming machine, when shifting to the second time-saving game state, the above-mentioned time-saving entry shielding effect may be performed.

In the fourth modification, the normal gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the slight time saving state. As another example of making such a normal gaming state advantageous for the player, a fifth modification example as shown below can be considered.

For example, in the fifth modification, there are a normal gaming state and a high probability state where the jackpot probability is higher than the normal gaming state. For example, the jackpot probability in the normal gaming state is 1/30, and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is set to a value that looks almost the same to the player (for example, 1/29), although it is slightly higher than the normal gaming state. Ru. The high probability state includes a high probability time saving state in which a time saving gaming state is set, and a high probability non time saving state (sometimes referred to as latent probability variation) in which a time saving gaming state is not set. In the high probability state, the high probability state is maintained until, for example, 10 jackpot games are played, and when the 10 jackpot games are played, the state shifts to the normal game state. If it is determined that there is a jackpot in the normal game state, after the jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability non-time saving state (latent probability variable) with a probability of 2/3, for example. In the high-accuracy non-time-saving state, it is difficult or impossible to win a prize in the second starting opening 47, and a jackpot determination is performed based on winning in the first starting opening 45. Even if it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination based on the winning in the first starting opening 45, the time during which the jackpot is opened in the jackpot game is short (for example, 0.1 seconds), and the game ball almost always hits the jackpot in the jackpot. do not. Therefore, even if the player shifts to the high-probability non-time-saving state, he or she hardly gets any prize balls, and continues playing the game in the high-probability non-time-saving state until ten jackpot games are played. On the other hand, in the normal game state, if a jackpot is determined, after the jackpot game, the game shifts to the high-accuracy time-saving state with a probability of 1/3. In the high accuracy time saving state, the game ball is likely to enter the second starting port 47, and the game is played by hitting the ball to the right. If it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination based on the winning in the second starting opening 47, the jackpot will be opened for a long time (for example, 29.5 seconds at most) in the jackpot game, and the jackpot will be opened for a long time (for example, 29.5 seconds at the maximum) becomes easier. Therefore, the player can win many prize balls. In this way, if it is determined to be a jackpot in the normal gaming state, the game will move to an advantageous state with a probability of 1/3, but in the high-precision, non-time-saving state, even if it is determined to be a jackpot, the state will be changed to an advantageous state. Does not migrate. Therefore, it can be said that the normal gaming state is more advantageous than the high-precision, non-time-saving state.

As described above, in the first to fourth variations, the time saving symbol is used to shift to the slight time saving state, and the game can be played in the slight time saving state with an advantage different from that in the normal gaming state. A highly interesting game can be realized.

In addition, in a gaming machine having a first time-saving game state that is set after the jackpot game, a second time-saving game state that is set after the specified number of times has changed, and a third time-saving game state that is set according to the stop of the time-saving symbol, When an event that shifts to each time-saving gaming state occurs during each gaming state, the following control may be performed. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of control of the gaming state when an activation trigger for each time-saving gaming state occurs during each gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 41, for example, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, if a jackpot game that triggers the activation of the first time saving gaming state (referred to as "first time saving") is performed, Move to 1 hour shorter. If a jackpot game is performed during the first time saving game state, the second time saving game state (denoted as "second time saving"), or the third time saving game state (denoted as "third time saving"), the first time saving game Move to a shorter time frame.

Further, in a case where the game has a low probability state and a high probability state, if a jackpot game is performed with a jackpot being determined during the high probability state, the process shifts to the first time saving mode. In addition, the second time reduction cannot be operated during high probability. That is, during the high probability state, the number of operations n is not updated, and the fluctuation of the special symbol during the low probability state does not reach the specified number of times, so the second time saving operation opportunity does not occur. Therefore, the second time reduction cannot be operated during high probability. Further, during high probability, the third time reduction is also configured to be inoperable. That is, during high probability, the time-saving symbols do not stop, or even if the time-saving symbols stop, the transition to the third time-saving game state is suppressed.

Furthermore, when the number of changes in the special symbol reaches a specified number of times during the third time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state may be entered. That is, the second time saving game state is prioritized over the third time saving game state, and if an activation trigger for the second time saving occurs during the third time saving, it may be switched to the second time saving.

In addition, when shifting from the third time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state, the above-mentioned time-saving entry shielding effect may be performed. For example, when transitioning from the third time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state, from a state where the normal background image and the effect pattern 701 in the normal mode are displayed, the shielding image 710 appears and the normal background image and the effect pattern 701 are displayed. It is hidden from the production pattern 701. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a time-saving background image and a time-saving mode effect pattern 701 appear.

In addition, the time-saving entry shielding performance when transitioning from the third time-saving gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state and the time-saving entry shielding performance when transitioning from the normal gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state have different production modes. May be different. For example, when transitioning from the third time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state, from a state in which a dedicated background image and a dedicated effect pattern 701 suggesting the third time-saving game state are displayed, the shielding image 710 may appear and the dedicated background image and effect pattern 701 may be hidden. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the time-saving background image and the production pattern 701 of the time-saving mode may appear. Furthermore, different shielding images 710 may be used when transitioning from the third time-saving gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state and when shifting from the normal gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state.

Also, when shifting from the third time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state, the pre-introduction mode is set before the predetermined number of times. In addition, when transitioning from the third time saving game state to the second time saving game state, the pre-introduction mode may not be set, and the third time saving game state may be transferred to the second time saving game state.

In addition, when shifting from the third time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state, the above-mentioned time-saving entry shielding effect may not be performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, when the time-saving symbols stop during the third time-saving game state, a third time-saving game state may be newly set according to the stopped time-saving symbols. That is, when a new third time reduction operation trigger occurs during the third time reduction, switching to a new third time reduction may be performed. In this case, the time saving number is newly set according to the stopped time saving symbol. For example, if the special symbol changes 10 times after the first time-saving symbol for which "20 times" is set as the number of time-savings stops and shifts to the third time-saving game state, the remaining number of time-savers is " 10 times. At this time, when the second time-saving symbol in which "50 times" is set as the number of time-savings stops, "50" is set as the number of time-savings, and a third time-saving game state is newly set.

Further, when the time-saving symbols stop during the third time-saving game state, a new third time-saving game state corresponding to the stopped time-saving symbols is not set, and the current third time-saving game state may be continued. That is, when a new third time reduction trigger occurs during the third time reduction, the new third time reduction may not be activated. For example, if the special symbol changes 10 times after the first time-saving symbol for which "20 times" is set as the number of time-savings stops and shifts to the third time-saving game state, the remaining number of time-savers is " 10 times. At this time, when the second time saving symbol in which "50 times" is set as the number of time saving times stops, the remaining number of time saving times is subtracted by "1" and becomes "9 times".

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 41, if the time saving symbol stops during the second time saving gaming state, the third time saving gaming state corresponding to the stopped time saving symbol is not set and the second time saving gaming state continues. be done. That is, the second time reduction is prioritized over the third time reduction, and even if an activation opportunity for the third time reduction occurs during the second time reduction, the third time reduction is not activated. In addition, when the activation trigger of the 3rd time reduction occurs during the 2nd time reduction, you may operate the 3rd time reduction.

Also, in any of the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state, if it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination, or if it is determined to be a small hit and the jackpot game is If the game is played, the first time-saving game state is set after the jackpot game.

Furthermore, when the first time-saving game state is set, a value greater than or equal to a specified number of times may be set as the number of time-savings. In this case, during the first time-saving game state, the number of changes in the special symbol may reach the specified number of times. If the predetermined number of times is reached during the first time-saving game state, a transition may be made to the second time-saving game state. That is, when an activation trigger for the second time reduction occurs during the first time reduction, the operation may be switched to the second time reduction. In this case, the number of time saving times is newly set according to the second time saving game state. In this case as well, the above-described time-saving entry shielding effect is performed. When shifting from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state, a time-saving entry shielding effect is performed without going through the pre-introduction mode. Specifically, when transitioning from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state, from a state in which the time-saving background image and the time-saving mode effect pattern 701 are displayed, the shielding image 710 appears and the time-saving game state is changed to the second time-saving game state. The background image and the effect pattern 701 are occluded. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the time-saving background image and the production pattern 701 of the time-saving mode reappear.

In addition, when shifting to the second time-saving game state during the first time-saving game state, the above-mentioned time-saving entry shielding effect does not need to be executed.

Further, when the time saving symbols stop during the first time saving game state, a third time saving game state may be set according to the stopped time saving symbols. That is, when an activation trigger for the third time reduction occurs during the first time reduction, it may be switched to the third time reduction. In this case, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the number of time saving times are newly set according to the stopped time saving symbol.

Further, when the time saving symbol stops during the first time saving game state, the third time saving game state corresponding to the stopped time saving symbol may not be set, and the first time saving gaming state may be continued. That is, when an activation opportunity for the third time reduction occurs during the first time reduction, the third time reduction may not be activated. If the time saving symbol stops during the first time saving game state, the remaining time saving number in the first time saving game state is subtracted by "1", and if the remaining time saving number after the subtraction is 1 or more, the first time saving game state will continue.

In addition, when an activation trigger for another time saving occurs during a certain time saving, the current time saving and the new time saving may be overlapped. That is, when an opportunity to activate another time saver occurs during a certain time saver, the current time saver and the new time saver may be activated at the same time. For example, a first time reduction flag indicating that the first time reduction is in progress, a second time reduction flag indicating that the second time reduction is in progress, and a third time reduction flag indicating that the third time reduction is in progress are prepared. If a third time saving activation trigger occurs while the flag is ON, the third time saving flag may be turned ON while the first time saving flag is kept ON. In this case, the first time reduction and the third time reduction operate simultaneously, and the respective number of time reductions is subtracted each time the special symbol changes. Further, when the first time saving flag is ON, when a second time saving activation trigger occurs, the second time saving flag may be turned ON while the first time saving flag is kept ON. Further, for example, when the third time saving flag is ON, when a second time saving activation trigger occurs, the second time saving flag may be turned ON while the third time saving flag is kept ON.

For example, if the time-saving symbol that causes the third time-saving gaming state stops during the first time-saving gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state is continued, and after the first time-saving gaming state ends, the time-saving symbol A third time-saving game state may be generated in response to the stoppage of the game. Further, when the second time-saving game state is generated during the first time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state may be continued, and the second time-saving game state may be generated after the first time-saving game state ends. Further, when the second time-saving game state is generated during the third time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state may be continued, and the second time-saving game state may be generated after the third time-saving game state ends. In addition, if the time-saving symbol Cx that causes a new third time-saving game state B to occur during the third time-saving game state A stops, the third time-saving game state A is continued, and the third time-saving game state A ends. Later, a third time-saving game state B may be generated in response to the stop of the time-saving symbol Cx. In addition, if the time-saving symbol that causes the third time-saving game state to stop during the second time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state is continued, and after the second time-saving game state ends, the time-saving symbol concerned stops. A third time-saving gaming state may be generated in accordance with the above.

(Switching of variable pattern table depending on stopped symbols and game status)
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the normal gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state, and the third time-saving gaming state are set, fluctuations according to each gaming state are performed. A pattern table is set. In addition, when a jackpot game is played, a variation pattern table (variation pattern group) for determining the subsequent variation pattern of special symbols according to the jackpot symbol is created according to the number of variations of the special symbol after the jackpot game. Can be switched. Depending on the combination of the stopped symbols and the gaming state, the variable pattern table may be set as follows.

For example, in a gaming machine that can change between a low probability state in which the probability of a jackpot being determined is low and a high probability state in which the probability of being judged as a jackpot is high, the machine stops in the low probability state. The first fluctuation pattern table may be set according to the type of jackpot symbol, and the second fluctuation pattern table may be set according to the type of jackpot symbol that stopped in a high probability state. Further, a third fluctuation pattern table is set according to the type of the small winning symbol that stopped in the low probability state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern table is set according to the type of the small winning symbol that stopped in the high probability state. Good too. Using each set variation pattern table, a variation pattern is determined based on the number of variations of the special symbol after the jackpot game and the result of the jackpot determination.

Further, with the setting of the second time-saving gaming state as an opportunity, a dedicated variable pattern table different from the variable pattern table corresponding to the first time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state may be set.

Furthermore, a different variable pattern table may be set as the variable pattern table during the second time saving gaming state depending on the gaming state when the second time saving gaming state is set. For example, if the normal gaming state is set when the second time-saving gaming state is set, the first variable pattern table is set during the second time-saving gaming state, and when the second time-saving gaming state is set, the first variable pattern table is set. When in the gaming state, the second fluctuation pattern table may be set during the second time saving gaming state.

Furthermore, with the setting of the second time-saving gaming state as an opportunity, a variation pattern table may be set according to the number of variations of the special symbol from the setting. Further, depending on the gaming state when the second time saving gaming state is set, a variation pattern table may be set according to the number of variations of the special symbol from the setting. For example, when the second time-saving game state is set in the normal game state, the first fluctuation pattern table is set when the number of fluctuations from the setting of the second time-saving game state is between 1 and 100. , from the 101st time onwards, the second fluctuation pattern table is set, and if the time saving gaming state is set when the second time saving gaming state is set, the number of fluctuations from the setting of the second time saving gaming state is 1 to 100. The third variation pattern table may be set during the 101st cycle, and the fourth variation pattern table may be set after the 101st cycle.

Further, with the setting of the third time-saving gaming state as an opportunity, a dedicated variable pattern table different from the variable pattern table corresponding to the first time-saving gaming state or the second time-saving gaming state may be set.

Furthermore, different fluctuation pattern tables may be set depending on the time-saving symbols that will set the third time-saving gaming state.

Furthermore, a different variable pattern table may be set as the variable pattern table during the third time-saving gaming state depending on the time-saving symbol and the gaming state. For example, if the time-saving symbol C1 stops during the normal gaming state, the first variation pattern table is set, and if the time-saving symbol C2 stops during the normal gaming state, the second variation pattern table is set. If the time-saving symbol C1 stops during the time-saving gaming state, the third variation pattern table is set, and if the time-saving symbol C2 stops during the time-saving gaming state, the fourth variation pattern table is set. may be done.

Further, with the setting of the third time saving game state as a trigger, a fluctuation pattern table may be set according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol from the setting. Further, when the third time-saving game state is set, a variable pattern table may be set based on the time-saving symbols and the game state. For example, if the time-saving symbol C1 stops in the normal gaming state when the third time-saving gaming state is set, if the number of changes from the setting of the third time-saving gaming state is between 1 and 100, A first variation pattern table may be set, and after the 101st time, a second variation pattern table may be set. In addition, if the time-saving symbol C2 stops in the normal gaming state when the third time-saving gaming state is set, if the number of changes from the setting of the third time-saving gaming state is between 1 and 100, A third variation pattern table may be set, and after the 101st time, a fourth variation pattern table may be set. If the time-saving symbol C1 stops when the third time-saving gaming state is set, if the number of changes from the setting of the third time-saving gaming state is 1 to 100, the fifth A variation pattern table may be set, and after the 101st time, a sixth variation pattern table may be set. In addition, if the time-saving symbol C2 stops when the third time-saving game state is set and the time-saving game state is set, if the number of changes from the setting of the third time-saving game state is between 1 and 100, A seventh variation pattern table may be set, and after the 101st time, an eighth variation pattern table may be set.

As described above, the variation pattern table may be switched depending on each gaming state and the stopped symbols, and further may be switched depending on the number of variations.

(Flowchart of main control section)
Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control unit)
The main processing of the main control unit 100 will be explained using FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing main processing in the main control section 100. This main processing is performed by inputting a system reset to the main CPU 100a, which is generated by supplying the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160.

First, the main CPU 100a performs initial setting processing in step S10. Specifically, a preparation process for starting game control, a setting change process for changing setting values based on a setting change operation, and a process for initializing a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 100c based on an RWM clear operation. RWM clear processing, setting confirmation processing for confirming the setting value based on the setting confirmation operation, various drive sources provided in the board unit 500 (second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large winning opening/closing solenoid 51b, A drive source initial operation process for initially operating the prize opening/closing solenoid 57b, etc. is performed.

Specifically, when a setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on, the main CPU 100a sets a setting value area in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 100c based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a in the setting change process. Performs processing to change (update) stored setting values. The set value is a stage of the degree of advantage of the game, and the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination differs depending on the set value. The set value ranges from 1 to 6, for example, and the larger the number, the higher the probability that it will be determined as a jackpot. Note that there may be only one setting value. Furthermore, when the setting value is changed in the setting change process, the main CPU 100a resets the number of operations n stored in the main RAM 100c to an initial value (for example, 500). Further, the main CPU 100a resets (turns OFF) the second time saving history flag stored in the main RAM 100c. The number of operations n is a value that is updated every time the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and is a value that indicates the remaining number of changes in the special symbols until the second time-saving gaming state is set. The second time saving history flag is set to ON when the second time saving game state is set, and is reset when a jackpot game is played.

Furthermore, when the RWM clear operation is performed when the power is turned on, the main CPU 100a initializes (clears to 0) the RWM area for gaming in the main RAM 100c other than the set value area in the RWM clear process. As a result, the game progress state will be initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of gaming machine 1), and the data (other than the setting values) in the gaming RWM area before RWM clear will not be carried over. Become. Further, when the above-mentioned initialization is performed in the RWM clearing process, the main CPU 100a resets the number of operations n stored in the main RAM 100c to an initial value (for example, 500), and also resets the second time saving history flag.

In addition, in the initial setting process, if the setting change operation or RWM clear operation is not performed, the main CPU 100a uses the data saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c to update the game progress state (control state). ) to return (recovery) to the state before the power was cut off. This makes it possible to resume the game from the state before the power was cut off. For example, if the special symbols are fluctuating before the power is turned off, the game is restarted from the fluctuating state, and if a jackpot game is being played before the power is turned off, the game is restarted from the jackpot game state. In addition, the number of reserved special symbols, the gaming state, the number of operations n, and the second time saving history flag are also maintained at the values before the power is turned off.

In addition, the main CPU 100a transmits a power-on command or a power restoration command to the effect control unit 130 in the initial setting process. The power-on command is sent when the setting change process or RWM clear process is performed. The power-on command may include the gaming state, the value of the number of operations n, and the second time saving history flag. Further, the power restoration command is a command indicating that the control state of the game has been restored by the power restoration processing. The power restoration command includes information indicating the progress state of the game, the game state, and the number of pending games before the power outage occurred. Further, the power restoration command may include the number of operations n and the second time saving history flag.

In step S51, the main CPU 100a updates the initial random number value for jackpot determination, the initial random number value for jackpot symbol determination, the initial random value for hit determination, and the initial random number value for normal symbol determination.

In step S52, the main CPU 100a detects a voltage drop from the power failure detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160, which indicates the occurrence of a voltage drop in the power supply (for example, the power supply that was supplied at 24 volts drops to less than 18 volts). Determine whether a signal is being input. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input, the process moves to step S51, and if the voltage drop detection signal has been input, the process moves to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 100a determines whether the voltage drop detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input continues for a predetermined period, it is assumed that a complete power outage has occurred, and the process moves to step S54. If the input does not continue for the predetermined period, there is a possibility of an instantaneous power outage in which the voltage of the power supply drops momentarily. Assuming that there is a difference, the process moves to step S52.

In step S54, the main CPU 100a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and in step S55, sends a power cutoff designation command to notify the payout control unit 120 that the power cutoff process has started. Send. As a result, a remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining number of game balls stored in the payout RAM 121c is transmitted from the payout control unit 120 that received the power cutoff designation command.

In step S56, the main CPU 100a determines whether a remaining payout number designation command has been received. If the remaining payout number designation command has not been received, the process moves to step S57, and if the remaining payout number designation command has been received, the process moves to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 100a determines whether the waiting time for waiting for receiving the remaining payout number designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed, the process moves to step S56, and if the standby time has elapsed, it is assumed that normal communication with the payout control unit 120 cannot be established, and the process moves to step S58.

In step S58, the main CPU 100a saves the number of payouts in the payout counter set in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 100c. Specifically, if the remaining number of payouts specification command is received, the remaining number of payouts specified by the remaining number of payouts specification command is saved, and if the remaining number of payouts specification command is not received, the remaining number of payouts is saved. Save “0” as the number of payouts. The remaining number of payouts saved here is referred to in the timer interrupt payout control process described later, and after the power is restored, a command for specifying the number of payouts corresponding to the remaining number of payouts is sent to the payout control unit 120. become.

The main CPU 100a clears the output port in step S59. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operations of various indicators and various drive sources (motors, solenoids) are stopped.

In step S60, the main CPU 100a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 100c, and saves it in a predetermined area of the gaming RWM area. By doing this, it becomes possible to determine whether the data in the gaming RWM area is abnormal based on the checksum when the power is turned on next time.

In step S61, the main CPU 100a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the main RAM 100c is backed up (power restoration) in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 100c, and in step S62, prohibits RWM access. After that, wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of operating power (18 volts or more) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started, the initial setting process is performed, but in the event of a momentary power outage (voltage drop to less than 18 volts), When the supply of operating power is resumed, the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if a setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, or RWM clear operation is performed for some reason when a momentary power outage occurs, the setting change process, setting confirmation process, or RWM clear process will not be executed. This prevents the machine from performing unintended operations, making it possible to ensure reliability as a gaming machine.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control unit)
The timer interrupt processing (gaming program and information program) of the main control unit 100 will be explained using FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control section 100.

In this timer interrupt processing, a clock pulse is input at a predetermined period (4 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the main control unit 100 after the initialization processing of the main processing is completed. This is executed by controlling the progress of the game.

First, at the start of timer interrupt processing, the main CPU 100a saves information stored in a register to a stack area, and performs time control processing (gaming program). Specifically, processing is performed to update various timer counters such as the stop time of special symbols and the opening time of special electric accessories.

The main CPU 100a performs random number update processing (gaming program) in step S100. Specifically, random numbers for determining jackpots, random numbers for determining jackpot symbols, random values for determining special pattern variation patterns, random values for determining small hit symbols, random values for hit determination, random values for determining normal symbols, and regular symbols. Update the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, processing is performed to update each random value and random number counter by adding +1. In addition, if the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the corresponding The initial random value is set as a new initial value for each cycle, and the random value is newly updated.

The main CPU 100a performs input control processing in step S200. In the input control process, a starting opening switch process, a gate switch process, a big winning opening switch process, a specific area switching process, and a general winning opening switch process are performed. Details of the input control process will be described later.

The main CPU 100a performs special figure special electric control processing in step S300. Specifically, the judgment of the special pattern judgment information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, the control of the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern, and the jackpot. Processing such as a jackpot game process when it is determined to be a small win, and a small win game process when it is determined that a small win is performed. In addition, the details of the special figure special electric control process will be described later.

The main CPU 100a performs general electric power control processing in step S400. Specifically, the main CPU 100a uses the normal pattern determination information (random value for hit determination, random value for normal pattern determination, random value for normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination) acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44. numeric values, etc.), control the fluctuating display of normal symbols, and perform processes such as winning games when a winning is determined in the normal symbol determination. For example, if the normal symbol fluctuation display is not in progress, the main CPU 100a performs a normal symbol determination to determine whether or not it is a hit based on the regular symbol determination information acquired in step S200, and based on the determination result, the regular symbol fluctuation A time is set, and the variable display of normal symbols is started on the normal symbol display 62. Further, when the normal symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, it is determined whether or not the variable time has elapsed, and if the variable time has elapsed, the normal symbols according to the result of the normal symbol determination are stopped and displayed. Then, the main CPU 100a performs a winning game in which the second starting port 47 is opened when the normal symbols indicating a winning stop. In addition, in the time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is shorter than in the normal game state, and the opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game is set longer than in the normal game state.

The main CPU 100a performs a payout control process in step S700. Specifically, various switches (general winning opening detection switch 43a, first big winning opening detection switch 50a, second big winning opening detection switch 56a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, second starting opening detection switch 47a) Based on the detected input, various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 100c are referred to, and various winning holes (general winning hole 43, first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47, first big winning hole 50) are selected. , a process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to the second big prize opening 56) to the payout control unit 120. As a result, the payout control unit 120 executes a process for paying out prize balls from the payout device 95.

The main CPU 100a performs an abnormality determination process in step S800. Specifically, various errors (unauthorized winning errors such as a game ball entering the second starting slot 47 when not in the auxiliary game, or a game ball entering the grand prize opening when not in the special game), and various winnings. An abnormal winning error in which the number of game balls entered into the mouth does not match the number of game balls discharged from the winning ball flow path through which the winning balls flow down, a magnetic error in which abnormal magnetism is detected over a predetermined period by the magnetic detection sensor 57a, A radio wave error occurs when the radio wave detection sensor 58a detects an abnormal radio wave for a predetermined period of time, a door open error occurs when the open detection switch 31a changes from an OFF state to an ON state, and an RWM clear switch 111a occurs while the game progress is being controlled. It is determined whether an error (or an operation error in which the setting key switch 112a is operated) has occurred, and processing is performed to transmit an error designation command corresponding to the error that has occurred to the production control section 130. As a result, the production control unit 130 executes a process for notifying an error.

The main CPU 100a performs data creation processing in step S810. Specifically, external output data (gaming information) output from the game information output terminal board 90, starting port opening/closing data output to the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b, first grand prize opening/closing solenoid 51b, and second grand prize. Big winning opening/closing data output to the mouth opening/closing solenoid 57b, special symbol display data output to the first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display 62, Processing is performed to create data such as special symbol pending display data to be output to the first special symbol pending display 63 and second special symbol pending display 64, and normal symbol pending display data to be output to the normal symbol pending display 65.

The main CPU 100a performs output control processing in step S820. Specifically, port output processing that outputs signals such as the external information data created in step S810, starting opening opening/closing data, and big winning opening opening/closing data, special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, and special symbol Display output processing that outputs signals such as pending display data and normal symbol pending display data, sending a payout status confirmation designation command to the payout control unit 120 to confirm the payout status of the payout control unit 120, and awarding as described later Refers to the ball counters (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) and performs processing for transmitting payout number designation commands corresponding to various winning holes to the payout control unit 120. . Thereby, the payout control unit 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100. Further, the main CPU 100a transmits various commands to the performance control unit 130 for executing the set performance.

Next, the main CPU 100a calls the information program and performs the processing from step S900 onwards.

Specifically, the main CPU 100a performs a game ball counting process (information program) in step S900. Specifically, the number of payouts during normal play, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to various winning holes (general winning hole, big winning hole, starting hole) during normal gaming state, To count gaming performance information such as the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a, regardless of the gaming state. Process.

Note that the total number of outs, the number of payouts during normal play, and the number of outs during normal play are gaming performance information that is not affected (unrelated to the setting value) even if the setting value is changed. By counting , it becomes possible to calculate performance information (normal base value to be described later) that excludes the influence of the setting value, and it becomes possible to use it for understanding the performance of the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 100a performs normal base value calculation processing (information program) in step S910. Specifically, the normal base value ((Number of payouts during normal play ÷ Number of outs during normal play) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the information RWM area is calculated. Processing is performed to save the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area.

Note that the game section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000. In addition, the base storage area includes a first area in which the normal base value in the current game section is stored, a second area in which the normal base value in the previous game section is stored, and a second area in which the normal base value in the previous game section is stored. A third area is provided for storing the normal base value for the section, and a fourth area is for storing the normal base value for the three previous game sections. Base values will be saved in each area.

The main CPU 100a performs performance display data setting processing (information program) in step S920. Specifically, the normal base value (performance information) for four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area is displayed on the information display 113 while being switched every 5 seconds. Performs processing to set performance display data.

The main CPU 100a performs test data creation processing (information program) in step S930. Specifically, processing is performed to create test data (test information) to be output to test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 100a performs output control processing (information program) in step S940. Specifically, display output processing is performed to output signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S920 above to various indicators, and processing is performed to output signals such as test data created in step S930 above. .

Then, the main CPU 100a performs processing to restore the flag register from the gaming RWM area, permit interrupts, and return to the gaming program, and transfers the information saved at the start of the current timer interrupt processing to the main CPU 100a. The current timer interrupt processing ends.

(Input control processing of main control unit)
Next, details of the input control process executed in the main control section 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a detailed flowchart of the input control process in step S200 of FIG. 43.

The main CPU 100a performs first starting port switch processing in step S210. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the first starting port detection switch 45a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered a prize in the first starting port 45. ) is performed for paying out the prize balls, and at the same time, the process for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information is performed. Note that details of the first starting port switch process will be described later.

The main CPU 100a performs second starting port switch processing in step S220. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the second starting port detection switch 47a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered a prize in the second starting port 47. ) is performed for paying out the prize balls, and at the same time, the process for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information is performed. Note that details of the second starting port switch processing will be described later.

The main CPU 100a performs gate switch processing in step S230. Specifically, it is determined whether the gate detection switch 44a detects the passing of a game ball, and if it is detected, the normal pattern determination information (random value for hit determination, random value for normal symbol determination, general pattern fluctuation pattern) is determined. (Random value for judgment) is acquired and stored. The gaming machine 1 can hold up to four pieces of ordinary figure determination information, and newly acquires ordinary figure determination information when the number of pieces of ordinary figure determination information currently being held is less than four.

The main CPU 100a performs the big winning opening switch process in step S240. Specifically, the detection signal is inputted from the first big winning hole detection switch 50a or the second big winning hole detection switch 56a, that is, the game ball enters the first big winning hole 50 or the second big winning hole 56. It is determined whether or not the player has won a prize, and if the player has won a prize, a process is performed to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls.

The main CPU 100a performs specific area switch processing in step S250. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal from the specific area detection switch 52a has been input, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the specific area 52, and predetermined data is set. Note that details of the specific area switch processing will be described later.

The main CPU 100a performs general winning a prize opening switch processing in step S260. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning hole 43, and if it has won, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Perform processing for The main CPU 100a ends the input control process.

(Processing of the first starting port switch in the main control section)
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, details of the first starting port switch process executed in the main control section 100 will be described. FIG. 45 is a detailed flowchart of the first starting port switch process in step S210 of FIG. 44.

In step S2101, the main CPU 100a determines whether a signal has been input by the first starting port detection switch 45a detecting a game ball (whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting port 45). If it is determined that there is an input to the first starting port detection switch 45a, the process moves to step S2102, and if it is determined that there is no input, the process shown in FIG. 45 is ended.

The main CPU 100a updates the prize ball counter in step S2102. As a result, three prize balls are paid out.

In step S2103, the main CPU 100a determines that the first reservation number U1 indicating the reservation number of jackpot determination rights related to the first special symbol stored in the main RAM 100c is set to a predetermined maximum reservation number Umax1 (for example, 4). Determine whether or not the value is less than or equal to the value. If the first reservation number U1 is less than Umax1, the process moves to step S2104, and if not, the process shown in FIG. 45 ends.

In step S2104, the main CPU 100a adds "1" to the value of the first pending number U1 to update it.

In step S2105, the main CPU 100a receives the special figure determination information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for jackpot symbol determination, random value for small hit symbol determination, random value for reach determination, random value for special figure fluctuation pattern determination). The obtained special figure determination information is stored in the first special figure determination information storage area in the main RAM 100c. Specifically, the first special figure determination information storage area has first to fourth storage areas, and the main CPU 100a sequentially fills the first special figure determination information storage area with empty spaces starting from the first storage area. The area is searched and the acquired special figure determination information is stored in an empty area.

In step S2106, the main CPU 100a determines whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. If it is the normal gaming state, the process moves to step S2107, and if not, the process moves to step S2109.

In step S2107, the main CPU 100a performs a first preliminary determination process (first pre-reading process) based on the special figure determination information acquired in step S2105.

The first preliminary determination process is a process of pre-determining the special symbol determination information obtained this time before the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the special symbol determination information acquired this time. Specifically, based on the special figure determination information acquired this time and the preliminary determination table, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined in advance, and in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot symbol and the special symbol variation pattern are determined in advance.

Here, the preliminary determination table is a table containing the same random number value as the jackpot determination table used in the jackpot determination process in the special symbol process. Further, the preliminary determination table includes a table containing the same random number value as the variation pattern table used in the special symbol variation pattern setting process in the special symbol process.

In step S2108, the main CPU 100a generates first prefetch information for notifying the effect control unit 130 of the result of the first preliminary determination process, and sets it in the main RAM 100c. The first prefetch information is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 in the output control process of step S820. As a result, the pre-read effect may be executed before the variable display of the first special symbol related to the current winning is started. For example, as a pre-read effect, an icon change effect is performed to change the display mode (color) of the first pending icon HA. Further, as a look-ahead effect, the above-described shielding effect during fluctuation may be performed.

The main CPU 100a sets the first start winning command in the main RAM 100c in step S2109. The first starting winning command is a command indicating that a game ball has won in the first starting opening 45 (that the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol has been suspended), and includes the first pending number U1. Further, when the first pre-read information is set, the first starting winning command includes the first pre-read information. The first start winning command is transmitted to the production control unit 130 in the output control process of step S820. As a result, the number of first pending icons corresponding to the first pending number U1 is displayed on the first image display device 70. With this, the main CPU 100a ends the process shown in FIG. 45.

(Processing of the second starting port switch in the main control section)
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, details of the second starting port switch process executed in the main control section 100 will be described. FIG. 46 is a detailed flowchart of the second starting port switch process in step S220 of FIG. 44.

In step S2201, the main CPU 100a determines whether a signal has been input by the second starting port detection switch 47a detecting a game ball (whether or not a game ball has entered the second starting port 47). If it is determined that there is an input to the second starting port detection switch 47a, the process moves to step S2202, and if it is determined that there is no input, the process shown in FIG. 46 is ended.

The main CPU 100a updates the prize ball counter in step S2202. As a result, three prize balls are paid out.

In step S2203, the main CPU 100a determines that the second reservation number U2 indicating the reservation number of jackpot determination rights related to the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 100c is set to a predetermined maximum reservation number Umax2 (for example, 4). Determine whether or not the value is less than or equal to the value. If the second reservation number U2 is less than Umax2, the process moves to step S2204, and if not, the process shown in FIG. 46 ends.

In step S2204, the main CPU 100a updates the second pending number U2 by adding "1" to it.

In step S2205, the main CPU 100a receives the special figure determination information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for jackpot symbol determination, random value for small hit symbol determination, random value for reach determination, random value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination). The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the second special figure determination information storage area in the main RAM 100c. Specifically, the second special figure determination information storage area has first to fourth storage areas, and the main CPU 100a sequentially fills the second special figure determination information storage area with empty storage areas starting from the first storage area. The area is searched and the acquired special figure determination information is stored in an empty area.

In step S2206, the main CPU 100a determines whether the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state or second time-saving gaming state). If it is a time-saving gaming state, the process moves to step S2207, and if not, the process moves to step S2209.

In step S2207, the main CPU 100a performs a second preliminary determination process (second pre-reading process) based on the special figure determination information acquired in step S2205. The second preliminary determination process is similar to the first preliminary determination process, but in the second preliminary determination process, whether or not there is a small hit or not, and in the case of a small hit, the small hit symbol is also determined in advance.

In step S2208, the main CPU 100a generates second prefetch information for notifying the effect control unit 130 of the result of the second preliminary determination process, and sets it in the main RAM 100c. The second prefetch information is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 in the output control process of step S820. As a result, the pre-read effect may be executed before the variable display of the second special symbol related to the current winning is started. For example, as a pre-read effect, an icon change effect is performed to change the display mode (color) of the second pending icon HA. Further, as a look-ahead effect, the above-described shielding effect during fluctuation may be performed. In addition, in the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state, the shielding effect during fluctuation may not be executed. Further, in the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state, the execution probability of the changing shielding effect may be lower than in the normal game state. Further, in the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state, the execution probability of the variable shielding effect may be higher than in the normal game state.

The main CPU 100a sets the second start winning command in the main RAM 100c in step S2209. The second starting winning command is a command indicating that a game ball has won in the second starting opening 47 (that the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol has been suspended), and includes the second pending number U2. Furthermore, when the second pre-read information is set, the second starting winning command includes the second pre-read information. The second start winning command is transmitted to the production control unit 130 in the output control process of step S820. As a result, the number of second pending icons corresponding to the second pending number U2 is displayed on the first image display device 70. With this, the main CPU 100a ends the process shown in FIG. 46.

(Specific area switch processing of main control unit)
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, details of the specific area switch process executed by the main control unit 100 will be described. FIG. 47 is a detailed flowchart of the specific area switch process in step S250 of FIG.

In step S2501, the main CPU 100a determines whether a detection signal from the specific area detection switch 52a has been input. If the detection signal from the specific area detection switch 52a is input, the process moves to step S2502, and if the detection signal is not input, the process shown in FIG. 47 ends.

In step S2502, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a small winning game is being played. Here, it is determined whether or not the specific area valid period includes the period in which the small winning game is played. If the small winning game is in progress, the process moves to step S2503, and if the small winning game is not in progress, the process moves to step S2505.

In step S2503, the main CPU 100a sets a specific area passing flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 52 during the small winning game, and a specific area passing flag that indicates the gaming state when the game ball has passed through the specific area 52. game status information is set in the main RAM 100c. For example, if the current gaming state is a normal gaming state, information indicating that it is the normal gaming state, and if the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state, information indicating that it is the time-saving gaming state is set.

In step S2504, the main CPU 100a sets a specific area passing command in the main RAM 100c indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 52 during the small winning game, and ends the process shown in FIG. 47. As a result, a specific area passing command is transmitted to the performance control section 130, and a passing notification performance is executed to notify that the game ball has passed through the specific area 52 (a jackpot game is executed). Therefore, the player can understand that the game ball has passed through the specific area 52 during the small winning game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in step S2505, the main CPU 100a sets a specific area passing error command indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 52 at an abnormal timing, and ends the process shown in FIG. 47. As a result, a specific area passing error command is transmitted to the performance control section 130, and a passing error notification performance is executed to notify the occurrence of a passing error in which the game ball passes through the specific area 52 at an abnormal timing. Therefore, the employees of the game parlor can understand the occurrence of a passing error.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control section)
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, details of the special figure special electric control process executed in the main control unit 100 will be described. FIG. 48 is a detailed flowchart of the special figure special electric control process in step S300 of FIG.

In step S310, the main CPU 100a loads the value of the special figure special electric line state data stored in the main RAM 100c, and performs branch processing based on the special figure special electric line state data.

Specifically, if the special symbol/special electric line state data=0, the main CPU 100a executes the special symbol determination process (step S320). In the special symbol determination process, a process is performed in which variable display of the special symbols is started based on the reserved memory (special symbol determination information) and the special symbol special electric state data is changed to "1". Details of the special symbol determination process will be described later.

If the special symbol special electric state data=1, the main CPU 100a executes the special symbol variation process (step S330). In the special symbol variation process, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variation time elapses, and a symbol confirmation command (variation stop command) is sent to the production control unit 130, and the special symbol special electric state data is A process is performed to change the value to "2". Details of the special symbol variation process will be described later.

If the special symbol/special electric line state data=2, the main CPU 100a executes the special symbol stop process (step S340). In the special symbol stop processing, the special symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined fixed period, and as the fixed period passes, special symbol special electric state data is set according to the stopped symbol. For example, if the stopped symbol is a losing symbol, change the special figure special electric state data to "0", and if it is a jackpot symbol, set the opening time of the jackpot game and change the special figure special electric condition data to "3". If it is a small winning symbol, the opening time of the small winning game is set and the special figure/special electric line status data is changed to "4". Details of the special symbol stop processing will be described later.

If the special figure special electric line state data=3, the main CPU 100a executes the jackpot game process (step S350). In the jackpot game process, a process for executing the jackpot game and a process for changing the special figure special electricity state data to "5" in response to the end of the final round game of the jackpot game are performed. Details of the jackpot game processing will be described later.

If the special figure special electric state data=4, the main CPU 100a executes the small winning game process (step S360). In the small winning game process, processing for executing the small winning game and processing for changing the special figure special electric state data to "0" or "3" according to the end of the ending of the small winning game are performed. Details of the small winning game processing will be described later.

If the special figure special electric state data=5, the main CPU 100a executes the jackpot game end process (step S370). In the jackpot game ending process, a process for ending the jackpot game and a process for setting the gaming state according to the end of the jackpot game are performed. Details of the jackpot game ending process will be described later.

(Special symbol judgment process of main control unit)
With reference to FIG. 49, the special symbol determination process of the main control unit 100 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the special symbol determination process in step S320 of FIG.

In step S3201, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the current special symbol determination process is ended, and if the special symbol is not in the variable display state, the process moves to step S3202.

In step S3202, the main CPU 100a determines whether the second pending number (U2) is 1 or more. If the second pending number (U2) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S3203, and if the second held count (U2) is not 1 or more, the process moves to step S3204.

The main CPU 100a updates the second pending number (U2) by subtracting "1" in step S3203.

On the other hand, the main CPU 100a determines whether the first pending number (U1) is 1 or more in step S3204. If the first number of reservations (U1) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S3205, and if the first number of reservations (U1) is not 1 or more, the process moves to step S3214.

The main CPU 100a updates the first pending number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S3205.

The main CPU 100a performs shift processing in step S3206. Specifically, when performing step S3206 subsequent to step S3203, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage area of the second special figure determination information storage area is transferred to the second to third storage areas for determination. Shift processing is performed to shift the special figure determination information stored in the 4th storage area to the 1st to 3rd storage areas, respectively. In addition, when performing step S3206 following step S3205, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage area of the first special figure determination information storage area is stored in the second to fourth storage areas. Shift processing is performed to respectively shift the special figure determination information stored in the first to third storage areas.

In addition, in this embodiment, in steps S3202 to S3205, the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is prioritized and shifted over the first special figure determination information reservation storage area (the second reservation number is given priority over the first reservation number). However, in the order in which the game balls entered the starting slot, the first special figure judgment information reservation storage area or the second special figure judgment information reservation storage area was shifted (first reservation number and subtraction). 2 reservation number may be subtracted in the winning order), or the first special symbol determination information reservation storage area may be prioritized over the second special symbol determination information reservation storage area and shifted (the first reservation number is subtracted from the second reservation number). may be given priority over (subtraction).

In step S3207, the main CPU 100a executes a jackpot determination process to determine whether or not it is a jackpot and which special symbol to stop, based on the special symbol determination information stored in the determination storage area. The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

The main CPU 100a performs a variation pattern determination process in step S3208. In the variation pattern determination process, a variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern table and the special figure determination information stored in the determination storage area. A plurality of variation pattern tables are stored in the main control section 100, and a variation pattern table is selected depending on the gaming state and the number of variations of special symbols after the jackpot game is played. Details of the fluctuation pattern determination process will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 100a sets a fluctuation start command in step S3209. The fluctuation start command includes a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process, a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the fluctuation pattern determination process, and a gaming state indicating the gaming state. including the specified command. The fluctuation performance is started by transmitting the fluctuation start command to the performance control unit 130.

In step S3210, the main CPU 100a sets a special symbol variation time (counter value) according to the special symbol variation pattern in the main RAM 100c, and in step S3211, starts variable display of the special symbol. As a result, the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61.

In step S3212, the main CPU 100a resets the customer waiting state flag for terminating the customer waiting state, and in step S3213, sets the special symbol special electric train state data to "1", and ends the current special symbol determination process. .

On the other hand, in step S3214, the main CPU 100a determines whether a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 100c. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the current special symbol determination process is ended, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process moves to step S3215. Note that the customer waiting state refers to a state in which special symbols are not displayed in a variable manner and special games (big win games, small win games) are not executed.

The main CPU 100a sets the customer waiting state flag to ON in step S3215, sets a customer waiting command indicating the customer waiting state in the main RAM 100c in step S3216, and ends the current special symbol determination process. As a result, a customer waiting command is transmitted to the performance control unit 130, and processing is performed to execute a customer waiting demonstration performance to encourage the player to play.

(Main control unit jackpot determination process)
The jackpot determination process will be explained using FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the jackpot determination process in step S3207 of FIG. 49.

In step S3231, the main CPU 100a refers to the setting values stored in the main RAM 100c and determines whether or not it is a jackpot or a small hit based on the jackpot judgment table (see FIG. 5) and the random number value for jackpot judgment. Make a jackpot judgment to judge.

When the main CPU 100a determines that it is a jackpot as a result of the jackpot determination (step S3232: YES), the main CPU 100a sets gaming state information at the time of jackpot determination indicating the current gaming state (at the time of jackpot determination) in the main RAM 100c (step S3233).

In step S3234, the main CPU 100a determines a jackpot symbol indicating the type of jackpot based on the jackpot symbol determination table and the random value for jackpot symbol determination, sets it in the main RAM 100c, and ends the process shown in FIG. .

On the other hand, if the main CPU 100a determines that it is a small hit as a result of the jackpot determination (NO in step S3232, YES in step S3235), the main CPU 100a determines the small hit symbol based on the random number value for determining a small hit symbol and stores it in the main RAM 100c. is set (step S3236), and the process shown in FIG. 50 ends.

If it is not a small hit, the main CPU 100a determines that it is a loss and moves the process to step S3237. In step S3237, the main CPU 100a sets a losing symbol and ends the process shown in FIG. 50.

(Fluctuation pattern determination process of main control unit)
With reference to FIG. 51, a variation pattern determination process for determining a variation pattern of special symbols will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern determination process in step S3208 of FIG.

In step S3251, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the game is in the normal gaming state based on the time saving flag stored in the main RAM 100c.

When the main CPU 100a is in the normal gaming state (step S3251: YES), the main CPU 100a sets the normal variation pattern table Tn in the main RAM 100c (step S3252).

If the main CPU 100a is not in the normal gaming state (step S3251: NO), the main CPU 100a determines whether it is in the first time-saving gaming state (step S3253). If it is the first time saving game state (step S3253: YES), the first time saving variation pattern table Ta is set in the main RAM 100c (step S3254).

On the other hand, if it is not in the first time saving game state (step S3253: NO), the main CPU 100a sets the second time saving variation pattern table Tb in the main RAM 100c (step S3255).

The variation pattern table is a table that defines conditions for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. Each variation pattern table further includes a plurality of variation pattern tables. For example, the variable pattern table Tn includes a variable pattern table Tnx used in a predetermined period before shifting to the second time-saving gaming state, and a variable pattern table Tn used in other normal times. An example of these fluctuation pattern tables will be described later.

Following the processing in step S3252, step S3254, or step S3255, the main CPU 100a uses the set fluctuation pattern table to set the special figure determination information (random value for special figure fluctuation pattern determination, random value for reach determination). By performing a lottery based on this, a variation pattern of the special symbol is determined (step S3256).

Then, the main CPU 100a sets the determined variation pattern in the main RAM 100c (step S3257), and ends the process shown in FIG. 51.

(Example of fluctuation pattern table)
Next, an example of a variation pattern table will be explained. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of the normal variation pattern table Tn used in the normal mode in the normal gaming state. The variation pattern table shown in FIG. 52 is a variation pattern table used in a normal period other than the predetermined period before entering the second time-saving gaming state in the normal gaming state.

FIG. 52(a) is a jackpot fluctuation pattern table used when a jackpot is determined, and FIG. 52(b) is a reach fluctuation pattern table used when it is a loss and the random value for reach determination is within a predetermined range. This is a variation pattern table, and FIG. 52(c) is a loss variation pattern table used when there is a loss and the random number value for reach determination is outside a predetermined range.

For example, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 52(a) includes a fluctuation pattern OP1 in which a jackpot is announced after executing the N reach effect, a fluctuation pattern OP2 in which a jackpot is announced after executing the SP reach effect, and a variation pattern OP2 in which a jackpot is notified after executing the SP reach effect. It includes a variation pattern OP3 in which a jackpot is announced after executing a reach effect.

Further, the reach variation patterns shown in FIG. 52(b) include a variation pattern RP1 in which a loss is reported after executing the N reach effect, a variation pattern RP2 in which a loss is notified after executing the SP reach effect, and a variation pattern RP2 in which a loss is notified after executing the SP reach effect. It includes a variation pattern RP3 in which a loss in the performance is notified.

Furthermore, the loss fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 52(c) are a fluctuation pattern HP1 in which a normal loss effect 1 is executed in which a loss is notified in a normal loss mode without performing a reach effect, and a normal loss mode without performing a reach effect. This includes a variation pattern HP2 that executes a normal loss performance 2 that notifies you of a loss.

Various effects are performed by the effect control section 130 according to the selected variation pattern. For example, when the variation pattern RP3 is selected, after the SPSP reach effect is performed, the above-mentioned post-reach shield effect may be performed. For example, when the fluctuation pattern HP1 is selected, the above-described shielding performance during fluctuation may be performed by lottery by the performance control unit 130.

Note that various other fluctuation patterns are included in addition to these.

FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pre-introduction variation pattern table Tnx used in the pre-introduction mode. The fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 53 is a predetermined period after a jackpot game is played, that is, when there is a jackpot history, and before entering the second time-saving game state (451st to 500th fluctuations from the jackpot game). This is a variation pattern table used in In response to the execution of a jackpot game, a fluctuation pattern table is set according to the number of fluctuations. When the number of fluctuations since the jackpot game reaches the 451st time, the table is switched to the fluctuation pattern table Tnx. Note that in the predetermined period when there is no jackpot history, the normal variation pattern table Tn shown in FIG. 52 is used.

FIG. 53(a-1) is a pre-introduction variation pattern table Tnx0 used in the first variation in the pre-introduction mode, and is a jackpot variation pattern table used when a jackpot is determined. FIG. 53(a-2) is a pre-introduction variation pattern table Tnx1 used in the second and subsequent variations in the pre-introduction mode, and is a jackpot variation pattern table used when a jackpot is determined. FIG. 53 (b-1) is a pre-introduction variation pattern table Tnx0 used in the first variation in the pre-introduction mode, and is a reach variation pattern table used when there is a loss and the random value for reach determination is within a predetermined range. It is a pattern table. FIG. 53(b-2) is a pre-introduction fluctuation pattern table Tnx1 used in the second and subsequent fluctuations in the pre-introduction mode, and is used when there is a loss and the random value for reach determination is within a predetermined range. This is a fluctuation pattern table. FIG. 53 (c-1) is a pre-introduction variation pattern table Tnx0 used in the first variation of the pre-introduction mode, and is used when there is a loss and the random value for reach determination is outside the predetermined range. This is a fluctuation pattern table. FIG. 53 (c-2) is a pre-introduction variation pattern table Tnx1 used in the second and subsequent variations of the pre-introduction mode, and is used when there is a loss and the random number value for reach determination is outside the predetermined range. This is a loss variation pattern table.

For example, the jackpot variation pattern table shown in FIG. 53(a-1) includes a variation pattern OPx1 that terminates the pre-introduction mode by executing the pre-introduction shielding effect and then executes the special effect 1, and also notifies the jackpot. After executing the pre-introduction shielding effect, a special effect 2 is executed to end the pre-introduction mode and also includes a variable pattern OPx2 for notifying a jackpot. For example, in special effects 1 and 2, the player's character and the enemy character fight, and the player's character is attacked by the enemy character and falls down.

In addition, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 53(a-2) includes a fluctuation pattern OPx3 that terminates the pre-introduction mode by executing the pre-introduction special performance 1 and notifies the jackpot, and a fluctuation pattern OPx3 that executes the pre-introduction special performance 2. By doing so, the pre-introduction mode is ended and a variation pattern OPx4 is included to notify the jackpot. In the pre-introduction special effects 1 and 2, an effect is performed in which the player's character is attacked by an enemy character and falls down.

In addition, the reach variation pattern table shown in FIG. 53(b-1) includes a variation pattern RPx1 that notifies the continuation of the pre-introduction mode by executing special effect 3 after executing the pre-introduction shielding effect, and It includes a variation pattern RPx2 that notifies continuation of the pre-introduction mode by executing a special effect 4 after executing the effect. For example, in special effects 3 and 4, the player's character fights with the enemy character, and the player's character receives an attack from the enemy character and withstands the attack, thereby continuing the pre-introduction mode. be exposed.

In addition, the reach variation pattern table shown in FIG. 53 (b-2) includes a variation pattern RPx1 that notifies that the pre-introduction mode will continue by executing pre-introduction special performance 3, and pre-introduction special performance 4. This includes a variation pattern RPx2 that notifies that the pre-introduction mode will continue. In the pre-introduction special effects 3 and 4, an effect is performed in which the pre-introduction mode continues as the player's character survives an attack from the enemy character.

Further, the loss variation pattern table shown in FIG. 53(c-1) includes a variation pattern HPx0 that starts the pre-introduction mode and notifies the loss after executing the pre-introduction shielding effect. Furthermore, the loss fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 53(c-2) includes a fluctuation pattern HPx1 in which the player's character performs a pre-introduction effect in which the player's character evades attacks from the enemy character and notifies the player of the loss.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of the second time-saving variation pattern table Tb1 used in the first variation in the second time-saving game state. The variation pattern table shown in FIG. 54 shows the first variation of the special symbol in which the second time-saving gaming state is set when there is no jackpot history (that is, the 501st variation after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed). This is a variation pattern table used in ).

FIG. 54(a) is a jackpot fluctuation pattern table used when a jackpot is determined, and FIG. 54(b) is a small hit fluctuation pattern table used when a small hit is determined. (c) is a reach variation pattern table used when a loss and the random number value for reach determination is within a predetermined range, and FIG. 54(d) is a reach variation pattern table used when a loss and the random number value for reach determination is outside the predetermined range. This is a loss fluctuation pattern table that is sometimes used.

For example, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. It includes a variation pattern OPb1 that executes an effect in which the symbols are aligned. In the time-saving entry exception performance, for example, after the performance pattern 701 starts to fluctuate, a time-save entry shielding performance is performed, and when the performance pattern 701 that has been covered by the shielding performance appears, the performance symbol in the jackpot mode (symbols are aligned) A jackpot is announced by appearing in a temporarily stopped state. In the time-saving entry exception performance, the time-saving entry shielding performance may not be performed, the mode may suddenly shift to time-saving mode B, and then the pattern matching performance may be performed. That is, the presentation mode when a jackpot is determined is different between the first variation in the second time-saving gaming state (the first variation after reaching the specified number of times) and the variation before reaching the specified number of times. In this way, by differentiating the performance mode when it is determined that a jackpot is reached when the specified number of times is reached and before the specified number of times is reached, the effects can be diversified and the interest level can be improved.

In addition, in other embodiments, if it is determined to be a jackpot (or a small hit) in the first fluctuation in the second time-saving gaming state (the first fluctuation after reaching the specified number of times), the same as the fluctuation before reaching the specified number of times is determined. A performance may also be performed. That is, even if the SP reach or SPSP reach effect is performed and a jackpot is announced without performing the above-mentioned time-saving entry shielding effect based on the normal variation patterns (OP1 to OP3) included in the variation pattern table Tn. good. In addition, if it is determined that the first fluctuation in the second time-saving gaming state is a jackpot (or a small hit), the above-mentioned time-saving entry shielding is performed based on the normal fluctuation patterns (OP1 to OP3) included in the fluctuation pattern table Tn. After performing the performance, the SP reach or SPSP reach performance may be performed and the jackpot may be announced.

In addition, in another embodiment, in the first variation in the second time-saving game state (the first variation after reaching the specified number of times), if it is determined to be a jackpot (or a small hit), the above-mentioned time-saving entry shielding effect is performed, but the performance mode may be different from the time-saving rush shielding performance when it is determined that the game is a loss. That is, in the first variation in the second time-saving game state, if it is determined to be a jackpot (or small hit), the time-saving entry shielding performance of the first performance mode is performed, and if it is determined to be a loss, then A time-saving entry-time shielding performance of the second performance mode may be performed. In this way, by changing the performance mode of the time-saving entry shielding performance depending on whether it is determined to be a jackpot (or small hit) or a loss when the specified number of times is reached, it is possible to diversify the performance. Interest can be improved.

In addition, the small winning fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 54(b) executes an exception effect when time is shortened, and also executes a pattern alignment effect that notifies the player that a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player will be performed. It includes a fluctuation pattern KPb1. In addition, when it is determined that the first variation in the second time-saving gaming state is a small hit, the normal variation patterns (OP1 to OP3) included in the variation pattern table Tn may be selected. In this case, the SP reach or SPSP reach effect may be performed after the above-mentioned time-saving entry shielding effect and the jackpot may be announced, or the SP reach or SPSP reach effect may be performed without performing the above-mentioned time-saving entry shield effect. may be performed and a jackpot may be announced.

In addition, in the case where there is no jackpot history, if it is determined to be a jackpot or small hit in the first variation of the special symbol in which the second time-saving gaming state is set, the same reach effect as when the variation pattern table Tn is used (e.g. , SP reach-to-reach performance, or SPSP reach-to-reach performance) may be executed to perform a symbol matching performance to inform the player that a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player will be performed. In this case, the reach effect may be performed after the above-mentioned time-saving entry shielding effect is performed. Moreover, a reach effect may be performed without performing the above-mentioned time-saving entry shielding effect.

Further, the reach variation pattern table shown in FIG. 54(c) includes a variation pattern RPb1 that executes a time-saving entry shielding effect and an effect that notifies you of a loss. Note that the reach variation pattern table shown in FIG. 54(c) may include the normal reach variation patterns (RP1 to RP3) included in the variation pattern table Tn. In this case, for example, if the reach variation pattern RP3 is selected, after the time-saving entry shielding effect is performed, the N reach effect is performed, then the SP reach effect is developed, and then the SPSP reach effect is performed. He lost the reach. After losing the reach, a post-reach shielding effect may be performed as described above.

Furthermore, the loss variation pattern table shown in FIG. 54(d) includes a variation pattern HPb1 that performs a time-saving entry shielding effect and an effect that notifies a loss.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of the second time-saving variation pattern table Tb2 used in the second and subsequent variations in the second time-saving game state. The fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 55 shows the fluctuation of special symbols from the second time onwards when the second time-saving gaming state is set when there is no jackpot history (i.e. from the 502nd time after the RWM clear operation or setting change operation is performed). This is a variation pattern table used in (variation).

55(a) is a jackpot fluctuation pattern table used when a jackpot is determined, and FIG. 55(b) is a small hit fluctuation pattern table used when a small hit is determined. (c) is a reach variation pattern table used when a loss and the random number value for reach determination is within a predetermined range, and FIG. 55(d) is a reach variation pattern table used when a loss and the random number value for reach determination is outside the predetermined range. This is a loss fluctuation pattern table that is sometimes used.

For example, the jackpot variation pattern table shown in FIG. 55(a) includes a variation pattern OPb3 that executes battle production 1 and a victory production, and a variation pattern OPb4 that executes battle production 2 and a victory production. . In the winning performance, a pattern alignment performance is performed, and it is announced that a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player will be performed.

In addition, the small winning variation pattern table shown in FIG. 55(b) includes a variation pattern KPb3 in which battle production 1 is executed and a victory production is executed, and a variation pattern KPb4 in which battle production 2 is executed and a victory production is executed. include.

In addition, the reach variation pattern table shown in FIG. 55(c) includes a variation pattern RPb3 that executes battle effect 1 and a defeat effect that suggests that the player's character is defeated, and a variation pattern RPb3 that executes battle effect 2. It also includes a variation pattern RPb4 that executes a defeat effect. In the defeat performance, the pattern alignment performance is not performed and a loss is notified.

Further, the loss fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 55(d) includes a fluctuation pattern HPb3 for performing the normal loss performance 1 in which the performance symbol 701 stops in a loss state, and a fluctuation pattern HPb4 for performing the normal loss performance 2. .

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of the second time-saving variation pattern table Tb11 (with jackpot history) used in the first variation in the second time-saving gaming state. The fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 56 shows the fluctuations used in the first special symbol fluctuation in which the second time-saving game state is set when there is a jackpot history (that is, the 501st fluctuation after the jackpot game is played). It is a pattern table.

The fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 56 has basically the same effect as the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 26 (the fluctuation pattern table selected in the first fluctuation in the second time-saving gaming state when there is no jackpot history). This includes the variation patterns that are performed, but the variation time is longer than each variation pattern shown in FIG. 26. For example, the variation time of the loss variation pattern HPb11 included in the variation pattern table Tb11 shown in FIG. 56 is longer than that of the loss variation pattern HPb1 included in the variation pattern table Tb1 shown in FIG. 26. Thereby, in the 501st variation after the jackpot game is played, the time-saving introduction performance including the time-saving entry shielding performance and the achievement performance can be executed. The variation patterns included in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 56 are almost the same as the variation patterns included in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 26, so the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of the second time-saving variation pattern table Tb12 (with jackpot history) used in the second and subsequent variations in the second time-saving gaming state. The fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 57 is used in the second and subsequent special symbol fluctuations in which the second time-saving game state is set when there is a jackpot history (that is, the 502nd and subsequent fluctuations after the jackpot game is played). This is a variation pattern table.

The fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 57 is the same as the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. omitted. Note that the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 57 may have a variation pattern different from each variation pattern shown in FIG.

Next, an example of the variable pattern table used in the first time saving game state will be explained. As mentioned above, there are a plurality of variable pattern tables used in the first time-saving gaming state, and they are set according to the jackpot symbols. Here, an example of the variation pattern table Ta2 will be explained.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of the variation pattern table Ta2 used in the first time saving game state.

FIG. 58(a) is a jackpot fluctuation pattern table used when a jackpot is determined, and FIG. 58(b) is a small hit fluctuation pattern table used when a small hit is determined. (c) is a reach variation pattern table used when a loss and the random number value for reach determination is within a predetermined range, and FIG. 58(d) is a reach variation pattern table used when a loss and the random number value for reach determination is outside the predetermined range. This is a loss fluctuation pattern table that is sometimes used.

For example, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 58(a), different fluctuation patterns are set for the 1st to 44th fluctuations, the 45th to 54th fluctuations, and the 55th fluctuation. As is clear from the figure, the variation time increases in the order of the 1st to 44th, 45th to 54th, and 55th times. Specifically, the variation patterns corresponding to the number of variations from 1 to 44 include a variation pattern OPa1 in which battle production 1 is executed and a victory production is executed, and a variation pattern in which battle production 2 is executed and a victory production is executed. Contains OPa2. In the winning performance, a pattern alignment performance is performed, and it is announced that a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player will be performed. In addition, as variation patterns corresponding to the number of variations from 45 to 54, a variation pattern OPa3 in which battle production 3 is executed and a victory production is executed, and a variation pattern OPa4 in which battle production 4 is executed and a victory production is executed. include. Further, as a variation pattern corresponding to the number of variations of 55, a variation pattern OPa5 in which battle performance 5 is executed and a victory performance is executed is included.

Similarly, in the small hit fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 58(b), different fluctuation patterns are set for the 1st to 44th fluctuations, the 45th to 54th fluctuations, and the 55th fluctuation. Each variation pattern is similar to that shown in FIG. 58(b).

Also, in the reach variation pattern table shown in FIG. 58(c), different variation patterns are set for the 1st to 44th variation, the 45th to 54th variation, and the 55th variation. As is clear from the figure, the variation time increases in the order of the 1st to 44th, 45th to 54th, and 55th times. Specifically, the variation patterns corresponding to the number of variations from 1 to 44 are a variation pattern RPa1 in which battle production 1 is executed and a defeat production is executed, and a variation pattern in which battle production 2 is executed and a defeat production is executed. including RPa2. In the defeat effect, the character on the player's side is defeated, and at the same time, the player loses the reach and is notified of the loss. In addition, as variation patterns corresponding to the number of variations from 45 to 54, a variation pattern RPa3 in which battle production 3 is executed and a defeat production is executed, and a variation pattern RPa4 in which battle production 4 is executed and a defeat production is executed. include. Further, as a variation pattern corresponding to a variation number of 55 times, a variation pattern RPa5 is included in which a battle effect 5 is executed, a defeat effect is executed, and a result effect is further executed.

Also, in the loss variation pattern table shown in FIG. 58(d), different variation patterns are set for the 1st to 44th, 45th to 54th, and 55th variations. As is clear from the figure, the variation time increases in the order of the 1st to 44th, 45th to 54th, and 55th times. Specifically, as a variation pattern corresponding to the number of variations from 1 to 44, there is a variation pattern in which a normal loss effect 1 is executed in which three different effect symbols 701 stop and a loss is notified without performing a reach effect. HPa1, and a variation pattern HPa2 for performing a normal losing performance 2 in which three different performance symbols 701 stop after performing a longer performance than the normal losing performance 1 to notify a loss. Further, as a variation pattern corresponding to the number of variations from 45 to 54, there is included a variation pattern HPa3 in which a normal loss performance 3 is executed in which a reach is stimulated and then a reach is not established and a loss is reported. Further, as a variation pattern corresponding to the number of variations of 55 times, a variation pattern HPa4 in which the normal loss performance 3 is executed and the result performance is further executed is included.

Note that the fluctuation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 52 to 58 are merely examples, and each fluctuation pattern table may include various fluctuation patterns other than those described above.

(Special symbol variation processing of main control unit)
With reference to FIG. 59, the special symbol variation process of the main control unit 100 will be explained. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process in step S330 of FIG. 48.

First, in step S3301, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the variation time set in the variation pattern determination process described above has elapsed. If the variation time has elapsed, the process moves to step S3302, and if the variation time has not elapsed, the current special symbol variation process ends.

In step S3302, the main CPU 100a stops and displays the special symbol set in the jackpot determination process described above. Here, the main CPU 100a sets a fixed period (for example, 0.5 seconds) for stopping and displaying the special symbol. Note that the fixed time may be set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c depending on the gaming situation (for example, stopped symbols or gaming status).

Next, the main CPU 100a decrements (subtracts by "1") the number of operations n in step S3303. Here, the number of operations n is an integer greater than or equal to 0. The update process in step S3303 is performed every time the special symbol changes, whether in the normal game state or when the time-saving game state (first to third time-saving game state) is set. Although the update process in step S3303 is performed even when n=0, n is never set to a value smaller than 0. Note that in a gaming machine that can be set to a high probability state and a low probability state, the process of step S3303 is performed only when the state is a low probability state. Note that the updating process of n may be performed at the time when the special symbol starts changing. Further, the updating process of n may be performed when the special symbol stops and a predetermined fixed period has elapsed.

In step S3304, the main CPU 100a determines whether the time saving flag stored in the main RAM 100c is ON. If the time saving flag is ON, the process moves to step S3305 as the remaining time saving number is to be updated, and if the time saving flag is OFF, the remaining time saving number is not updated and the process moves to step S3311. Move.

In step S3305, the main CPU 100a inputs the first time saving number (J1) which is the time saving number of the first special symbol stored in the main RAM 100c or the second time saving number (J2) which is the time saving number of the second special symbol. Increment (subtract "1"). Specifically, if the special symbol related to the current variable display is the first special symbol, J1 is decremented, and if it is the second special symbol, J2 is decremented. Further, the third time saving number (J3) which is the total time saving number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is decremented.

In step S3306, the main CPU 100a determines whether any one of the first number of time reductions (J1), the second number of time reductions (J2), and the third number of time reductions (J3) has become "0". If it becomes "0", the process moves to step S3310 as the time saving gaming state is ended, and if it does not become "0", the process moves to step S3307.

In step S3307, the main CPU 100a determines whether the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed. If it is not a small winning symbol, the process moves to step S3311, and if it is a small winning symbol, in step S3308, the remaining number of small winnings (Z) until the end of the time saving gaming state stored in the main RAM 100c is determined. Decrement (subtract 1).

In step S3309, the main CPU 100a determines whether the remaining number of small wins has become "0". If the remaining number of small hits becomes "0", the time-saving gaming state is terminated and the process moves to step S3310, and if the remaining number of small wins does not become "0", the process moves to step S3311. move.

In step S3310, the main CPU 100a resets the time saving flag and various time saving times (J1, J2, J3) stored in the main RAM 100c to initial values (OFF and "0") to end the time saving gaming state.

In step S3311, the main CPU 100a determines whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is not a jackpot symbol, the process moves to step S3313, and if it is a jackpot symbol, in step S3312, the time-saving flag and various time-saving numbers (J1, J2, J3) are reset to end the time-saving gaming state (normal start the gaming state). Next, the main CPU 100a moves the process to step S3316.

In step S3313, the main CPU 100a determines whether the number of operations n stored in the main RAM 100c is "0" and the second time saving history flag is OFF. Here, it is determined whether the number of variations of the special symbol has reached a prescribed number (500 times). When the number of changes in the special symbol reaches the specified number (when the number of operations n is "0" and the second time-saving game state has not been executed yet), the second time-saving history flag is set to ON ( Step S3314), the process moves to step S3315 to start the second time-saving gaming state. If the number of variations of the special symbol has not reached the specified number of times, the process moves to step S3317.

In step S3315, the main CPU 100a sets the number of time-saving games (J1=750, J2=750, J3=750) and the remaining number of small wins (Z=2) in the second time-saving game state, and turns on the time-saving flag. A transition is made to a second time-saving game state.

In the next step S3316, the main CPU 100a sets in the main RAM 100c a time saving number designation command corresponding to the various number of time saving times (J1, J2, J3). As a result, a command for specifying the number of time reductions is transmitted to the production control section 130, and the remaining number of time reductions is notified.

In step S3317, the main CPU 100a sets the special figure special electric line state data to "2". Then, in step S3318, the main CPU 100a sets a variable stop command indicating that the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The fluctuation stop command includes a symbol confirmation command that indicates a special symbol that is stopped and displayed, and a gaming state designation command that corresponds to the current gaming state (the gaming state identified from the presence or absence of the time saving flag). By transmitting the fluctuation stop command to the performance control unit 130, the fluctuation performance is ended (the performance symbols are stopped and displayed), and processing according to the gaming state is performed. After executing the process of step S3318, the main CPU 100a ends the current special symbol variation process.

In this way, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed (the small winning game is executed) during the time saving game state in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 47, the time saving number (J1, J2, Even if J3) remains, the time-saving gaming state ends when the remaining number of small wins (Z) becomes "0". Therefore, players try to advance the game advantageously by referring to the look-ahead effects and the combination of the effect patterns 701 that are stopped and displayed (whether or not to aim for an advantageous jackpot by passing the game ball through the specific area 52 in the small hit game) ), it becomes possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage due to the gaming method during the time-saving gaming state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, even if the number of small wins remaining (Z) remains, the time-saving gaming state ends when the number of time-savings (J1, J2, J3) becomes "0". There is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage due to the time-saving game state continuing until the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of variable displays of special symbols executed after the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clearing, initialization of the number of operations n based on the end of the jackpot game) reaches the specified number of times, the second time-saving game state , it is possible to give the player the surprise of a time-saving state occurring without going through a jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the number of fluctuations (500 times) in which the second time-saving game state occurs is larger than the maximum time-saving number (496 times) set in the first time-saving game state, the first time-saving game The second time-saving game state does not occur during the state. Therefore, the inconvenience that the player loses track of the progress of the game does not occur, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the number of fluctuations in which the second time-saving game state occurs (500 times) is greater than the maximum number of time-savings (496 times) set in the first time-saving game state by the upper limit number of the second pending number (4 pieces). If the maximum number of time-saving games (496 times) is set in the first time-saving game state, it will be as if the first time-saving game state had directly shifted to the second time-saving game state. It is possible to make the player feel the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the second time-saving game state occurs, the number of operations n stored in the main RAM 100c is not initialized and the second time-saving history flag is turned on, so the number of operations n and the second time-saving history flag are Until it is initialized (specifically, until a jackpot game is played, an RWM clear operation, or a setting change operation is performed), the second time-saving game state will not occur again, and the game parlor side and the player It is possible to ensure a balance of profits on both sides, and it is also possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of setting the maximum number of time-saving games in the first time-saving game state (496 times) to be less than the number of fluctuations in which the second time-saving game state occurs (500 times), the maximum number of time-saving games in the first time-saving game state The number of time saving times and the number of fluctuations in which the second time saving game state occurs may be the same number of times. In this way, the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state are seamlessly connected, making it feel as if the first time-saving game state has been extended, and improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

(Special symbol stop processing of main control unit)
With reference to FIG. 60, the special symbol stop processing of the main control unit 100 will be explained. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop processing in step S340 of FIG.

First, in step S3401, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the confirmation period set in the special symbol variation process described above has elapsed. If the confirmed period has passed, the process moves to step S3402, and if the confirmed period has not passed, the current special symbol stop process is ended.

In step S3402, the main CPU 100a determines whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. If the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the process moves to step S3403, and if the jackpot symbol is not stopped and displayed (the small win or loss pattern is stopped and displayed), the process goes to step S3405. Move.

In step S3403, the main CPU 100a sets the special figure special electric state data to "3" in order to execute the jackpot game, and in the subsequent step S3404, starts an opening for transitioning to the jackpot game.

In step S3405, the main CPU 100a determines whether the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed. If the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the process moves to step S3406, and if the small winning symbol is not stopped and displayed (it is a losing pattern), the process moves to step S3408.

In step S3406, the main CPU 100a sets the special figure special electric state data to "4" in order to execute the small winning game, and in the subsequent step S3407, starts an opening for shifting to the small winning game.

In step S3408, the main CPU 100a sets the special symbol special call state data to "0" in order to move on to the special symbol determination process, and ends the current special symbol stop process.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 100a executes the process of step S3404 or step S3407, in step S3409, the main CPU 100a sets an opening command corresponding to the jackpot or small win in the main RAM 100c. As a result, an opening command is transmitted to the performance control unit 130, and processing for executing the opening performance of the jackpot game or the small win game is performed. When this process is finished, the current special symbol stop process ends.

(Main control unit jackpot game processing)
Next, details of the jackpot game process executed by the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a detailed flowchart showing the jackpot game process in step S350 of FIG.

First, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not opening is in progress (step S3501). Here, it is determined whether or not the opening of the jackpot game started in step S3404 is in progress.

If opening is in progress (step S3501: YES), the main CPU 100a determines whether the opening time has elapsed (step S3502). Note that the opening time varies depending on the jackpot symbol. If the opening time has elapsed (step S3502: YES), the main CPU 100a sets "0" to R indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot game according to the result of the jackpot determination process (jackpot symbol), and sets Rmax to "0". , the opening pattern (opening time, number of openings, interval time, etc.) of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 50 or second big winning hole 56), etc. are set (step S3503).

Here, as described above, the value of Rmax varies depending on the jackpot symbol, and the main CPU 100a sets Rmax indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game according to the jackpot symbol.

Following step S3503, the main CPU 100a adds "1" to R and stores it in the main RAM 100c (step S3504). Next, the main CPU 100a starts controlling the opening of the big winning hole based on the opening pattern set in step S3503 (step S3505), and sets a round start command indicating the start of the round in the main RAM 100c (step S3506). This round start command is transmitted to the production control unit 130 by executing the output control process of step S820. After the process in step S3506, the main CPU 100a next executes the process in step S3510.

On the other hand, if the opening is not in progress (step S3501: NO), the main CPU 100a determines whether the ending is in progress (step S3507). If ending is in progress (step S3507: YES), the main CPU 100a next executes the process of step S3517. If the ending is not in progress (step S3507: NO), the main CPU 100a determines whether or not it is in the interval between round games (step S3508). If the interval is in progress (step S3508: YES), the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the interval time has elapsed (step S3509), and if it has elapsed (step S3509: YES), then the main CPU 100a performs the process of step S3504. Execute. If the interval time has not elapsed (step S3509: NO), the main CPU 100a ends the current jackpot game process.

On the other hand, if the interval is not in progress (step S3508: NO), that is, if the round game is in progress, the main CPU 100a determines whether the round end condition is satisfied (step S3510). If the round end condition is not satisfied (step S3510: NO), the main CPU 100a ends the jackpot game process.

The round end condition is that a predetermined time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the opening control of the big winning opening for this round in step S3505, or that the opening control of the big winning opening for this round is started in step S3505. This means that the number of game balls that have entered the big winning hole since the start of the game has reached a predetermined value (for example, 10 balls). If either of these two conditions is met, the main CPU 100a determines that the round end condition has been met.

If the round end condition is satisfied (step S3510: YES), the main CPU 100a ends the opening control of the big prize opening in this round (step S3511). Next, the main CPU 100a sets a round end command (step S3512). This round end command is transmitted to the production control unit 130 by executing the output control process of step S820.

Next, the main CPU 100a determines whether R is equal to Rmax (step S3513). That is, the main CPU 100a determines whether the current round is equal to the maximum number of rounds set in step S3503.

If it is determined that R is not equal to Rmax (step S3513: NO), the main CPU 100a starts measuring the interval time (step S3514) and ends the current jackpot game process.

If it is determined that R is equal to Rmax (step S3513: YES), the main CPU 100a starts the ending (step S3515) and sets the ending command in the main RAM 100c (step S3516). This ending command is transmitted to the production control section 130 by executing the output control process of step S820.

If the main CPU 100a performs the process in step S3516 or determines YES in the process in step S3507, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a preset ending time has elapsed since starting the ending in step S3515 ( Step S3517). If the ending time has elapsed (step S3517: YES), the main CPU 100a sets "5" in the special figure special electric line state data in order to execute the jackpot game end process (step S3518).

If NO is determined in the process of step S3510, NO is determined in the process of step S3517, NO is determined in the process of step S3502, or the process of step S3518 is executed. If so, the main CPU 100a ends the jackpot game process shown in FIG.

(Small winning game processing of main control unit)
With reference to FIG. 62, the small winning game processing of the main control unit 100 will be explained. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the small winning game process of step S360 in FIG.

First, in step S3601, the main CPU 100a determines whether the opening is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening time set in the above-mentioned special symbol stop processing is equal to or greater than "0". If the opening is in progress, the process moves to step S3602, and if the opening is not in progress, the process moves to step S3605.

In step S3602, the main CPU 100a determines whether the opening time has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed, in step S3603, an operation pattern for opening and closing the big winning hole and the specific area 52 is set, and in the subsequent step S3604, control to open the big winning hole is started. If the opening time has not elapsed, the current small winning game process is ended.

In step S3605, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the ending of the small winning game is in progress. If ending is in progress, the process moves to step S3614, and if not in ending, process moves to step S3606.

In step S3606, the main CPU 100a performs opening control of the specific area 52 to open the specific area 52.

In step S3607, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not to close the big prize opening based on the set operation pattern. When it is determined that the big winning hole is to be closed, in step S3608, the opening control of the big winning hole is ended, and the opening control of the specific area 52 is also ended. Note that the opening control of the specific area 52 may be ended before the opening control of the big prize opening is ended. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the big winning hole is to be closed (if the set opening time of the big winning hole has not elapsed), the current small winning game process is ended.

In step S3609, the main CPU 100a determines whether the game ball has passed through the specific area 52 during the small winning game. Specifically, the main CPU 100a determines whether the specific area passage flag stored in the main RAM 100c is ON.

If the game ball passes through the specific area 52 during the small hit game, the main CPU 100a shifts to the V jackpot game state in step S3610. Specifically, the time saving game flag is turned OFF and the time saving number of times is reset in the same manner as in step S3312.

In the next step S3611, the main CPU 100a sets the special figure special electric state data to "3" and ends the current small winning game process.

On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 52 during the small winning game, the main CPU 100a starts the ending of the small winning game in step S3612, and sets an ending command in step S3613. As a result, the ending command is transmitted to the performance control section 130, and processing for executing the ending performance of the small winning game is performed.

In step S3614, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not to end the ending based on the elapsed time from the start of the ending. If the ending is to be ended, in the next step S3615, the main CPU 100a sets " 0'' is set, and the current small winning game process is ended. If the ending is not finished, the current small winning game process is finished.

(Main control unit jackpot game end processing)
The jackpot game ending process of the main control unit 100 will be explained using FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the jackpot game ending process in step S370 of FIG.

First, in step S3701, the main CPU 100a refers to the stop special symbol data stored in the main RAM 100c and determines whether or not the jackpot symbol has stopped. If the jackpot symbol has stopped, the process moves to step S3702, and if the jackpot symbol has not stopped (the small win pattern has stopped), the process moves to step S3704.

In step S3702, the main CPU 100a acquires the gaming state information at the time of jackpot determination stored in the main RAM 100c, and in the subsequent step S3703, sets the gaming state after the jackpot game based on the gaming state information at the time of jackpot winning. A post-jackpot game status setting table (see FIG. 64(a)) is set. In addition, the details of the state setting table after the jackpot game will be described later.

In step S3704, the main CPU 100a acquires the gaming state information when passing the specific area stored in the main RAM 100c, and in the subsequent step S3705, sets the gaming state after the jackpot game based on the gaming state information when passing the specific area. A V jackpot post game status setting table (see FIG. 64(b)) is set for this purpose. The details of the V jackpot post game status setting table will be described later.

After the processing in step S3703 or step S3705, the main CPU 100a refers to the set state setting table in step S3706 and sets the gaming state after the jackpot game. Specifically, in step S3706, the main CPU 100a sets the time saving flag, the number of time saving times (J1 to J3), and the remaining number of small wins (Z) in the main RAM 100c.

Next, in step S3707, the main CPU 100a resets the number of operations n to the initial value (500) and resets the second time saving history flag to OFF.

In step S3708, the main CPU 100a sets a gaming state designation command indicating the gaming state. As a result, a gaming state designation command is sent to the production control section 130, and the production control section 130 performs processing for updating the gaming state.

In step S3709, the main CPU 100a sets the special symbol special electric state data to "0" in order to move on to the special symbol determination process, and ends the current jackpot game end process.

In this way, at the end of the jackpot game executed when the game ball passed the specific area 52 during the small win game, based on the gaming state when the game ball passed the specific area during the small win game, It is possible to perform predetermined processing (specifically, processing to determine the gaming conditions after a jackpot game (gaming status, number of time savings, remaining number of small wins), and to set the determined gaming conditions in the main RAM 100c). It is possible.

In addition, at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win game, predetermined processing (specifically, the game conditions after the jackpot game (game condition, time saving number, small It is possible to perform processes such as determining the remaining number of wins (remaining number of wins) and setting the determined gaming conditions in the main RAM 100c. Therefore, the game performance can be made different depending on whether it is a jackpot game via a small win game or a jackpot game without passing through a small win game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win game, the predetermined processing is not performed based on the gaming state when the jackpot is determined, but the predetermined processing is performed based on the gaming state when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. You may perform the following processing.

(Status setting table after jackpot game)
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot game state setting table used to set the gaming state after a jackpot game is played. FIG. 64(a) is a diagram showing a post-jackpot game state setting table for setting the gaming state after the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win, and FIG. 64(b) is a diagram showing a state setting table after a jackpot game that does not go through a small win. It is a diagram showing a V jackpot game state setting table for setting the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 64(a), the post-jackpot game state setting table includes the game state at the time of jackpot determination, the stop symbol (jackpot symbol), and the number of fluctuation displays of the first special symbol that ends the time-saving game state. The first time saving number (J1) which is the number of variable displays of the second special symbol that ends the time saving gaming state, the second time saving number (J2) which is the number of variable displays of the second special symbol that ends the time saving gaming state, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol that ends the time saving gaming state. The third time saving number (J3), which is the total number of fluctuating displays of special symbols, and the remaining number of small winnings (Z), which is the number of stop displays of small winning symbols that end the time saving gaming state, are associated. There is.

As shown in FIG. 64(b), the V jackpot post-game state setting table includes the game state when the game ball passes the specific area 52, the stop symbol (small winning symbol), and the end of the time-saving game state. The first time saving number (J1) is the number of variable displays of the first special symbol, the second time saving number (J2) is the number of variable displays of the second special symbol that ends the time saving gaming state, and the time saving gaming state. The third time saving number (J3) which is the total number of fluctuating displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to end, and the remaining number of small winnings (J3) which is the number of stop displays of the small winning symbol to end the time saving gaming state. Z) and are associated with each other.

The first feature of the state setting table after the jackpot game shown in FIG. 64 is that the second time saving number (J2) is set when the game is executed in the time saving game state, which is set when the game is executed in the time saving game state. One point is that there are jackpot games (first jackpot game, third jackpot game) in which the second time saving number (J2) is greater. By doing so, it is possible to vary the second time saving number (J2) set depending on the type of jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the gameplay and increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the second feature is the second time saving number (J2) set when executed in the normal gaming state, and the second time saving number (J2) set when executed in the time saving gaming state. There are jackpot games (second jackpot game, fourth jackpot game, fifth jackpot game) in which the numbers are the same, and the second time saving number (J2) of that jackpot game is the same as that of other jackpot games (first jackpot game, third jackpot game). An example of this is that the number of time reductions (J2) is greater than the second time reduction number (J2) of the game). By doing this, the value of the jackpot game can be made different based on the number of time savings, rather than the difference depending on the prize ball that can be obtained during the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the gameplay and increase the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, the third feature is that the remaining number of small hits (Z) set when executed in the time-saving gaming state is higher than the remaining number of small hits (Z) set when executed in the normal gaming state. One point is that there are jackpot games (first jackpot game, second jackpot game, third jackpot game) in which there are more players. By doing this, the remaining number of small wins (Z) set depending on the type of jackpot game can be varied, and it is possible to improve the gameplay and the interest of the game.

In addition, the fourth feature is the remaining number of small hits (Z) set when executed in the normal gaming state and the remaining number of small hits (Z) set when executed in the time-saving gaming state. There are jackpot games (4th jackpot game, 5th jackpot game) in which the numbers are the same, and in the normal gaming state, the remaining number of small wins (Z) of that jackpot game is the same as that of other jackpot games (1st jackpot game, 2nd jackpot game). An example of this is that the remaining number of small wins (Z) of the game (game, third jackpot game) is greater than the remaining number of small wins (Z). By doing this, the value of the jackpot game can be made different depending on the remaining number of small wins rather than the difference depending on the prize ball that can be obtained during the jackpot game, and the game performance is improved and the interest of the game is increased. becomes possible.

In addition, as a fifth feature, in the jackpot game executed via the small winning game, the number of times in the time saving game state is higher than the second time saving number (J2) set when it is executed in the normal game state. One point is that there are jackpot games (1st V jackpot game, 3rd V jackpot game) in which the second time saving number (J2) set when executed is greater. By doing this, it is possible to vary the second time saving number (J2) set depending on the type of jackpot game via the small win game, and it is possible to improve the gameplay and the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, as a sixth feature, the jackpot game executed via the small win game is executed in a time-saving gaming state than the remaining number of small wins (Z) set when executed in the normal gaming state. The point is that the remaining number of small wins (Z) set when the number of small wins is set is larger when the number of small wins is set. By doing so, the value of the jackpot game via the small win game can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the gameplay and the interest of the game.

Moreover, as a seventh feature, when the jackpot symbols A11 to A13 are stopped in the normal game state and a jackpot game is performed, the remaining number of small wins Z is set to one. In this case, when the small winning symbols stop, the remaining number of small winnings becomes "0", and if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 52 during the small winning game, the normal game is played without the jackpot game being played. transition to state. If the small winning symbols stop after the jackpot symbols A11 to A13 have stopped and the jackpot game has been played, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 52, the game will fall back to the normal gaming state. The game ball can be actively launched toward the specific area 52.

In addition, the eighth feature is that even if the jackpot symbol A21 or A22 stops in the normal gaming state and a jackpot game is performed, the jackpot symbol A21 or A22 stops in the time-saving gaming state and a jackpot game is performed. In this case, the remaining number of small wins Z is set to 2. Further, when a jackpot game is performed in the time-saving game state, the remaining number of small wins Z is set to two. When the remaining number of small hits is set to 2, even if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 52 during the small winning game, the remaining number of small wins will not become "0", so the time-saving game state continues. Therefore, even if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 52 during the first small winning game, the game can be played in the time-saving game state without shifting to the normal game state. Furthermore, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 52 during the second small winning game, the normal gaming state will be entered without the jackpot game being played as described above.

In addition, in another embodiment, the remaining number of small wins may be made larger than the value shown in the table of FIG. 64. For example, the remaining number of small wins may be set to be the same as the number of time savings or a number greater than the number of time savings. In this case, even if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 52 during the small winning game, the remaining number of small winnings will not become "0", so the time-saving gaming state can be continued.

(Game status referenced at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win game)
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a game state that is referred to at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win game, and FIG. Fig. 65(b) is a timing chart when the jackpot variation display is executed in the time-saving gaming state (before the final variation), and Fig. 65(c) is a timing chart when the symbol variation display is executed. ) is a timing chart when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the time saving gaming state (final fluctuation).

Regarding the gaming state that is referred to in order to set the gaming conditions (playing state, number of time reductions, remaining number of small winnings) at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small winning game, the timing when the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot (when the jackpot is won) ).

As shown in FIG. 65(a), when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the normal gaming state, at the end of the jackpot game at T4, at the start of the jackpot fluctuation display at T1, that is, at the timing when the jackpot is won. The gaming conditions (gaming status, number of various time reductions, remaining number of small wins) are set by referring to the gaming status in . In this case, the timing of T1 is the normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the time-saving gaming state (before the final fluctuation), at the end of the jackpot game at T4, at the start of the jackpot fluctuation display at T1, that is, The gaming condition at the time when the jackpot is won is referred to, and gaming conditions (gaming condition, various time saving times, and remaining small winnings) are set. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 65(c), when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the time-saving gaming state (final fluctuation), at the end of the jackpot game of T4, at the start of the jackpot fluctuation display of T1, that is, the jackpot The gaming conditions (gaming condition, number of various time saving times, remaining number of small wins) are set by referring to the gaming condition at the timing of winning. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time saving gaming state.

(Game status referenced at the end of a jackpot game via a small win game)
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a gaming state that is referred to at the end of a jackpot game via a small winning game, and FIG. 66(a) is a timing chart when a small winning fluctuation display is executed in a normal gaming state. Yes, and FIG. 66(b) is a timing chart when a small winning fluctuation display is executed in which the time-saving end condition is not satisfied in the time-saving gaming state, and FIG. 65(c) is a timing chart when the time-saving ending condition is satisfied in the time-saving gaming state. It is a timing chart when a small hit fluctuation display is executed.

Regarding the game state that is referred to in order to set the game conditions (game state, time saving number, remaining number of small winnings) at the end of the jackpot game via the small winning game, the game ball passes through the specific area 52 during the small winning game. This is the timing (when transitioning to the jackpot game).

As shown in FIG. 66(a), when the small winning fluctuation display is executed in the normal gaming state, the game ball passes through the specific area 52 during the small winning game of T4 at the end of the jackpot game of T6. The gaming condition at the time of the game is referred to and the gaming conditions (gaming condition, number of various time reductions, remaining number of small wins) are set. In this case, since the normal gaming state has been in effect since the start of the small win fluctuation display, the timing of T4 is the normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 66(b), when a small winning variation display that does not satisfy the time saving end condition is executed in the time saving game state, at the end of the T6 jackpot game, the game ball is played during the T4 small winning game. The game condition (game condition, various time saving times, remaining number of small wins) is set by referring to the game condition when the character passes through the specific area 52. In this case, when the small hit fluctuation display at T2 is stopped, the various time saving numbers and the remaining number of small winnings are not "0" and the time saving gaming state is maintained, so the timing of T4 is called the time saving gaming state. It turns out. In addition, when the game ball passes the specific area 52 at the timing of T4, the jackpot game starts and shifts to the normal gaming state, but when passing the specific area 52, it is called a time-saving gaming state before shifting to the normal gaming state. It is supposed to be.

As shown in FIG. 66(c), when the small hit fluctuation display that satisfies the time saving end condition in the time saving game state is executed, at the end of the T6 jackpot game, the game ball is played during the T4 small win game. The game condition (game condition, various time saving times, remaining number of small wins) is set by referring to the game condition when the character passes through the specific area 52. In this case, when the small winning fluctuation display stops displaying at T2, one of the times becomes "0" and the time-saving gaming state ends and the state shifts to the normal gaming state, so the timing of T4 is the normal gaming state. become.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, when the jackpot game is executed with the jackpot fluctuation display being executed, and when the jackpot game is executed with the small win fluctuation display being executed, when the jackpot game ends, The sampling timing (acquisition timing) of the gaming state referred to in order to set the gaming condition (gaming state, number of various time reductions, remaining number of small wins) is different. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on whether it is a big hit or a small hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control section)
Next, details of production control based on various commands from the main control section 100 will be explained.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed in the production control section 130. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the sub CPU 130a of the performance control unit 130 repeatedly executes a series of processes shown in FIG. 67 at fixed time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) by interrupt.

The sub CPU 130a first executes command reception processing (step E10). The command reception process in step E10 is a process for controlling the performance based on various commands from the main control unit 100. The production control unit 130 receives a command from the main control unit 100, determines the content of the production according to the received command, and causes the image and sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to execute the determined production. A command is generated and set in the sub RAM 130c. Details of the command reception process in step E10 will be described later.

Following step E10, the sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting control processing (step E20). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the customer waiting command from the main control unit 100, the sub CPU 130a starts the customer waiting demonstration performance. In this case, the performance control unit 130 stops the BGM that is being output and outputs BGM for the customer waiting demonstration performance.

Next, the sub CPU 130a performs a command transmission process of transmitting each command set in the sub RAM 130c to the image/acoustic control section 140 and the lamp control section 150 (step E30). As a result, the image and sound control section 140 performs effects such as image display and audio output, and the lamp control section 150 controls the movable presentation device 73, the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74, and the like.

(Command reception processing by the production control unit 130)
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 68, the command reception process executed in the production control section 130 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the command reception process in step E10 of FIG. 67. The effect control unit 130 determines the content of the effect based on the command from the main control unit 100, and causes the image and sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to execute the determined effect. Part or all of the processing related to the effects described below may be performed in any of the effects control section 130, the image and sound control section 140, and the lamp control section 150.

First, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 100 (step E101). If the command has been received (step E101: YES), the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step E102, and if the command has not been received (step E101: NO), the sub CPU 130a ends the current command reception process.

If the determination in step E101 is YES, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a power-on command or a power restoration command (step E102).

If the command is a power-on command or a power-recovery command (step E102: YES), the sub CPU 130a performs a power-on notification process (step E103). Specifically, when the received command is a power-on command, a notification instruction command for executing the above-mentioned power-on notification is set in the sub-RAM 130c, and when the received command is a power restoration command, the notification instruction command is set in the sub-RAM 130c. , a notification instruction command for executing the above-mentioned power restoration notification is set in the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing power-on notification or power restoration notification, and movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second Processing is performed to perform an initial operation in which the movable member 73b) is operated in a predetermined manner, an initial light emission in which the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are made to emit light in a predetermined manner (the recovery mode described above), and the like. Note that this power restoration command includes information such as the gaming state, the gaming situation (whether it is changing or hitting the jackpot), the number of pending games, the number of operations n, and the second time saving history flag. Further, the remaining number of time savings and the remaining number of small wins may be included. These pieces of information are stored in the sub RAM 130c of the production control section 130. Based on this information, the performance control section 130 performs performance control. For example, based on the value of the number of operations n, the performance control unit 130 can know the remaining number of fluctuations until the second time-saving game state is set. This value is stored in the sub-RAM 130c and is decreased every time the special symbol changes. Thereby, it is possible to display the second time-saving count display image NC and countdown image CDG that indicate the remaining number of fluctuations until the second time-saving game state is set. Further, for example, when the number of operations n is 0 and the second time saving history flag is ON, the production control unit 130 can know that the second time saving has passed. This allows the lamp control unit 150 to perform lamp control in a warning mode. Note that the lamp control in the warning mode may be performed after the lamp control in the recovery mode, or the lamp control in the warning mode may be performed without performing the lamp control in the recovery mode.

If step E103 is executed, or if the determination is NO in step E102, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is an error command (step E104).

Here, error commands include unrecoverable error commands, fraudulent winning error commands, abnormal winning error commands, magnetic error commands, radio wave error commands, door open error start commands, door open error end commands, operation error commands, etc. be.

If the command is an error-related designation command (step E104: YES), the sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing (step E105). Specifically, error notifications according to the type of error command received (unrecoverable error notification, unauthorized winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door open error notification, operation error notification) etc.), a notification instruction command is set in the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the image and sound control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and various error notifications are performed.

When step E105 is executed, or when the determination is NO at step E104, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a starting winning command (first starting winning command or second starting winning command). (Step E110). Here, the starting prize winning command includes a first reservation number U1 and a second reservation number U2. Further, the start winning command may include first read-ahead information or second read-ahead information.

If the received command is a starting winning command (step E110: YES), the sub CPU 130a executes starting winning command processing (step E111). The starting winning command process is a process that is executed when a game ball wins in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. For example, a hold icon is additionally displayed on the main screen by the start winning command processing. At this time, the color of the hold icon may be changed based on the result of the preliminary determination. Based on the result of the preliminary determination, a scenario for changing the color of the pending icon or the icon (a scenario for changing the color to which color at which timing) may be determined. Furthermore, it may be determined whether or not to perform the above-described shielding performance during fluctuation based on the result of the preliminary determination. When it is determined to perform the above-described shielding performance during fluctuation based on the result of the preliminary determination, a scenario of the shielding performance during fluctuation that covers a plurality of fluctuations including the fluctuation of the target of the preliminary determination may be determined.

If step E111 is executed, or if the determination is NO in step E110, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a fluctuation start command (step E112). If it is a fluctuation start command (step E112: YES), the sub CPU 130a executes fluctuation start command processing (step E113). The variation start command process is a process executed when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started. By performing the fluctuation start command processing, a fluctuation effect is started in the image and sound control section 140 and the lamp control section 150. In the fluctuating performance, a performance is performed according to the fluctuation pattern as described above. In addition, in the variation start command processing, variation number information M indicating the number of variations of the special symbol after power-on stored in the sub-RAM 130c is updated.

If step E113 is executed, or if the determination is NO in step E112, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a fluctuation stop command (step E114). If it is a fluctuation stop command (step E114: YES), the sub CPU 130a executes fluctuation stop command processing (step E115). The fluctuation stop command process is a process executed when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the variation stop command process, the effect symbols 701 and small symbols 702 are stopped and displayed according to the result of the jackpot determination, and the variable effect is ended. In addition, in the fluctuation stop command processing, a disappearing effect of the icon, which will be described later, is performed. In addition, in the variation stop command processing, the game number display image GC is updated according to the variation number information M. As a result, the number indicated by the game number display image GC increases. Further, when the second time saving count display image NC is displayed, the number shown by the second time saving count display image NC is decreased. Moreover, when the pre-introduction mode is set, the countdown image CDG is decreased.

If step E115 is executed, or if the determination is NO in step E114, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is an opening command (step E116). If it is an opening command (step E116: YES), the sub CPU 130a executes opening processing (step E117). Specifically, the sub CPU 130a determines an opening effect indicating that a jackpot game is to be started, and sets a command in the sub RAM 130c to cause the image and sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to execute the opening effect. . As a result, the command is transmitted to the image and sound control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing the opening effect is performed.

If step E117 is executed, or if the determination is NO in step E116, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is an ending command (step E118). If it is an ending command (step E118: YES), the sub CPU 130a executes ending processing (step E119). Specifically, the sub CPU 130a determines an ending effect indicating that the jackpot game is ended, and sets a command in the sub RAM 130c to cause the image and sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to execute the ending effect. . As a result, the command is transmitted to the image and sound control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing the ending effect is performed.

(Variation start command processing by the production control unit 130)
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 69, the fluctuation start command process executed in the production control unit 130 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the fluctuation start command processing in step E113 of FIG. 68.

The sub CPU 130a analyzes the received fluctuation start command, and outputs the jackpot determination result (jackpot symbol, small prize symbol, or loss symbol), special symbol fluctuation pattern, current gaming state, first pending number U1, second pending number. U2 is determined (step E113-1).

Next, the sub CPU 130a performs production mode setting processing (step E113-2). Specifically, the performance mode is set depending on the gaming state.

Next, the sub CPU 130a determines a variable effect pattern based on the special figure variable pattern (step E113-3). The performance control unit 130 stores a variable performance pattern corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern, and determines a variable performance pattern corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern. For example, when the special figure variation pattern is variation pattern OP3, a variation production pattern including SPSP reach production is determined as the variation production pattern. Further, for example, in the case of the variable pattern HPb1, a variable effect pattern including the above-mentioned time-saving entry shielding effect is determined. Further, a variable effect pattern including a selling effect and a shielding effect at the time of shortening time, which is the variable pattern HPb11, is determined. Further, for example, in the case of the variation pattern HP2, it is possible to determine a variation effect pattern including a shielding effect during variation. In the case of the variation patterns RP1 to RP3 or OP1 to 3, it may be possible to determine a variation effect pattern including a shielding effect during variation. Further, for example, in the case of the variable patterns RP2 to RP3, it is possible to determine a variable effect pattern including a cover effect after reach. Also, in the case of the variable patterns OP2 to OP3, it may be possible to determine a variable effect pattern including a cover effect after reach. A command for executing a variable effect based on the determined variable effect pattern is transmitted to the image and sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, so that the image and sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 execute the variable effect. be done.

Next, the sub CPU 130a determines a preview performance by performing a lottery using performance random numbers based on the variable performance pattern (step E113-4). For example, the preview performance includes a line preview, a step-up notice, a cut-in notice, etc. that suggest the possibility of a jackpot. In addition, the preview performance includes a confirmed performance that suggests a jackpot. The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to perform a preview performance based on the special figure fluctuation pattern, and determines which preview performance to perform at which timing of the fluctuation performance. Note that it may be determined whether or not to perform the above-described shielding performance during fluctuation as a preview performance by performing a lottery using performance random numbers based on the fluctuation performance pattern. Furthermore, it may be determined whether or not to perform the above-mentioned post-reach shielding performance as a preview performance by performing a lottery using performance random numbers based on the variable performance pattern.

Next, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon change effect (step E113-5). Here, a pending icon or an icon change effect for changing the icon is set according to the scenario determined in the start winning command process. For example, if it has been decided to change the pending icon in the current special symbol change, the sub CPU 130a determines the timing of changing the pending icon, the mode of icon change suggestion effect to be performed before changing the pending icon, etc. Set. As a result, while the current special symbol is changing, an icon change effect that changes the pending icon is performed.

Next, the sub CPU 130a updates the first pending number N1 or the second pending number N2 (step E113-6). As a result, if the fluctuation start command is a command indicating the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the first reservation number N1 is subtracted by "1", and if the fluctuation start command is a command indicating the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol, the first reservation number N1 is subtracted by "1". 2 reservation number N2 is subtracted by "1". Note that the sub CPU 130a checks the consistency of the currently displayed number of pending icons and the first pending number N1 or the second pending number N2 updated in step S113-11, and updates them accordingly. If there is a mismatch, control is performed so that the number of pending icons matches the first pending number N1 or the second pending number N2.

Next, the sub CPU 130a updates the variation number information M indicating the number of variations of the special symbol after the power is turned on, which is stored in the sub RAM 130c (step E113-7).

Next, the sub CPU 130a sets various commands for executing each set effect (step E113-8). Various commands are sent to the image and sound control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, so that each set effect is executed.

Note that the gaming machine of this embodiment is not limited to the above, and various other modifications may be made. For example, the configuration may be as follows.

For example, in the above embodiment, the shielding image 710 is made to appear immediately after the variation of the production pattern 701 starts to cover the production pattern 701, but the occlusion image 710 may be made to appear when the production pattern 701 starts to change. Thereby, even if the fluctuation time is short, it is possible to perform a time-saving entry shielding effect. Further, the effect pattern 701 may be covered by making the shielding image 710 appear immediately before or at the timing when the effect pattern 701 stops. Thereby, it is possible to impress the player more strongly with the time-saving rush shielding effect than with the variable effect.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the first time period from the start of variation of the special symbol to the appearance of the shielding image 710 is shorter than the second time period from the start of variation of the special symbol to the appearance of the post-reach shielding image 730. did. That is, the shielding image 710 is displayed after a first time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the post-reach shielding image 730 is displayed after the second time, which is longer than the first time, has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. In other embodiments, the first time from the start of special symbol variation until the shielding image 710 appears may be longer than the second time from the start of special symbol variation until the post-reach shielding image 730 appears. .

Further, the first time period from the start of variation of the special symbols until the shielding image 710 appears may be shorter than the second time period from the start of variation of the special symbols until the shielding image 740 appears. In this case, it is possible to quickly execute the time-saving entry shielding effect and shift to the time-saving mode B. Further, the first time may be longer than the second time. In this case, it is possible to give an impression of entering the second time-saving game state.

Further, in the above embodiment, the performance mode when the jackpot determination is determined to be a jackpot is made different depending on whether the number of variations of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times or not. In other words, if the first variation after reaching the specified number of times (the first variation after setting the second time-saving gaming state) is determined to be a jackpot, a special An exception performance is now executed when the time is shortened. In other embodiments, the first variation after reaching the predetermined number of times and the other variations may be performed in exactly the same manner.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the number of changes in the special symbol reaches the specified number of times without a jackpot game being played, the normal game state is shifted to the second time-saving game state. The specified number of times may be variable. For example, when the time-saving gaming state is granted when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches the first number, and when the time-saving gaming state is granted when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches the second number. There may be. In this case, the number of time reductions given may be varied depending on the number of changes in the special symbol, and the greater the number of changes, the greater (or smaller) the number of time reductions may be set.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of this embodiment may be configured as follows.

For example, in the case of a specific jackpot (jackpot symbols A21, A22), the number of changes in the special symbol that ends the advantageous gaming state (time-saving gaming state, high probability state) that is controlled after the jackpot ends is the same regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot via a small win, the number of fluctuations to end the advantageous gaming state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot may vary depending on the gaming state.

The advantageous gaming state (time-saving gaming state, high probability state) that is controlled after the jackpot game ends when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number, or when the number of small wins reaches the specified number (including once). (Transition to normal gaming state) may be possible.

The advantageous gaming state that is controlled after the jackpot game is when any of the multiple ending conditions (special 1 time saving remaining number (J1), special 2 time saving remaining number (J2), total time saving number (J3), small winning remaining number) It is possible to end the game if it is established, and the predetermined end condition (number of small wins) in the advantageous gaming state is not announced, but it is possible to end the game by mode effects (background image, display of remaining number of time saving times, "N times remaining", etc.) A predetermined termination condition may be suggested.

The advantageous gaming state that is controlled after the jackpot game is when the first ending condition (remaining number of time savings in special 2) is satisfied, or when the second ending condition (remaining number of small wins, remaining number of special 1 time savings, total number of time savings) is satisfied. It is possible to end the game (transfer to the normal gaming state) if the game is established, and during the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to notify information related to the first ending condition (Special 2 time saving remaining number of times), while the second ending condition It is not necessary to notify information related to the conditions (remaining number of small wins, remaining number of special 1 time savings, total number of time savings).

The advantageous gaming state that is controlled after a jackpot game can be terminated when the number of small wins reaches a specified number of times, and the game medium is does not pass through a specific area, displays an end suggestion screen for the advantageous gaming state, and displays an end suggestion screen depending on whether the second special symbol is pending or not when the small winning game ends. The period may vary.

It is possible to execute a second time-saving suggestion effect (pre-introduction mode, countdown display, number of games display, etc.) that indicates when the second time-saving gaming state is likely to occur, and a predetermined loss variation effect (no-reach loss). During the middle, there is an execution period in which the second time-saving suggestion performance is executed, but there is no non-execution period in which the second time-saving suggestion performance is not executed, and during the jackpot fluctuation performance, there is an execution period in which the second time-saving suggestion performance is executed ( (before SP reach) and a non-execution period (during SP/SPSP reach) in which the second time-saving suggestion effect is not performed.

It is possible to execute a second time-saving suggestion effect (countdown display, number of games display, etc.) that suggests the time when the second time-saving game state may occur, and during the first reach variation effect (N reach), the second time-saving suggestion effect (countdown display, number of games display, etc.) There is an execution period in which the time-saving suggestion effect is executed, but there is no non-execution period in which the second time-saving suggestion effect is not executed, and during the second reach variation effect (SP/SPSP reach), which has higher expectations than the first reach variation effect. There may be an execution period (before SP reach) in which the second time-saving suggestion effect is executed and a non-execution period (during SP/SPSP reach) in which the second time-saving suggestion effect is not executed.

It is possible to execute a second time-saving suggestion effect (countdown display, game number display, etc.) that suggests the time when the second time-saving game state may occur, and during the variable effect executed in the normal game state, the second time-saving suggestion effect (countdown display, game number display, etc.) There is an execution period in which the time-saving suggestion effect is executed (before SP reach) and a non-execution period in which the second time-saving suggestion effect is not executed (SP/SPSP reach, etc.), and a specific gaming state (first time-saving gaming state, high probability). While there is no execution period in which the second time-saving suggestion performance is performed during the variable performance executed in the state, etc.), there may be a non-execution period in which the second time-saving suggestion performance is not performed.

It is possible to execute a second time-saving suggestion effect (countdown display, number of games display, etc.) that indicates the time when the second time-saving gaming state may occur, and in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot can be predicted in advance. While it is possible to execute a definite suggestion performance (pre-reading performance, jackpot notice performance), if the second time-saving gaming state is to be entered, a suggestion that the second time-saving gaming state will be confirmed in advance (at least 2 changes in advance) The presentation (pre-reading presentation) may not be performed.

There is a first time-saving game state that goes through a jackpot game and a second time-saving game state that does not go through a jackpot, and if the predetermined number of fluctuation displays after the first condition is met (RWM clear) results in a loss, If the predetermined number of variable displays after the establishment of the second condition (end of the jackpot game) results in a loss, the game is controlled to the second time-saving game state for a predetermined period of time.

There is a first time saving game state that goes through the jackpot game and a third time saving game state that does not go through the jackpot game, and when the second losing special symbol, which is different from the first losing special symbol, is stopped and displayed in the variable display, The third time-saving game state may be controlled for a predetermined period different from the first time-saving game state.

It is possible to control the time-saving game state (second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state) over a predetermined period without going through the jackpot game, and it is also possible to control the time-saving game state (second time-saving game state or third time-saving game state). If the first change in the time-saving gaming state is a loss, a rush effect will be executed in that change, and if the first change in the time-saving gaming state is a jackpot, in the said change. It may be configured so that the rush effect is not performed.

It is possible to control the time-saving game state (second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state) over a predetermined period without going through the jackpot game, and it is also possible to execute a rush performance, so that the initial fluctuation of the time-saving game state is a loss. In this case, the rush effect is executed in the first mode in the variation, and if the first variation in the time-saving gaming state is a jackpot, the appeal in the variation is lower than in the first mode (the time is short, the display is not The rush effect may be performed in the second mode (with fewer effects).

During the first time-saving game state (or a high probability state that continues up to a predetermined number of times) and during the second time-saving game state, it is possible to determine the special pattern fluctuation pattern using different special pattern fluctuation pattern tables, and the first time-saving game The predetermined period after the end of the state (the period of variation of the remaining amount of the second special symbol) and the predetermined period after the end of the second time-saving gaming state (the period of variation of the remaining amount of the second special symbol) are different special symbols. It may be possible to determine the special figure fluctuation pattern using a fluctuation pattern table.

During the first time-saving game state (or a high probability state that continues up to a predetermined number of times) and during the second time-saving game state, it is possible to determine the special pattern fluctuation pattern using different special pattern fluctuation pattern tables, and the first time-saving game The predetermined period after the end of the state (variation period for the remaining amount of the second special symbol) and the predetermined period after the end of the second time-saving gaming state (the fluctuation period for the remaining amount of the second special symbol) are the same special symbol. It may be possible to determine the special figure fluctuation pattern using a fluctuation pattern table.

During the first time-saving game state (or a high probability state that continues up to a predetermined number of times) and during the second time-saving game state, it is possible to determine the special pattern fluctuation pattern using different special pattern fluctuation pattern tables, and the first time-saving game During the state and during the second time-saving game state, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern may be determined using different normal pattern fluctuation pattern tables.

During the first time-saving game state (or a high probability state that continues up to a predetermined number of times) and during the second time-saving game state, it is possible to determine the special pattern fluctuation pattern using different special pattern fluctuation pattern tables, and the first time-saving game During the state (or a high probability state that continues up to a predetermined number of times) and during the second time-saving game state, it may be possible to determine the normal pattern fluctuation pattern using the same general pattern fluctuation pattern table.

During the first time-saving game state (or a high probability state that continues up to a predetermined number of times) and during the second time-saving game state, it is possible to determine the special pattern fluctuation pattern using different special pattern fluctuation pattern tables, and the first time-saving game During the state and during the second time-saving game state, even if the same winning normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the second starting port may be opened with different opening patterns (opening time, number of openings, opening interval).

During the first time-saving gaming state and during the second time-saving gaming state, special symbol fluctuation patterns can be determined using different special symbol variation pattern tables, and during the first time-saving gaming state and during the second time-saving gaming state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern can be determined using different special symbol fluctuation pattern tables. Even if the same winning normal symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the second starting port may be opened with the same opening pattern (opening time, number of openings, opening interval).

When the advantageous state ends without a jackpot game being executed during the continuation of the advantageous state (second time-saving game state) that started from the establishment of the second time-saving condition regarding the number of changes in the special symbol (for example, reaching the specified number of times) does not display the result, but if a jackpot game is executed during the continuation of the advantageous state that started from the establishment of the second time saving condition, and the advantageous state ends after this jackpot game ends, the result display is not performed. May be executed.

If the first ending condition (time saving number of times) or the second ending condition (small winning number) is satisfied during the advantageous state, it is possible to end the advantageous state, and the advantageous state (first time saving gaming state, second time saving gaming state) etc.) ends when the first ending condition is met (the number of short wins is exhausted), the result display is executed, and when the advantageous state ends when the second ending condition is met (the number of small wins is exhausted), the result display is executed. , the result display may not be executed.

It is possible to display an end suggestion screen (result display, display indicating the end of an advantageous state) during the execution of the final fluctuating performance in an advantageous state, and to display a predetermined number of times (remaining hold of the second special symbol) after the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to continue displaying the end suggestion screen until the fluctuating performance (several minutes) is executed, and it is done while the end suggestion screen continues to be displayed, rather than the symbol stop time of the final fluctuating performance in an advantageous state. It may be possible to shorten the variation time of the variation performance.

It is possible to set a plurality of performance modes, and the performance mode set based on the end of the first time-saving game state and the performance mode set based on the end of the second time-saving game state can be made different. Good too.

When the first advantageous state (for example, the second time-saving game state) ends, after a predetermined period has elapsed (the remaining reserve of the second special symbol has been used up) from the end of the advantageous state, a predetermined left-hitting notification (instructing left-handed hitting) is issued. If the second advantageous state (for example, the first time-saving game state) ends, a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the end of the advantageous state (the second special symbol remains pending). It may also be possible to execute a predetermined left-handed hit notification before the ball is played (digested). In addition, when the first advantageous state (for example, the second time-saving gaming state) ends, a predetermined left-hand hit notification (left-hand hit If the second advantageous state (for example, the first time-saving game state) ends, a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the end of the advantageous state (the second special symbol It may be possible to execute a predetermined left-handed hit notification after the remaining reservation is exhausted.

When the first advantageous state (for example, the second time-saving game state) ends, a predetermined left-handed notification can be executed at any one of a plurality of timings (timing according to the remaining reservation of the second special symbol). When the second advantageous state (for example, the first time-saving game state) ends, a predetermined left-handed hitting notification may be executed at timing 1 (immediately after the stop time has elapsed). In addition, when the second advantageous state (for example, the first time-saving game state) ends, a predetermined left-handed notification can be executed at any one of multiple timings (timing according to the remaining reservation of the second special symbol). When the first advantageous state (for example, the second time-saving game state) ends, it may be possible to execute a predetermined left-handed hit notification at timing 1 (immediately after the stop time has elapsed).

When the time-saving gaming state (for example, the second time-saving gaming state) ends, a predetermined left-handed notification can be executed after a predetermined period of time has passed since the time-saving end (the remaining reservation of the second special symbol has been exhausted), and the time-saving end can be completed. From then until a predetermined left hit notification is executed, execution of a predetermined preview performance (pre-read preview performance, jackpot preview performance) corresponding to the normal gaming state may be restricted.

It can be set to multiple production modes, and when the time-saving game state (for example, the second time-saving game state) ends, after a predetermined period has passed (the remaining reservation of the second special symbol is exhausted) from the end of the time-saving game state, the specified left It is possible to execute a hitting notification, and setting a predetermined production mode (initial mode, pre-reading mode) may be restricted from the time saving end until a predetermined left-handed hitting notification is executed.

The second time-saving gaming state can be executed only once between jackpot games, and if the power is restored from a power outage during the normal gaming state after the end of the second time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state must have been executed. It is possible to execute a specific notification (display using an image (for example, a display in a specific mode related to the number of games), lighting of a lamp in a specific mode, etc.) that suggests the following.

The second time-saving gaming state can be executed only once between jackpot games, and when the power is restored from a power outage during the normal gaming state after the end of the second time-saving gaming state, the first notification notifies that the power has been restored. and a second notification indicating that the second time-saving gaming state has been executed (display using an image (for example, a display in a specific mode regarding the number of games), lighting of a lamp in a specific mode, etc.). May be executable.

If the power is restored from a power outage during the normal gaming state after the end of the first advantageous state (first time-saving gaming state), a specific notification regarding the presence or absence of RWM clear (RWM clearing operation or setting change operation has not been performed) If the power is restored from a power outage during the normal gaming state after the end of the second advantageous state (second time-saving gaming state), specific notification regarding the presence or absence of RWM clear will not be performed. You can do it like this.

If the power is restored from a power outage in the second production mode after the first advantageous state (first time-saving gaming state) has ended, even if the control is returned to the first production mode (initial mode) after recovery, the specification regarding the presence or absence of RWM clearing will be determined. If the notification can be executed and the power is restored from a power outage in the second production mode after the end of the second advantageous state (second time-saving gaming state), even if the power is restored to the first production mode (initial mode) after recovery, Specific notification regarding the presence or absence of RWM clearing may not be performed.

Priority is given to the variation of the second special symbol, and when a starting prize of the second special symbol occurs during the normal gaming state and the pre-reading performance of the first special symbol is being executed, the pre-reading performance of the first special symbol is terminated. You can.

When a starting prize is won, the pending icon may be displayed in a first size, and then displayed in a second size. In the second time-saving game state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect, specific images (a customer waiting image, a menu image for making settings related to the effect, a menu image for setting the volume, a menu image for setting the light intensity, a right-handed image) may be displayable. When winning a prize while a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving game state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect, the time-saving system notifies you that the second time-saving game state will be performed without displaying the pending icon in the first size. It may also be possible to perform an introduction effect.

When a starting prize is won, the pending icon may perform the first action when the display starts, and may perform the second action after shifting to the icon. In the second time-saving game state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect, specific images (a customer waiting image, a menu image for making settings related to the effect, a menu image for setting the volume, a menu image for setting the light intensity, a right-handed image) may be displayable. When a starting prize is won when a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving game state before the execution of the time-saving introduction performance, the first action of the hold icon may not be performed and the time-saving introduction performance may be executed.

When a winning is started, the pending icon is displayed in the first shape and may perform an animation operation. In the second time-saving game state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect, specific images (a customer waiting image, a menu image for making settings related to the effect, a menu image for setting the volume, a menu image for setting the light intensity, a right-handed image) may be displayable. When a starting prize is won when a specific image is displayed in a second time-saving game state before execution of the time-saving introduction performance, the time-saving introduction performance may be executed without displaying the first shape of the reservation icon.

When a starting prize is won, the pending icon may be displayed with a first transparency (high transparency), and then may be displayed with a second transparency (low transparency). In the second time-saving game state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect, specific images (a customer waiting image, a menu image for making settings related to the effect, a menu image for setting the volume, a menu image for setting the light intensity, a right-handed image) may be displayable. When winning a prize when a specific image is displayed in a second time-saving game state before execution of the time-saving introduction performance, the time-saving introduction performance may be executed without displaying the reservation icon with the first transparency.

When a winning is started, the icon (pending icon, the icon) may be displayed at the first position (the position before the slide), and then displayed at the second position (the position after the slide). In the second time-saving game state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect, specific images (a customer waiting image, a menu image for making settings related to the effect, a menu image for setting the volume, a menu image for setting the light intensity, a right-handed image) may be displayable. When a starting prize is won when a specific image is displayed in a second time-saving game state before execution of the time-saving introduction performance, the time-saving introduction performance may be executed without displaying the icon in the first position.

In the second time-saving game state before the execution of the time-saving introduction performance, specific images (customer waiting image, menu image for performing settings related to the performance, menu image for volume setting, menu image for setting light intensity, right-handed image) are displayed. When displayed, it may be possible to control the effect sound in the first mode. If you start winning while a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving gaming state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect, the effect sound changes from the first mode to the second mode before the icon (hold icon, the icon) is displayed. It may be possible to control (output winning sound, variable effect sound, and notification sound of the second time-saving game state).

In the second time-saving game state before the execution of the time-saving introduction performance, specific images (customer waiting image, menu image for performing settings related to the performance, menu image for volume setting, menu image for setting light intensity, right-handed image) are displayed. When displayed, it may be possible to control the frame lighting device 10 (frame lamp) to the first mode (light emission mode for waiting for customers, lights out). If you start winning while a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving gaming state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect, the frame lamp changes from the first mode to the second mode (variable effect or time-saving introduction effect) before the pending icon is displayed. It may be possible to change the lighting mode according to the effect. If an error occurs when the frame lamp is in the first mode, it may be possible to change the frame lamp from the first mode to the third mode (error notification mode).

In the second time-saving game state before the execution of the time-saving introduction performance, specific images (customer waiting image, menu image for performing settings related to the performance, menu image for volume setting, menu image for setting light intensity, right-handed image) are displayed. When displayed, it may be possible to set the board illumination device 74 (board lamp) to the first mode (light emitting mode for waiting for customers, lights out). If you start winning while a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving gaming state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect, the board lamp changes from the first mode to the second mode (variable effect or time-saving introduction effect) before the pending icon is displayed. It may be possible to change the lighting mode according to the effect. If an error occurs when the board lamp is in the first mode, it may be possible to control the board lamp from the first mode to the third mode (error notification mode).

In the second time-saving game state before the execution of the time-saving introduction performance, specific images (customer waiting image, menu image for performing settings related to the performance, menu image for volume setting, menu image for setting light intensity, right-handed image) are displayed. While being displayed, it may be possible to change the performance elements (performance accessories, performance buttons, etc.) to the first mode (light-emitting mode for waiting for customers, lights out). If you start winning while a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving gaming state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect, the effect changes from the first mode to the second mode (variable effect or time-saving introduction effect) before the pending icon is displayed. It may also be possible to control the lighting mode according to the effect. If an error occurs when the presentation body is in the first mode, it may be possible to control the presentation body from the first mode to the third mode (error notification mode).

In the second time-saving game state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect, specific images (a customer waiting image, a menu image for making settings related to the effect, a menu image for setting the volume, a menu image for setting the light intensity, a right-handed image) can be displayed, and if you start winning while a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving gaming state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect, the icon (pending icon, the relevant A production pattern may be displayed before the icon) is displayed.

When a starting prize is won, the pending icon is displayed in the first size and then in the second size, and if the starting winning is made when there is no pending while the fluctuation is stopped in the second time-saving gaming state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect. , it may be possible to perform the time-saving introduction effect without displaying the hold icon in the first size.

When a winning is started, the pending icon performs the first action when the display starts, and after shifting to the icon, performs the second action (animation action), and the fluctuation is stopped in the second time-saving gaming state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect. When a starting prize is won when there is no reservation, the first action of the reservation icon may not be performed, and the time-saving introduction effect may be executed.

When a winning is started, the hold icon is displayed in the first shape, then in the second shape, and then the animation is activated.When the icon is in the second time-saving game state before the execution of the time-saving introduction performance and there is no hold while the fluctuation is stopped. In the case of a starting prize winning, the time-saving introduction effect may be executed without displaying the first shape of the pending icon.

When a winning is started, the pending icon is displayed at the first transparency level (high transparency level), and then displayed at the second transparency level (low transparency level), and the icon is in a state where fluctuation is stopped in the second time-saving game state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect. In the case of starting winning when there is no hold and there is no hold, it may be possible to execute the time-saving introduction effect without displaying the hold icon with the first transparency.

When you start winning, the icon (pending icon, the icon) is displayed in the first position (the position before the slide), and then it is displayed in the second position (the position after the slide), and the second time-saving game is played before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect. In the case of starting and winning a prize when the state is in a state where fluctuation is stopped and there is no hold, the time-saving introduction effect may be executed without displaying the icon in the first position.

When a starting prize is won, the pending icon is displayed in the first size, and then in the second size, and in the normal mode or pre-introduction mode, if the starting winning is made after the start of the right-hand hit notification and when the fluctuation is stopped. , the hold icon may not be displayed in the first size and may be shifted to a specific mode (time saving mode).

When a winning is made, the pending icon performs the first action (rotating action, etc.) when the display starts, performs the second action after shifting to the icon, and in the normal mode or pre-introduction mode, after the right-hand hit notification starts. If the player starts winning while the player is at a fluctuation stop, the first action of the hold icon may not be performed and the game may shift to a specific mode (time saving mode).

When a winning is started, the pending icon is displayed in the first shape, then displayed in the second shape, and then performs an animation operation, and in the normal mode or pre-introduction mode, after the start of the right-handed notification, the fluctuation is stopped. Sometimes, when a starting prize is won, the first shape of the pending icon may not be displayed, and the mode may be shifted to a specific mode (time saving mode).

When a starting prize is won, the hold icon is displayed with the first transparency (high transparency), and then with the second transparency (low transparency), and in normal mode or pre-introduction mode, after the start of the right hit notification. When starting and winning a prize while the fluctuation is stopped, the pending icon may not be displayed with the first transparency and may be shifted to a specific mode (time saving mode).

When you start winning, the icon (hold icon, the icon) is displayed in the first position (the position before the slide), and then it is displayed in the second position (the position after the slide). If a start winning occurs after the start of the notification and during the fluctuation stop, the hold icon may not be displayed in the first position and may be shifted to a specific mode (time saving mode).

If the hold icon is movable in the normal gaming state and the second time-saving game state is entered in a state where there is a hold, the operation of the performance symbols and the hold icon will be difficult or impossible to see during the first change in the second time-saving game state. After , the movement (fluctuation) of the production symbol becomes easily visible, but the movement of the pending icon does not need to become easily visible.

If the hold icon is movable in the normal gaming state and the second time-saving game state is entered while there is a hold, the hold icon's action becomes easier to see after the hold icon's action becomes difficult or impossible to see. The small pattern may start changing before the change.

If the second time saving game state is entered while there is a hold, the production symbols will be hidden and then redisplayed during the first change in the second time saving game state, but the hold icon will be hidden and then redisplayed. It does not have to be displayed.

When the second time-saving game state is entered in a state where there is a hold, the small symbols are not hidden, but the hold icon may be hidden.

In a variation that develops into a specific reach (SP reach) when multiple pending icons are displayed, hide the multiple pending icons at the start of a specific reach, temporarily stop the reach loss, and cover after reaching. After displaying the image, as the post-reach occluded image fades out (gradually shrinks or slides, etc.), the pending icon hidden by the post-reach occluded image gradually becomes easier to see. If the power is turned off and then restored while a plurality of pending icons are being displayed, the plurality of pending icons will be hidden before the start of the next fluctuation, and then all the pending icons will be displayed. In the variation of entering the second time-saving gaming state when multiple pending icons are displayed, the multiple pending icons are hidden and then shielded by a shielding image, and then the multiple pending icons that were displayed before the occlusion are The icon may not be displayed again.

In a variation that develops into a specific reach (SP reach) when multiple icons are displayed, multiple icons (pending icon and the relevant icon) are hidden at the start of the specific reach, and a post-reach occlusion image is created. , and then redisplay multiple icons. When recovering after turning off the power while multiple icons are displayed, several icons will be hidden before the next fluctuation starts, and then some (pending icons) will be displayed and others ( The icon) is not redisplayed. In a variation in which the second time-saving game state is entered when a plurality of icons are displayed, the plurality of icons may be hidden and then none of the plurality of icons may be displayed again.

In the second time-saving game state before the execution of the time-saving introduction performance, it may be possible not to output the performance sound. When a starting prize is won in the second time-saving game state before the execution of the time-saving introduction performance, a specific performance sound (winning sound, notification sound of the second time-saving game state) may be output before the display of the pending icon is completed. If the power is restored from a power failure while the hold icon is being displayed, the display of the hold icon may be completed before the effect sound is output.

In the second time-saving game state before the execution of the time-saving introduction performance, specific images (customer waiting image, menu image for performing settings related to the performance, menu image for volume setting, menu image for setting light intensity, right-handed image) are displayed. It may be possible to not output the effect sound while it is being displayed. If you start winning while a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving gaming state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect, a specific effect sound (winning sound, notification sound of the second time-saving gaming state) will be played before the specific image fades out. starts outputting. When the power is restored from a power outage, the output of the effect sound may be started after the fade-out of the restored image is completed.

It may be possible to not output the effect sound when the specific image is displayed in the second time-saving game state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect. If you start winning while a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving gaming state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect, a specific performance sound (winning sound, notification sound of the second time-saving gaming state) will be heard before the display of the performance symbol is completed. starts outputting. When the power is restored from a power failure, the output of the effect sound may be started after the display of the effect pattern is completed.

It may be possible to not output the effect sound when the specific image is displayed in the second time-saving game state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect. If you start winning while a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving game state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect, a specific effect sound (winning sound, second The output of the time-saving gaming state notification sound is started. When the power is restored from a power failure, the output of the effect sound may be started after the display of the small symbol (fourth symbol) is completed.

When a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving game state before execution of the time-saving introduction performance, it is possible to set the frame lamp to the first mode without outputting the performance sound. If you start and win a prize while a specific image is being displayed in the second time-saving gaming state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect, the frame lamp will change from the first mode to the second mode (although the frame lamp and the effect sound are controlled at the same timing). The output of the effect sound may be started before the mode (the light emission mode according to the variable effect or the second time-saving game state). When the power is restored from the power outage, the output of the sound may start after the frame lamp emits light.

When a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving game state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect, it is possible to set the board lamp to the first mode (light-emitting mode for waiting for customers, lights out) without outputting the effect sound. It is. If you start and win a prize while a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving gaming state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect, the board lamp and sound will be controlled at the same timing, but the board lamp will change from the first mode to the second mode (fluctuation). The output of the effect sound may be started before the light emitting mode corresponding to the effect or the second time saving game state is reached. When the power is restored from the power outage, the output of sound may start after the panel lamp emits light.

When a specific image is displayed in the second time-saving game state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect, the effect sound is not output and the effects (actual objects, effect buttons, etc.) are changed to the first mode (light-emitting mode for waiting for customers). , off). If you start and win a prize while a specific image is being displayed in the second time-saving game state before the execution of the time-saving introduction effect, the effect and the sound are controlled at the same timing, but the effect changes from the first mode to the second mode (fluctuation). The output of the effect sound is started before the light emitting mode corresponding to the effect or the second time saving game state is reached. When the power is restored from the power outage, the output of the sound may be started after the presentation body starts operating.

(Configuration of gaming machine according to the present invention and its effects)
As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present invention may have the following configuration. Note that the parentheses indicate the correspondence with the embodiment, and are merely examples.

The gaming machine according to configuration 1 includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for variably displaying a symbol and then displaying a symbol in a predetermined manner based on the result of the special game determination. a symbol control means that notifies the result of the special game determination by stopping and displaying the symbol after the elapse of a variable time; a first game state; and a second game that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. a game state control means that can control the state (time-saving game state), and a performance control means that controls a performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means is configured to display a variable display of the symbols. It is possible to notify the result of the special game determination by variably displaying the performance symbols in response to the above, and by stopping and displaying the performance symbols in response to the stop display of the symbols. When a predetermined condition regarding the number of executions is satisfied, based on the result of the special game determination, after starting to fluctuate the effect symbols, a first predetermined image (shielding image 710) is displayed and the effect symbols are hidden. and a first effect that hides the first predetermined image and displays the effect symbol after a first predetermined time has elapsed, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the result of the special game determination is Based on this, a second predetermined image (shielding image 740) different from the first predetermined image is displayed during the variable display of the effect pattern, the effect pattern is hidden, and the second predetermined image is displayed after a second predetermined time has elapsed. It is possible to perform a second performance in which the image is hidden and the performance symbols are displayed, and when the first performance is executed, the game is controlled to the second gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when the predetermined condition regarding the number of executions of the special game determination is satisfied (when the predetermined number of times is reached), the first predetermined image is displayed to block the performance symbols, thereby transitioning to the special state. It is possible to make players expect this and improve their interest. Moreover, by displaying another second predetermined image and hiding the performance symbols even when the prescribed number of times has not been reached, it is possible to make the player expect a special performance. By suddenly hiding the presentation design, it is possible to create a sense of surprise and make the player's heart flutter. This makes it possible to diversify the variations of production and improve the level of interest.

The gaming machine according to configuration 2 includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for variably displaying symbols based on the result of the special game determining, and then displaying symbols in a predetermined manner based on the result of the special game determination. a symbol control means that notifies the result of the special game determination by stopping and displaying the symbol after the elapse of a variable time; a first game state; and a second game that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. a game state control means that can control the state (time-saving game state), and a performance control means that controls a performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means is configured to display a variable display of the symbols. The result of the special game determination can be notified by variably displaying the first performance symbol (performance symbol 701) in response to the above, and by stopping and displaying the first performance symbol in response to the stop display of the symbol. is possible, and in response to the fluctuating display of the symbol, a second performance symbol (small symbol 702) different from the first performance symbol is variably displayed, and in response to the stop display of the symbol, the second performance symbol is displayed in a variable manner. By displaying the special game in a stopped state, it is possible to notify the result of the special game determination, and when a predetermined condition regarding the number of executions of the special game determination is satisfied, based on the result of the special game determination, the first After starting to fluctuate the effect symbols, a first predetermined image (shielding image 710) is displayed and the first effect symbol is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the If a first performance that displays a first performance symbol is executable and the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the first predetermined image is displayed during the variable display of the first performance symbol based on the result of the special game determination. Displaying a second predetermined image (shielding image 740) different from the above and hiding the first effect pattern, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, hiding the second predetermined image and displaying the first effect pattern. When the first performance is executed, the second performance is controlled to be in the second game state, and the first performance symbols are hidden by the first performance or the second performance. The second effect pattern can be displayed even when the player is in the game.

According to the above configuration, by displaying the second performance symbol even when the first performance symbol is not displayed, the player can confirm the fluctuation state of the special symbol.

The gaming machine according to configuration 3 includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for variably displaying symbols based on the result of the special game determining, and then displaying a symbol in a predetermined manner. a symbol control means that notifies the result of the special game determination by stopping and displaying the symbol after the elapse of a variable time; a first game state; and a second game that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. a game state control means that can control the state (time-saving game state), and a performance control means that controls a performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means is configured to display a variable display of the symbols. It is possible to notify the result of the special game determination by variably displaying the performance symbols in response to the above, and by stopping and displaying the performance symbols in response to the stop display of the symbols. When a predetermined condition regarding the number of executions is satisfied, based on the result of the special game determination, after starting to fluctuate the effect symbols, a first predetermined image (shielding image 710) is displayed and the effect symbols are hidden. and a first effect that hides the first predetermined image and displays the effect symbol after a first predetermined time has elapsed, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the result of the special game determination is Based on this, a second predetermined image (shielding image 740) different from the first predetermined image is displayed during the variable display of the effect pattern, the effect pattern is hidden, and the second predetermined image is displayed after a second predetermined period of time has elapsed. It is possible to execute a second effect in which the image is hidden and the effect pattern is displayed, and when the first effect is executed, the second effect is controlled, and the display time of the first predetermined image is This is different from the display time of the second predetermined image.

According to the above configuration, for example, by lengthening the display time of the first predetermined image, it is possible to give an impression of a special performance when entering the second gaming state, and to increase the player's expectations. Further, by shortening the display time of the second predetermined image, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations.

The gaming machine according to configuration 4 includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for variably displaying symbols and then displaying symbols in a predetermined manner based on the result of the special game determination. a symbol control means that notifies the result of the special game determination by stopping and displaying the symbol after the elapse of a variable time; a first game state; and a second game that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. a game state control means that can control the state (time-saving game state), and a performance control means that controls a performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means is configured to control when the symbol starts to fluctuate. When performing a variation start operation of the production symbol, after the variation start operation, a variation display of the production symbol is performed, and before the stop display of the symbol, a variation stop operation of the production symbol is performed, and It is possible to stop and display the effect symbols in response to the stop display of the symbols, and when a predetermined condition regarding the number of executions of the special game determination is satisfied, the effect symbols are displayed based on the result of the special game determination. After starting to vary, a first predetermined image (shielding image 710) is displayed and the effect pattern is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the effect pattern is displayed. If the first performance is executable and the predetermined condition is not satisfied, a second predetermined image (different from the first predetermined image) is displayed during the variable display of the performance symbols based on the result of the special game determination. It is possible to execute a second effect in which a shielding image 740) is displayed and the effect pattern is hidden, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden and the effect pattern is displayed. When one performance is executed, the first predetermined image can be displayed when the performance symbols start to fluctuate or stop fluctuating under the control to the second gaming state, and the first predetermined image can be displayed during the fluctuation display of the performance symbols. The second predetermined image can be displayed.

According to the above configuration, by causing the first predetermined image to appear at the timing of the start of variation of the first performance symbol, it is possible to sufficiently secure time for displaying the first predetermined image even if the variation time is short. Moreover, by making the second predetermined image appear during the variable display of the first performance symbol, it is possible to improve the interest during the variable display.

The gaming machine according to configuration 5 includes: an acquisition unit that acquires determination information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; and a determination unit that determines whether or not to play a special game based on the determination information. , a symbol control means for notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying the symbols in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the symbols after a predetermined variable time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination; a holding means capable of holding information up to a predetermined number; and a gaming state control means capable of controlling a first gaming state and a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. and a performance control means for controlling a performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means is capable of displaying a specific image (pending icon) corresponding to the determination information, and the performance control means is capable of displaying a specific image (hold icon) corresponding to the determination information, It is possible to notify the result of the special game determination by causing the performance symbols to be displayed in a variable manner in response to the fluctuating display of the symbols, and to stop displaying the performance symbols in response to the stop display of the symbols. In a case where a predetermined condition regarding the number of executions of the game determination is satisfied, the effect pattern starts to fluctuate based on the result of the special game judgment, and then the first predetermined image (shielding image 710) is displayed and the effect pattern changes. It is possible to execute a first effect in which the first predetermined image is hidden and the effect pattern is displayed after a first predetermined time has elapsed, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the special game determination Based on the result, a second predetermined image (shielding image 740) different from the first predetermined image is displayed while the effect pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, and the effect pattern is hidden, and after a second predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern is displayed. It is possible to execute a second effect in which the second predetermined image is hidden and the effect pattern is displayed, and when the first effect is executed, the second play state is set, and the first predetermined image is The specific image is hidden during display, and the specific image is displayed while the second predetermined image is displayed.

According to the above configuration, while the first predetermined image is being displayed, neither the performance symbols nor the specific image are displayed, so that the player can draw more attention to the first predetermined image. In addition, since it involves a transition of the gaming state, by hiding a specific image, it is possible to smoothly switch to another image (an icon corresponding to the suspension of the second special symbol) when transitioning to a different gaming state. can. While the second predetermined image is displayed, the production symbols are hidden while the specific image is displayed, allowing the player to recognize the current status (whether it is changing, how many pending items, etc.) .

The gaming machine according to configuration 6 includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for variably displaying symbols based on the result of the special game determining, and then displaying a symbol in a predetermined manner. a symbol control means that notifies the result of the special game determination by stopping and displaying the symbol after the elapse of a variable time; a first game state; and a second game that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. a game state control means that can control the state (time-saving game state), and a performance control means that controls a performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means is configured to display a variable display of the symbols. It is possible to notify the result of the special game determination by variably displaying the performance symbols in response to the above, and by stopping and displaying the performance symbols in response to the stop display of the symbols. When a predetermined condition regarding the number of executions is satisfied, based on the result of the special game determination, after starting to fluctuate the effect symbols, a first predetermined image (shielding image 710) is displayed and the effect symbols are hidden. and a first effect that hides the first predetermined image and displays the effect symbol after a first predetermined time has elapsed, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the result of the special game determination is Based on this, a second predetermined image (shielding image 740) different from the first predetermined image is displayed during the variable display of the effect pattern, the effect pattern is hidden, and the second predetermined image is displayed after a second predetermined period of time has elapsed. It is possible to execute a second effect in which the image is hidden and the effect pattern is displayed, and a first effect mode in which the first background image (normal background) is displayed as the background image, and a second effect mode in which the second background image (time-saving background) is displayed as the background image. ) can be set, and when the first performance is executed, the second game state is set, and the second performance mode is displayed. When the first performance mode is performed, the first performance mode is not changed to the second performance mode, but when the first performance is performed, the first performance mode is changed to the second performance mode.

According to the above configuration, since the background image (production mode) is switched by executing the first production, special value can be given to the first production, and the interest can be improved. Further, by executing the first effect, it is possible to smoothly switch the background image (effect mode).

The gaming machine according to configuration 7 includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for variably displaying symbols based on the result of the special game determination, and then displaying a symbol in a predetermined manner. a symbol control means that notifies the result of the special game determination by stopping and displaying the symbol after the elapse of a variable time; a first game state; and a second game that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. and a performance control means that controls the performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means controls the performance in response to the fluctuating display of the symbols. It is possible to notify the result of the special game determination by variably displaying the symbols and stopping and displaying the effect symbols in response to the stop display of the symbols, and a predetermined condition regarding the number of executions of the special game determination. is established, based on the result of the special game determination, after the effect symbols start to fluctuate, a first predetermined image is displayed and the effect symbols are hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the effect symbols are changed. 1. A first performance in which a predetermined image is hidden and the performance symbols are displayed is executable, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the special game determination. a second predetermined image that is different from the first predetermined image and hides the effect pattern, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, a second predetermined image that is hidden and the effect pattern displayed. If the performance is executable and the first performance is executed, the second gaming state is set and the notification performance that prompts the player to play can be executed, and the second performance is performed. does not execute the notification effect, and when the first effect is performed, executes the notification effect.

According to the above configuration, by performing a predetermined notification effect by executing the first effect, it is possible to encourage the player to play an appropriate game, and when the second effect is executed, such notification effect is not performed. The trouble can be reduced.

The gaming machine according to configuration 8 includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for variably displaying symbols based on the result of the special game determining, and then displaying a symbol in a predetermined manner. a symbol control means that notifies the result of the special game determination by stopping and displaying the symbol after the elapse of a variable time; a first game state; and a second game that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. and a performance control means that controls the performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means controls the performance in response to the fluctuating display of the symbols. It is possible to notify the result of the special game determination by variably displaying the symbols and stopping and displaying the effect symbols in response to the stop display of the symbols, and a predetermined condition regarding the number of executions of the special game determination. is established, based on the result of the special game determination, after the effect symbols start to fluctuate, a first predetermined image is displayed and the effect symbols are hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the effect symbols are changed. 1. A first performance in which a predetermined image is hidden and the performance symbols are displayed is executable, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the special game determination. a second predetermined image that is different from the first predetermined image and hides the effect pattern, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, a second predetermined image that is hidden and the effect pattern displayed. If the effect is executable and the first effect is executed, the second game state is set, and in the first effect, when performing the first appearance effect in which the first predetermined image appears, the It is possible to perform a disappearing effect that makes the effect design invisible, and in the second effect, when performing a second appearance effect that causes the second predetermined image to appear, a disappearing effect that causes the effect image to disappear. It is possible to do this.

According to the above configuration, since the appearance effect of the predetermined image and the disappearing effect of the effect pattern are performed, it is possible to smoothly switch the screen without feeling any discomfort.

The gaming machine according to configuration 9 includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for variably displaying symbols based on the result of the special game determining, and then displaying symbols in a predetermined manner based on the result of the special game determination. a symbol control means that notifies the result of the special game determination by stopping and displaying the symbol after the elapse of a variable time; a first game state; and a second game that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. and a performance control means that controls the performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means controls the performance in response to the fluctuating display of the symbols. It is possible to notify the result of the special game determination by variably displaying the symbols and stopping and displaying the effect symbols in response to the stop display of the symbols, and a predetermined condition regarding the number of executions of the special game determination. is established, based on the result of the special game determination, after the effect symbols start to fluctuate, a first predetermined image is displayed and the effect symbols are hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the effect symbols are changed. 1. A first performance in which a predetermined image is hidden and the performance symbols are displayed is executable, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the special game determination. a second predetermined image that is different from the first predetermined image and hides the effect pattern, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, a second predetermined image that is hidden and the effect pattern displayed. If the performance is executable and the first performance is executed, the second gaming state is set, and the execution rate of the second performance is higher than that in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state. The time is higher.

According to the above configuration, since the second effect is executed with a relatively high probability in the first gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored. On the other hand, in the second game state, since the probability of executing the second performance is low, the game can be played without performing any unnecessary performance.

The gaming machine according to configuration 10 includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for variably displaying a symbol based on the result of the special game determination, and then displaying a symbol in a predetermined manner. a symbol control means that notifies the result of the special game determination by stopping and displaying the symbol after the elapse of a variable time; a first game state; and a second game that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. and a performance control means that controls the performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means controls the performance in response to the fluctuating display of the symbols. It is possible to notify the result of the special game determination by variably displaying the symbols and stopping and displaying the effect symbols in response to the stop display of the symbols, and a predetermined condition regarding the number of executions of the special game determination. is established, based on the result of the special game determination, after the effect symbols start to fluctuate, a first predetermined image is displayed and the effect symbols are hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the effect symbols are changed. 1. A first performance in which a predetermined image is hidden and the performance symbols are displayed is executable, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the special game determination. a second predetermined image that is different from the first predetermined image and hides the effect pattern, and after a second predetermined time has elapsed, a second predetermined image that is hidden and the effect pattern displayed. If the performance is executable and the first performance is executed, the second game state is set and the case where the first performance is executed is better than the case where the second performance is executed. A suggestive performance that suggests the relevant performance is likely to be executed.

According to the above configuration, when the first performance is performed, a suggestive performance (pre-introduction mode) that suggests the first performance is performed, but when the second performance is performed, the second performance is Suggestive performance is not performed or is difficult to perform. Therefore, when the first performance is performed, it is possible to increase expectations for the first performance, and when the second performance is performed, it is possible to prevent excessive excitement and avoid raising excessive expectations. It can be done.

The gaming machine according to configuration 11 includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for variably displaying a symbol based on the result of the special game determination, and then displaying a symbol in a predetermined manner based on the result of the special game determination. a symbol control means that notifies the result of the special game determination by stopping and displaying the symbol after the elapse of a variable time; a first game state; and a second game that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. and a performance control means that controls the performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means controls the performance in response to the fluctuating display of the symbols. It is possible to notify the result of the special game determination by variably displaying the symbols and stopping and displaying the effect symbols in response to the stop display of the symbols, and a predetermined condition regarding the number of executions of the special game determination. is established, based on the result of the special game determination, after starting to fluctuate the effect symbols, a first predetermined image (shielding image 710) is displayed, the effect symbols are hidden, and the first predetermined image is displayed. It is possible to perform a first performance in which the first predetermined image is hidden and the performance symbol is displayed after a period of time has elapsed, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the performance is executed based on the result of the special game determination. After the symbols start to fluctuate, the effect symbol suggesting that the special game will not be played is displayed (reach loss), a second predetermined image (shielding image 730) different from the first predetermined image is displayed, and the It is possible to perform a second performance in which the performance pattern is hidden, and after a second predetermined time period has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed, and the execution rate of the second performance is determined by the second performance. It is higher in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when the predetermined condition regarding the number of executions of the special game determination is satisfied, the first predetermined image is displayed to hide the performance symbols, thereby making the player expect a transition to the special state, and increasing the interest. can be improved. In addition, when the above predetermined conditions are not met, even if a performance symbol indicating that the special game will not be played is displayed, the second predetermined image is displayed to hide the performance symbol, thereby reducing player disappointment. be able to. Further, the execution rate of the second performance is set high in the first gaming state. Therefore, in the first game state, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored even if the situation in which the effect symbol indicating that the special game is not played continues to be displayed, and in the second game state, the player can not get bored with the game. It is possible to make the game progress quickly and direct the player's attention to the next game.

The gaming machine according to configuration 12 includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for performing a special game determination as to whether or not to perform a special game, and for displaying symbols in a variable manner based on the result of the special game determination. a symbol control means that notifies the result of the special game determination by stopping and displaying the symbol after the elapse of a variable time; a first game state; and a second game that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. and a performance control means that controls the performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means controls the performance in response to the fluctuating display of the symbols. It is possible to notify the result of the special game determination by variably displaying the symbols and stopping and displaying the effect symbols in response to the stop display of the symbols, and a predetermined condition regarding the number of executions of the special game determination. is established, based on the result of the special game determination, after starting to fluctuate the effect symbols, a first predetermined image (shielding image 710) is displayed, the effect symbols are hidden, and the first predetermined image is displayed. It is possible to perform a first performance in which the first predetermined image is hidden and the performance symbol is displayed after a period of time has elapsed, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the performance is executed based on the result of the special game determination. After the symbols start to fluctuate, the effect symbol suggesting that the special game will not be played is displayed (reach loss), a second predetermined image (shielding image 730) different from the first predetermined image is displayed, and the It is possible to perform a second performance in which the performance pattern is hidden and the second predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed after a second predetermined period of time has elapsed, and even if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second performance is executed. 2. A predetermined image can be displayed.

According to the above configuration, even if the predetermined condition is satisfied, when the second effect is executed, the second predetermined image is displayed, thereby making it possible to reduce player's disappointment.

The gaming machine according to configuration 13 includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for making a special game determination as to whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition; a symbol control means that notifies the result of the special game determination by stopping and displaying the symbol after the elapse of a variable time; a first game state; and a second game that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. and a performance control means that controls the performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means controls the performance in response to the fluctuating display of the symbols. It is possible to notify the result of the special game determination by variably displaying the symbols and stopping and displaying the effect symbols in response to the stop display of the symbols, and a predetermined condition regarding the number of executions of the special game determination. is established, based on the result of the special game determination, after starting to fluctuate the effect symbols, a first predetermined image (shielding image 710) is displayed, the effect symbols are hidden, and the first predetermined image is displayed. It is possible to perform a first performance in which the first predetermined image is hidden and the performance symbol is displayed after a period of time has elapsed, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the performance is executed based on the result of the special game determination. After the symbols start to fluctuate, the effect symbol suggesting that the special game will not be played is displayed (reach loss), a second predetermined image (shielding image 730) different from the first predetermined image is displayed, and the It is possible to perform a second performance in which the performance symbols are hidden, and after a second predetermined time period has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden and the performance symbols are displayed, and based on the result of the special game determination, a special If it is possible to execute a specific performance (ready-to-reach performance) that suggests the possibility that a game will be played, and if it is determined in the special game determination that the special game will not be performed, then the second predetermined performance is executed after executing the specific performance. It is possible to display an image and stop display of the performance symbol suggesting that the special game will not be performed, and if it is determined in the special game determination that the special game will be performed, the specific performance is executed. Then, without displaying the second predetermined image, it is possible to stop displaying the performance symbols suggesting that the special game will be played.

According to the above configuration, when it is determined that a special game will be played, a performance symbol suggesting that a special game will be played can be displayed after the execution of a specific performance to satisfy the player, and if the special game is not played, the player can be satisfied. If it is determined, by displaying the second predetermined image, the player's disappointment can be alleviated and the player can be encouraged to expect that another performance may develop.

The gaming machine according to configuration 14 includes: an acquisition unit that acquires determination information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; and a determination unit that determines whether or not to play a special game based on the determination information. , a symbol control means for notifying the result of the special game determination by displaying the symbols in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the symbols after a predetermined variable time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination; a holding means capable of holding information up to a predetermined number; a gaming state control means capable of controlling a first gaming state and a second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state; and the special game. and a performance control means for controlling the performance based on the result of the determination, the performance control means being capable of displaying a specific image (pending icon) corresponding to the determination information, and corresponding to the fluctuating display of the symbol. The result of the special game determination can be notified by displaying the performance symbols in a variable manner and stopping and displaying the performance symbols in response to the stop display of the symbols, and the number of executions of the special game determination. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on the result of the special game determination, after starting to fluctuate the effect symbols, displaying a first predetermined image (shielding image 710) and hiding the effect symbols; It is possible to perform a first performance in which the first predetermined image is hidden and the performance symbol is displayed after a first predetermined time has elapsed, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, based on the result of the special game determination, , after starting to fluctuate the effect symbols, display the effect symbols suggesting that the special game will not be played (reach loss), and display a second predetermined image (shielding image 730) different from the first predetermined image. A second effect can be performed in which the second predetermined image is hidden and the effect pattern is displayed after a second predetermined time period has elapsed, and the first predetermined image is being displayed. And while the second predetermined image is being displayed, the specific image is hidden.

According to the above configuration, since neither the effect pattern nor the specific image is displayed while the first predetermined image is displayed, more attention can be drawn to the first predetermined image. Moreover, when a transition of gaming states is involved, by hiding the specific image, it is possible to smoothly switch to another image (an icon corresponding to the second special symbol) in a different gaming state. By hiding the specific image even while the second predetermined image is being displayed, it is possible to smoothly switch to the next screen after displaying the effect pattern suggesting that the special game will not be played.

The gaming machine according to configuration 15 includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for variably displaying symbols based on the result of the special game determining, and then displaying symbols in a predetermined manner based on the result of the special game determination. a symbol control means that notifies the result of the special game determination by stopping and displaying the symbol after the elapse of a variable time; a first game state; and a second game that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. and a performance control means that controls the performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means controls the performance in response to the fluctuating display of the symbols. It is possible to notify the result of the special game determination by variably displaying the symbols and stopping and displaying the effect symbols in response to the stop display of the symbols, and a predetermined condition regarding the number of executions of the special game determination. is established, based on the result of the special game determination, after starting to fluctuate the effect symbols, a first predetermined image (shielding image 710) is displayed, the effect symbols are hidden, and the first predetermined image is displayed. It is possible to perform a first performance in which the first predetermined image is hidden and the performance symbol is displayed after a period of time has elapsed, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the performance is executed based on the result of the special game determination. After the symbols start to fluctuate, the effect symbol suggesting that the special game will not be played is displayed (reach loss), a second predetermined image (shielding image 730) different from the first predetermined image is displayed, and the It is possible to perform a second effect in which the effect design is hidden, and after a second predetermined time period has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden and the effect pattern is displayed, and when displaying the first predetermined image, a second effect is emitted. When the means is caused to emit light in a first mode and the second predetermined image is displayed, the light emitting means may be caused to emit light in the second mode, and when in the second gaming state, the light emitting means may be caused to emit light in a third mode. It is possible.

According to the above configuration, the switching of the game and the game state can be indicated by the light emitting mode of the light emitting means.

The gaming machine according to configuration 16 includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for variably displaying a symbol based on the result of the special game determination, and then displaying a symbol in a predetermined manner. a symbol control means that notifies the result of the special game determination by stopping and displaying the symbol after the elapse of a variable time; a first game state; and a second game that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. and a performance control means that controls the performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means controls the performance in response to the fluctuating display of the symbols. It is possible to notify the result of the special game determination by variably displaying the symbols and stopping and displaying the effect symbols in response to the stop display of the symbols, and a predetermined condition regarding the number of executions of the special game determination. is established, based on the result of the special game determination, after starting to fluctuate the effect symbols, a first predetermined image (shielding image 710) is displayed, the effect symbols are hidden, and the first predetermined image is displayed. It is possible to perform a first performance in which the first predetermined image is hidden and the performance symbol is displayed after a period of time has elapsed, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the performance is executed based on the result of the special game determination. After the symbols start to fluctuate, the effect symbol suggesting that the special game will not be played is displayed (reach loss), a second predetermined image (shielding image 730) different from the first predetermined image is displayed, and the It is possible to perform a second performance in which the performance pattern is hidden, and after a second predetermined time period has elapsed, the second predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed, and the first predetermined image is a variation of the performance pattern. The second predetermined image is displayed after a first period has elapsed from the start of the display, and the second predetermined image is displayed after a second period, which is longer than the first period, has elapsed from the start of the fluctuating display of the effect symbols.

According to the above configuration, if the predetermined condition regarding the number of executions of special game determination is satisfied, the first predetermined image can be made to appear early from the start of variation, and even if the variation time is short, the first predetermined image can be reliably displayed. can be made to appear.

The gaming machine according to configuration 17 includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for variably displaying a symbol based on the result of the special game determination, and then displaying a symbol in a predetermined manner. a symbol control means that notifies the result of the special game determination by stopping and displaying the symbol after the elapse of a variable time; a first game state; and a second game that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. and a performance control means that controls the performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means controls the performance in response to the fluctuating display of the symbols. It is possible to notify the result of the special game determination by displaying symbols in a variable manner and stopping and displaying the effect symbols in response to the stop display of the symbols, and a predetermined condition regarding the number of executions of the special game determination. is established, based on the result of the special game determination, after starting to fluctuate the effect symbols, a first predetermined image (shielding image 710) is displayed, the effect symbols are hidden, and the first predetermined image is displayed. It is possible to perform a first performance that hides the first predetermined image and displays the performance symbols after a period of time has elapsed, and if it is determined in the special game determination that a special game is to be performed, the variation of the performance symbols is started. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is possible to perform a second performance that displays the performance symbols (a set of symbols) suggesting that the special game is to be played, and even when the first performance is performed, the second performance When the performance is executed, the game is controlled to the second gaming state, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, when it is determined that the special game will be performed in the special game determination. The presentation mode of the second presentation is different.

According to the above configuration, when the predetermined condition regarding the number of executions of the special game determination is satisfied, the first predetermined image is displayed to hide the performance symbols, thereby making the player expect a transition to the second game state, and increasing the interest. can improve sexual performance. In addition, even when the predetermined conditions are not satisfied, if a performance symbol suggesting that a special game is to be played is displayed, the second game state is entered. By making the performance mode different when it is determined that a special game is to be performed when the predetermined condition is met and when the predetermined condition is not met, it is possible to diversify the production and improve interest. can be done.

The gaming machine according to configuration 18 includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for variably displaying a symbol based on the result of the special game determination, and then displaying a symbol in a predetermined manner. a symbol control means that notifies the result of the special game determination by stopping and displaying the symbol after the elapse of a variable time; a first game state; and a second game that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. and a performance control means that controls the performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means controls the performance in response to the fluctuating display of the symbols. It is possible to notify the result of the special game determination by variably displaying the symbols and stopping and displaying the effect symbols in response to the stop display of the symbols, and a predetermined condition regarding the number of executions of the special game determination. is established, based on the result of the special game determination, after starting to fluctuate the effect symbols, a first predetermined image (shielding image 710) is displayed, the effect symbols are hidden, and the first predetermined image is displayed. It is possible to execute a first performance that hides the first predetermined image and displays the performance symbols after a period of time has elapsed, and if it is determined in the special game determination that a special game is to be performed, the variation of the performance symbols is started. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is possible to perform a second performance that displays the performance symbols (a set of symbols) suggesting that the special game is to be played, and even when the first performance is performed, the second performance When the performance is executed, the second game state is controlled and the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the special game determination determines that the special game will be played, and the case that the special game is determined not to be played. The performance mode of the first performance differs depending on the case.

According to the above configuration, when the predetermined condition regarding the number of executions of the special game determination is satisfied, by varying the performance mode of the first performance, it is possible to diversify the performance and improve the interest. .

The gaming machine according to configuration 19 includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for variably displaying a symbol based on the result of the special game determination, and then displaying a symbol in a predetermined manner. a symbol control means that notifies the result of the special game determination by stopping and displaying the symbol after the elapse of a variable time; a first game state; and a second game that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. and a performance control means that controls the performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means controls the performance in response to the fluctuating display of the symbols. It is possible to notify the result of the special game determination by variably displaying the symbols and stopping and displaying the effect symbols in response to the stop display of the symbols, and a predetermined condition regarding the number of executions of the special game determination. is established, based on the result of the special game determination, after starting to fluctuate the effect symbols, a first predetermined image (shielding image 710) is displayed, the effect symbols are hidden, and the first predetermined image is displayed. It is possible to execute a first performance that hides the first predetermined image and displays the performance symbols after a period of time has elapsed, and if it is determined in the special game determination that a special game is to be performed, the variation of the performance symbols is started. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is possible to perform a second performance that displays the performance symbols (a set of symbols) suggesting that the special game is to be played, and even when the first performance is performed, the second performance Even when a performance is executed, it is possible to execute a notification performance that encourages the player to play by controlling to the second gaming state, and the notification performance when the first performance is performed (FIG. 13(f) )) and the notification effect when the second effect is performed (FIG. 29(b)) are different in effect form.

According to the above configuration, by making the performance mode of the notification performance different between when the first performance is performed and when the second performance is performed, the presentation style can be made different even when transitioning to the same second game state. For example, the transition to the second gaming state via the first performance can be made special.

The gaming machine according to configuration 20 includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for variably displaying symbols based on the result of the special game determining, and then displaying a symbol in a predetermined manner. a symbol control means that notifies the result of the special game determination by stopping and displaying the symbol after the elapse of a variable time; a first game state; and a second game that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. and a performance control means that controls the performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means controls the performance in response to the fluctuating display of the symbols. It is possible to notify the result of the special game determination by variably displaying the symbols and stopping and displaying the effect symbols in response to the stop display of the symbols, and a predetermined condition regarding the number of executions of the special game determination. is established, based on the result of the special game determination, after starting to fluctuate the effect symbols, a first predetermined image (shielding image 710) is displayed, the effect symbols are hidden, and the first predetermined image is displayed. It is possible to execute a first performance that hides the first predetermined image and displays the performance symbols after a period of time has elapsed, and if it is determined in the special game determination that a special game is to be performed, the variation of the performance symbols is started. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a second performance can be executed that displays the performance symbols (a set of symbols) suggesting that the special game is to be played, and when in the second game state, a specific mode (time saving mode) is executed. It is possible to execute a performance, and whether the first performance is executed or the second performance is executed, the second game state is controlled, and when the second performance is performed, the game When a predetermined notification image (FIG. 29(c)) that calls attention to the person is displayed and then the specific mode is entered and the first effect is performed, the predetermined notification image is not displayed and The mode is shifted to the specific mode (FIGS. 13(a) to 14(a)).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to call the player's attention when transitioning to the second gaming state via the second performance. On the other hand, when transitioning to the second gaming state via the first performance, it is possible to immediately transition to the specific mode.

The gaming machine according to configuration 21 includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for making a special game determination as to whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for variably displaying symbols and then displaying a predetermined symbol based on the result of the special game determination. a symbol control means that notifies the result of the special game determination by stopping and displaying the symbol after the elapse of a variable time; a first game state; and a second game that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. a game state control means capable of controlling the state; an updating means (S3303) that performs an updating process for updating the number of operations indicating the number of executions of the special game determination every time the special game determination is performed; performance control means for controlling the performance based on the results of the above, and the performance control means variably displays the performance symbols in response to the fluctuating display of the symbols, and displays the performance symbols in response to the static display of the symbols. By stopping and displaying the production symbols, it is possible to notify the result of the special game determination, and when a predetermined condition regarding the number of executions of the special game determination is satisfied, based on the result of the special game determination, After the effect pattern starts to fluctuate, a first predetermined image (shielding image 710) is displayed and the effect pattern is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the effect is changed. If it is possible to execute a first performance that displays symbols, and if it is determined in the special game determination that a special game will be performed, it is suggested that the special game be performed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting to fluctuate the performance symbols. It is possible to execute a second performance that displays the performance symbols (symbol alignment), and whether the first performance is executed or the second performance is executed, the second performance is controlled to the second game state. When the first effect is performed, the number of operations is not reset, and when the second effect is performed, the number of operations is reset.

According to the above configuration, even when the first performance is performed, the number of operations can be updated without being reset, and there is no need to switch processes before and after the first performance, so the processing load can be reduced.

The gaming machine according to configuration 22 includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for variably displaying symbols and then displaying a predetermined symbol based on the result of the special game determination. a symbol control means that notifies the result of the special game determination by stopping and displaying the symbol after the elapse of a variable time; a first game state; and a second game that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. and a performance control means that controls the performance based on the result of the special game determination, and the performance control means controls the performance in response to the fluctuating display of the symbols. It is possible to notify the result of the special game determination by variably displaying the symbols and stopping and displaying the effect symbols in response to the stop display of the symbols, and a predetermined condition regarding the number of executions of the special game determination. is established, based on the result of the special game determination, after starting to fluctuate the effect symbols, a first predetermined image (shielding image 710) is displayed, the effect symbols are hidden, and the first predetermined image is displayed. It is possible to execute a first performance that hides the first predetermined image and displays the performance symbols after a period of time has elapsed, and if it is determined in the special game determination that a special game is to be performed, the variation of the performance symbols is started. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is possible to perform a second performance that displays the performance symbols (a set of symbols) suggesting that the special game is to be played, and even when the first performance is performed, the second performance Even when the performance is executed, the second game state is controlled, and if it is determined in the special game determination that the special game is not to be played, the first predetermined image is displayed and then the second game state is entered. The first time period from when the second predetermined image is displayed to when the second game state is entered is shorter than the second time period from when the second predetermined image is displayed to when the game state is shifted to the second gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when the first predetermined image is displayed, it is possible to shift to the second gaming state in a relatively short time, and it is possible to improve interest.

The gaming machine according to configuration 23 includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for determining a symbol fluctuation time based on the result of the special game determination. a time determining means, a symbol control means for displaying the symbols in a variable manner when the special game determination is performed, and then stopping and displaying the symbols after the elapse of the variable time; a production control means for controlling the effect, the production control means variably displaying the production pattern in response to the variable display of the pattern, and stopping displaying the production pattern in response to the stop display of the pattern. is possible, and after starting to fluctuate the performance symbols based on the result of the special game determination, display the performance symbols suggesting that the special game will not be played (reach loss), and display the first predetermined image ( It is possible to execute a first effect in which a shielding image 730) is displayed and the effect pattern is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the effect pattern is displayed; Based on the result of the game determination, a second predetermined image (shielding image 740) different from the first predetermined image is displayed during the variable display of the effect symbols, and the effect symbols are hidden, and a second predetermined period of time has elapsed. It is possible to perform a second performance in which the second predetermined image is later hidden and the performance symbol suggesting that the special game is not played is displayed, and the second performance is more effective than the first performance when the second performance is performed. When the effect is performed, the variation time of the symbol is longer.

According to the above configuration, in the first performance, after the performance symbols are displayed in a loss mode, the performance symbols are hidden by the first predetermined image, so that the player is given the expectation that the temporary loss may develop into some kind of performance. You can do it. Furthermore, in the second performance, by hiding the performance symbols during the fluctuating display of the performance symbols, it is possible to create a sense of surprise and make the player's heart flutter. Since the predetermined images appear at various timings and the performance patterns are hidden, the variations of the performance can be diversified and the interest level can be improved.

The gaming machine according to configuration 24 includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for determining a symbol fluctuation time based on the result of the special game determination. a time determining means, a symbol control means for displaying the symbols in a variable manner when the special game determination is performed, and then stopping and displaying the symbols after the elapse of the variable time; a production control means for controlling the display, the production control means variably displaying the first production symbol in response to the variable display of the symbol, and displaying the first production symbol in response to the stop display of the symbol. A second effect pattern different from the first effect pattern can be displayed in a static manner in response to the variable display of the pattern, and a second effect pattern different from the first effect pattern is displayed in a variable manner in response to the static display of the pattern. Based on the result of the special game determination, after the first performance symbol starts to fluctuate, the first performance symbol suggesting that the special game will not be played is displayed ( reach loss), displays a first predetermined image (shielding image 730) and hides the first effect pattern, and after a first predetermined time has passed, hides the first predetermined image and displays the first effect pattern. A second predetermined image (shielding image 740) different from the first predetermined image is displayed during the variable display of the first effect symbol based on the result of the special game determination. It is possible to perform a second performance in which the first performance symbol is hidden and the second predetermined image is hidden and the first performance symbol is displayed after a second predetermined time has elapsed, and the first performance or Even when the first performance pattern is hidden by the second performance, the second performance pattern can be displayed.

According to the above configuration, by displaying the second performance symbol even when the first performance symbol is not displayed, the player can confirm the fluctuation state of the special symbol.

The gaming machine according to configuration 25 includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for determining a symbol fluctuation time based on the result of the special game determination. a time determining means, a symbol control means for displaying the symbols in a variable manner when the special game determination is performed, and then stopping and displaying the symbols after the elapse of the variable time; a production control means for controlling the effect, the production control means variably displaying the production pattern in response to the variable display of the pattern, and stopping displaying the production pattern in response to the stop display of the pattern. is possible, and after starting to fluctuate the performance symbols based on the result of the special game determination, display the performance symbols suggesting that the special game will not be played (reach loss), and display the first predetermined image ( It is possible to execute a first effect in which a shielding image 730) is displayed and the effect pattern is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the effect pattern is displayed; Based on the result of the game determination, a second predetermined image (shielding image 740) different from the first predetermined image is displayed during the variable display of the effect symbols, and the effect symbols are hidden, and a second predetermined period of time has elapsed. Later, a second effect can be executed in which the second predetermined image is hidden and the effect pattern is displayed, and the display time of the first predetermined image and the display time of the second predetermined image are different.

According to the above configuration, for example, by shortening the display time of the first predetermined image, it is possible to momentarily raise expectations when the reach is lost, and by lengthening the display time of the second predetermined image, the game It is possible to instantly raise people's expectations and maintain those expectations for a certain amount of time.

The gaming machine according to configuration 26 includes: an acquisition unit that acquires determination information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; a determination unit that makes a special game determination as to whether or not to play a special game based on the determination information; a holding means that can hold information up to a predetermined number; a variable time determining means that determines a symbol fluctuation time based on the result of the special game determination; A symbol control means for stopping and displaying the symbol after the elapse of the variable time after displaying the symbol, and a production control means for controlling the production based on the result of the special game determination, and the production control means includes the A specific image (holding icon) corresponding to the determination information can be displayed, and a production pattern is displayed in a variable manner in response to the variation display of the pattern, and the production pattern is stopped and displayed in response to the stop display of the pattern. is possible, and after starting to fluctuate the performance symbols based on the result of the special game determination, display the performance symbols suggesting that the special game will not be played (reach loss), and display the first predetermined image ( It is possible to execute a first effect in which a shielding image 730) is displayed and the effect pattern is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the effect pattern is displayed; Based on the result of the game determination, a second predetermined image (shielding image 740) different from the first predetermined image is displayed during the variable display of the effect symbols, and the effect symbols are hidden, and a second predetermined period of time has elapsed. Later, it is possible to execute a second effect in which the second predetermined image is hidden and the effect pattern is displayed, and while the first predetermined image is being displayed, the specific image is hidden, and the second predetermined image is The specific image is displayed while .

According to the above configuration, since neither the effect pattern nor the specific image is displayed while the first predetermined image is displayed, more attention can be drawn to the first predetermined image. While the second predetermined image is displayed, the production symbols are hidden while the specific image is displayed, allowing the player to recognize the current status (whether it is changing, how many pending items, etc.) .

The gaming machine according to configuration 27 includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for determining a symbol fluctuation time based on the result of the special game determination. a time determining means, a symbol control means for displaying the symbols in a variable manner when the special game determination is performed, and then stopping and displaying the symbols after the elapse of the variable time; a production control means for controlling the effect, the production control means variably displaying the production pattern in response to the variable display of the pattern, and stopping displaying the production pattern in response to the stop display of the pattern. is possible, and after starting to fluctuate the performance symbols based on the result of the special game determination, display the performance symbols suggesting that the special game will not be played (reach loss), and display the first predetermined image ( It is possible to execute a first effect in which a shielding image 730) is displayed and the effect pattern is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the effect pattern is displayed; Based on the result of the game determination, a second predetermined image (shielding image 740) different from the first predetermined image is displayed during the variable display of the effect symbols, and the effect symbols are hidden, and a second predetermined period of time has elapsed. It is possible to execute a second performance that later hides the second predetermined image and displays the performance symbol, and based on the result of the special game determination, a specific performance that suggests the possibility that a special game will be played ( The specific effect is not executed before the second predetermined image is displayed, and the specific effect is executed before the first predetermined image is displayed.

According to the above configuration, the player's expectations can be raised by the specific performance, and even if a performance pattern indicating a failure from the specific performance is displayed, the player's expectations can be maintained by the appearance of the first predetermined image. On the other hand, in the second performance, the second predetermined image is suddenly displayed without going through the specific performance, so that the player's expectations can be instantly raised.

The gaming machine according to configuration 28 includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for determining a symbol fluctuation time based on the result of the special game determination. a time determining means, a symbol control means for displaying the symbols in a variable manner when the special game determination is performed, and then stopping and displaying the symbols after the elapse of the variable time; a production control means for controlling the effect, the production control means variably displaying the production pattern in response to the variable display of the pattern, and stopping displaying the production pattern in response to the stop display of the pattern. is possible, and after starting to fluctuate the performance symbols based on the result of the special game determination, display the performance symbols suggesting that the special game will not be played (reach loss), and display the first predetermined image ( It is possible to execute a first effect in which a shielding image 730) is displayed and the effect pattern is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the effect pattern is displayed; Based on the result of the game determination, a second predetermined image (shielding image 740) different from the first predetermined image is displayed during the variable display of the effect symbols, and the effect symbols are hidden, and a second predetermined period of time has elapsed. It is possible to execute a second effect in which the second predetermined image is hidden and the effect pattern is displayed afterwards, and when the first effect is executed, there are two effects before and after the first predetermined image is displayed. When the background images are different and the second effect is executed, the background images are the same before and after the second predetermined image is displayed.

According to the above configuration, when the first effect is performed, the first predetermined image is displayed before and after the background image is switched, so that the background image can be smoothly transitioned. On the other hand, when the second effect is performed, the image suddenly switches to the second predetermined image while the effect symbols are changing, and then returns to the original state, which instantly increases the player's expectations and improves the game. You can prevent it from becoming monotonous.

(Configuration 29)
The gaming machine according to configuration 29 includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for determining a symbol fluctuation time based on the result of the special game determination. a time determining means, a symbol control means for displaying the symbols in a variable manner when the special game determination is performed, and then stopping and displaying the symbols after the elapse of the variable time; a production control means for controlling the effect, the production control means starts varying the plurality of production symbols in response to the start of variation of the symbols, and then stops the plurality of production symbols in a predetermined order; It is possible to stop display the plurality of performance symbols in accordance with the stop display of the symbols, and based on the result of the special game determination, it is possible to decide not to perform the special game after starting to fluctuate the performance symbols. Displaying the suggested effect pattern (reach loss), displaying a first predetermined image (shielding image 730) and hiding the effect pattern, and hiding the first predetermined image after a first predetermined time period has elapsed. A first performance that displays the performance symbols is executable, and based on the result of the special game determination, a second predetermined image (shielding image 740) different from the first predetermined image during the variable display of the performance symbols. It is possible to execute a second performance in which the second predetermined image is hidden and the performance pattern is displayed after a second predetermined time has elapsed, and the second performance is performed. If the first performance is performed, the plurality of performance symbols may not be stopped in the predetermined order, and if the first performance is performed, the plurality of performance symbols may be stopped in the predetermined order. When one performance is performed, the time from when the first performance symbol (left symbol) of the plurality of performance symbols stops until the second performance symbol (right symbol) stops; The time from when the effect pattern (right pattern) stops until the third effect pattern (middle pattern) stops may be different.

According to the above configuration, when the first performance is executed, the plurality of performance symbols stop in sequence and there is time until the third performance symbol stops, so that the player can be made to look forward to it. Since the first predetermined image is displayed even when the third performance symbol is stopped, player's disappointment can be alleviated and the possibility of further development can be left open. When the second performance is executed, since the plurality of performance symbols do not stop in sequence, the performance can be unexpected and the interest can be improved.

(Configuration 30)
The gaming machine according to configuration 30 includes a determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determining means for determining a symbol fluctuation time based on the result of the special game determination. a time determining means, a symbol control means for displaying the symbols in a variable manner when the special game determination is performed, and then stopping and displaying the symbols after the elapse of the variable time; a production control means for controlling the effect, the production control means variably displaying the production pattern in response to the variable display of the pattern, and stopping displaying the production pattern in response to the stop display of the pattern. is possible, and after starting to fluctuate the performance symbols based on the result of the special game determination, display the performance symbols suggesting that the special game will not be played (reach loss), and display the first predetermined image ( It is possible to execute a first effect in which a shielding image 730) is displayed and the effect pattern is hidden, and after a first predetermined time has elapsed, the first predetermined image is hidden and the effect pattern is displayed; Based on the result of the game determination, a second predetermined image (shielding image 740) different from the first predetermined image is displayed during the variable display of the effect symbols, and the effect symbols are hidden, and a second predetermined period of time has elapsed. It is possible to execute a second effect in which the second predetermined image is hidden and the effect pattern is displayed afterwards, and when the first effect is executed, there are two effects before and after the first predetermined image is displayed. When the display mode of the effect pattern is different and the second effect is executed, the display mode of the effect pattern is the same before and after the second predetermined image is displayed.

According to the above configuration, when the first effect is performed, the mode of the effect pattern changes via the first predetermined image, so that the mode of the effect pattern can be smoothly changed. In addition, when the second effect is performed, although there is no change in the appearance of the effect pattern before and after the second predetermined image is displayed, the second predetermined image suddenly appears, so the effect can be unexpected. , it is possible to improve interest.

The configurations of the embodiments and their modifications described so far can be arbitrarily combined as long as they do not contradict each other. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to the configurations according to the above-described embodiments and their modifications, and other modifications may be made.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 45 1st starting hole 47 2nd starting hole 50 1st big winning hole 56 2nd big winning hole 60 1st special symbol display 61 2nd special symbol display 62 Normal symbol display 63 1st special symbol Pending display 64 Second special symbol pending display 701 Production symbol 702 Small symbol 710 Hiding image 720 Pre-introduction blocking image 730 Post-reach blocking image 740 Fluctuation blocking image HA 1st pending icon HB 2nd pending icon TI The icon

Claims (1)

A determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition;
a symbol control means that notifies the result of the special game determination by displaying the symbol in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the symbol after a predetermined variable time has elapsed based on the result of the special game determination;
A game state control means capable of controlling the game in either a first game state or a second game state different from the first game state;
A performance control means for controlling the performance based on the result of the special game determination,
The performance control means is
It is possible to notify the result of the special game determination by variably displaying the performance symbols in response to the fluctuating display of the symbols, and by haltingly displaying the performance symbols in response to the stop display of the symbols;
It is possible to perform a predetermined notification effect regarding the launch of the game ball,
When a predetermined condition regarding the number of executions of the special game determination is satisfied, after starting to fluctuate the effect symbols based on the result of the special game determination, at least one of the effect symbols is displayed by displaying a first predetermined image. It is possible to perform a first effect that makes some parts difficult to see ,
Before executing the first performance, the notification performance of the first aspect can be performed,
During the first performance, it is possible to execute the notification performance of a second aspect different from the first aspect without executing the notification performance of the first aspect ,
After the first performance, the performance pattern can be displayed,
When the predetermined condition is not satisfied, at least one of the performance symbols is displayed by displaying a second predetermined image different from the first predetermined image during the variable display of the performance symbols based on the result of the special game determination. It is possible to perform a second effect that makes the part difficult to see ,
After the second performance, the performance pattern can be displayed,
A gaming machine capable of controlling a game in the second gaming state when the first performance is executed.

Images